Personalizaciones de vehículos: Silverado EV RST 2024 | Chevrolet
Feb 12, 2024 · 13. Horn 0 100. 14. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 99 (Out of View). 15 ... G. Glass Alignment Arrows. Water may flow between the doors and.
2024
Silverado EV
Owner's Manual
Contents
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Litho in U.S.A. Part No. 24Silverado_EV_enUS_16702912B_2024FEB12
© 2024 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
2 Introduction
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and SILVERADO, are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name "General Motors of Canada Company" for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. This manual describes features that may or may not be on the vehicle because of optional equipment that was not purchased on the vehicle, model variants, country specifications, features/applications that may not be available in your region, or changes subsequent to this publication's release, including changes in standard or optional content.
Refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm the features.
Canadian Vehicle Owners
A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at www.helminc.com, or from:
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170 USA
Danger, Warning, and Caution
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them.
{ Danger
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death.
{ Warning
Warning indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death.
Caution Caution indicates a hazard that could result in property or vehicle damage.
A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means "Do not," "Do not do this," or "Do not let this happen."
Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator.
M : Shown when the owner's manual has
additional instructions or information.
* : Shown when the service manual has
additional instructions or information.
0 : Shown when there is more information
on another page -- "see page."
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. See the features in this manual for information.
u : Air Conditioning System
G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
$ : Brake System Warning Light
9 : Dispose of Used Components Properly
P : Do Not Apply High Pressure Water
[ : Energy Usage and Charge Mode
Selection
_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited
H : Flammable
g : First Responder [ : Forward Collision Alert R : Fuse Block Cover Lock Location + : Fuses _ : High Voltage j : ISOFIX/LATCH System Child Restraints Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers Properly
Installed
| : Lane Change Alert @ : Lane Departure Warning A : Lane Keep Assist X : Park Assist ~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator O : Power 7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert I : Registered Technician / : Remote Vehicle Start h : Risk of Electrical Fire > : Seat Belt Reminders
Introduction 3
Z : Service Vehicle Soon I : Side Blind Zone Alert 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)
a : Under Pressure k : Vehicle Ahead Indicator ] : Vehicle Ready
4 Introduction Instrument Panel Overview
Work Truck
1. Air Vents 0 179.
2. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 100.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 145.
3. Instrument Cluster (Work Truck) 0 109 or Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 111.
4. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 136.
5. Shift Switches. See Electric Drive Unit 0 198.
6. Infotainment Controls. See Overview 0 150.
7. Infotainment Display. See Using the System 0 151.
8. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 144.
Vehicle Alarm System. See Vehicle Security 0 33.
9. Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 176.
10. Power Outlets 0 101.
11. USB Port 0 157.
12. Steering Wheel Controls 0 151.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133.
13. Horn 0 100.
14. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 99 (Out of View).
15. Trailer Brake Control Panel. See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" under Towing Equipment 0 299.
16. Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
17. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure) 0 117.
18. Manual Hood Release.
19. Fuse Block Cover.
20. Electric Parking Brake 0 203
Tow/Haul Mode. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 273.
Power Hood Release. See Hood 0 19.
Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 145.
Introduction 5
6 Introduction
Uplevel
1. Air Vents 0 179.
2. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 100.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 145.
3. Regenerative Braking 0 205.
4. Instrument Cluster (Work Truck) 0 109 or Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 111.
5. Driver Monitoring System.
6. Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 136.
7. Shift Switches. See Electric Drive Unit 0 198.
8. Infotainment Controls. See Overview 0 150.
9. Infotainment Display. See Using the System 0 151.
10. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System 0 144.
Vehicle Alarm System. See Vehicle Security 0 33.
11. Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 176.
12. USB Port 0 157.
13. Power Outlets 0 101.
14. Wireless Charging 0 105.
15. Steering Wheel Controls 0 151.
Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133.
16. Horn 0 100.
17. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 99 (Out of View).
18. Trailer Brake Control Panel. See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" under Towing Equipment 0 299.
19. Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
Heated Steering Wheel 0 99 (If Equipped).
20. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure) 0 117.
21. Manual Hood Release.
22. Fuse Block Cover.
23. Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
Air Suspension 0 209.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 273.
Power Hood Release. See Hood 0 19.
Introduction 7
Power Tailgate Release. See Tailgate 0 29.
Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 145.
8 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Remote Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Digital Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Doors Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Midgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Vehicle Security Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interior Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . 36 Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Windows Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Keys and Locks
Keys
{ Warning
Leaving children in a vehicle with a remote key is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the remote key in the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with a remote key.
The mechanical key inside the remote key is used for the driver door and glove box.
To remove the mechanical key, press the button on the side of the remote key near the bottom, and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button.
The mechanical key may have a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key is needed.
If it becomes difficult to turn a key, inspect the key blade for debris. Periodically clean with a brush or pick.
With an active OnStar or connected service plan, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview 0 408.
If locked out of the vehicle, see Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
If equipped with memory seats, remote keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 45.
Remote Key
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
If there is a decrease in the remote key operating range:
. Check the distance. The remote key may be too far from the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.
. Check the remote key's battery. See "Battery Replacement" under Remote Key Operation 0 9.
. If the remote key is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 9 Remote Key Operation
The Keyless Access system allows for vehicle entry when the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft). See "Keyless Access Operation" later in this section. The remote key functions may work up to 60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle. Other conditions can affect the performance of the remote key. See Remote Key 0 9.
Q : Press to lock all doors.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash once on the second press to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled, the horn chirps when
Q is pressed again within three seconds. To
10 Keys, Doors, and Windows
view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Pressing Q arms the alarm system. See
Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
With power folding mirrors, double pressing
and holding Q for one second will fold the
mirrors, if enabled. Double press and hold
K for one second to unfold the mirrors. To
view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience.
K : Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed again within
three seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the vehicle is started.
If enabled, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. If enabled, the exterior lamps may turn on. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Pressing K on the remote key disarms the
alarm system. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 33.
Double press and hold K until the windows
fully open, if remote window operation is enabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
x : Press twice to open the tailgate. The
vehicle must be in P (Park).
m : Press twice to open the hood. Press
twice and hold to close the hood. In order to open or close remote key must be within 30m (100ft). The vehicle must be in P (Park).
7 : Press and release to initiate vehicle
locate. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold 7 for more than
three seconds to activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off when the vehicle is turned on or
7 is pressed again. The vehicle must be off
for the panic alarm to work.
S : Press S twice from outside the
vehicle to remote start the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be started if a remote key is left inside the vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
Keyless Access Operation
The Keyless Access system allows for doors, tailgate, and hood to be accessed without removing the remote key or digital key from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The remote key or digital key must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the tailgate, hood, or door being opened. If the vehicle has this feature, there will be a button on the outside door handles.
Keyless Access can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Remote keys 1 and 2 are linked to seating positions of memory 1 or 2. See Memory Seats 0 45.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door
When the doors are locked and the remote key or digital key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the lock/unlock button is pressed again within five seconds, the doors, tailgate, and hood will unlock.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur: . It has been more than five seconds since
the first lock/unlock button press. . Two lock/unlock button presses were
used to unlock all doors. . Any vehicle door has been opened and all
doors are now closed.
Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Passenger Doors
When the doors are locked and the remote key or digital key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger door handle will unlock all
doors. Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:
. The lock/unlock button was used to unlock all doors.
. Any vehicle door has been opened and all doors are now closed.
Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking of Exterior Door Handles, Tailgate, and Hood
Keyless unlocking of the exterior door handles, tailgate, and hood can be disabled and enabled.
Disabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same time for
approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash four times quickly to indicate access is disabled. Using any exterior handle to unlock the doors, open the tailgate, or open the hood will cause the turn signal lamps to flash four times quickly, indicating access is disabled. If disabled, disarm the alarm system before starting the vehicle.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 11
Enabling Keyless Unlocking:
With the vehicle off, press and hold Q and K on the remote key at the same time for
approximately three seconds. The turn signal lamps will flash twice quickly to indicate access is enabled.
To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Passive Locking
The Keyless Access system will lock the vehicle several seconds after all doors are closed, if the vehicle is off and at least one remote key or digital key has been removed from the interior, or none remain in the interior.
If other electronic devices interfere with the remote key or digital key signal, the vehicle may not detect the remote key or digital key inside the vehicle. If passive locking is enabled, the doors may lock with the remote key or digital key inside the vehicle. Do not leave the remote key or digital key in an unattended vehicle.
To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
12 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Temporary Disable of Passive Locking
Temporarily disable passive locking by
pressing and holding K on the interior door
switch with a door open for at least four seconds, or until three chimes are heard. Passive locking will then remain
disabled until Q on the interior door is
pressed, or until the vehicle is turned on.
Remote Left In Vehicle Alert
When the vehicle is turned off and a remote key or digital key is left in the vehicle, the horn will chirp three times after all doors are closed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Remote Removed From Vehicle Alert
If the vehicle is on with a door open, and then all doors are closed, the vehicle will check for remote keys and digital keys inside. If a remote key or digital key is not detected, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display NO KEY FOUND and the horn will chirp three times. This occurs only once each time the vehicle is driven. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Keyless Tailgate Opening
Press the touchpad on the tailgate to open the tailgate when all doors are unlocked, or when the remote key or digital key is within 1m (3 ft).
See Tailgate 0 29.
Keyless Hood Opening
Press the touchpad in the center of the front fascia once to open the hood when all doors are unlocked, or when the remote key or digital key is within 1m (3 ft).
See Hood 0 19.
Key Access
To access a vehicle with a weak remote key battery, see Door Locks 0 15.
Programming Remote Keys to the Vehicle
Only remote keys programmed to the vehicle will work. If a remote key is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so that lost or stolen remote keys no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to eight remote keys programmed to it.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low Remote Key Battery
For improved vehicle security, the remote key is equipped with a motion sensor. When starting the vehicle, if the remote key has been idle for an extended period of time, the DIC may display KEY IN SLEEP MODE, MOVE KEY, THEN START. Move the remote key slightly and try starting the vehicle.
If the remote key battery is weak or if there is interference with the signal, the DIC may display NO KEY FOUND, REPLACE BATTERY IN KEY or NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN KEY POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE when starting the vehicle.
To start the vehicle:
Battery Replacement
{ Warning
Never allow children to play with the remote key. The remote key contains a small battery, which can be a choking hazard. If swallowed, internal burns can occur, resulting in severe injury or death. Seek medical attention immediately if a battery is swallowed.
1. Place the remote key in the left cupholder.
2. With the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral) press the brake pedal or close the door. See Power Modes 0 195.
Replace the remote key battery and charge the digital key battery as soon as possible.
{ Warning
To avoid personal injury, do not touch metal surfaces on the remote key when it has been exposed to extreme heat. These surfaces can be hot to the touch at temperatures above 59 °C (138 °F).
Caution When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the remote key. Static from your body could damage the remote key.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 13
Caution
Always replace the battery with the correct type. Replacing the battery with an incorrect type could potentially create a risk of battery explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to instructions and local laws. Do not attempt to burn, crush, or cut the used battery, and avoid exposing the battery to environments with extremely low air pressures or high temperatures.
Caution
If the remote key is not reassembled properly, liquids could enter the housing and damage the circuitry, resulting in a remote key malfunction and/or failure. To prevent damage, always follow the steps for remote key reassembly in this manual to ensure the remote key is sealed properly whenever the remote key is opened.
Replace the battery in the remote key soon if the DIC displays REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.
14 Keys, Doors, and Windows
To replace the battery:
1. Press the button on the side of the remote key and pull the mechanical key out. Never pull the mechanical key out without pressing the button.
2. Use the mechanical key blade in the slot to remove the battery cover by hand.
3. Remove the battery cover.
4. Pull the seal by pulling on the tab to access the battery.
5. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
6. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up. Replace with a CR2450 Lithium or equivalent battery.
7. Place the seal back into the groove around the battery compartment.
8. Replace the battery cover by snapping it back into the remote key.
9. Reinsert the mechanical key.
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature starts the heating or air conditioning systems and the rear window defogger from outside the vehicle.
Use remote start to heat or cool the interior when the vehicle is plugged in to maximize electric range by utilizing electricity from the electrical outlet. Normal system operation will return after the vehicle has been turned on.
S : This button is on the remote key.
The climate control system will use the previous settings during a remote start. The rear defog may come on during a remote
start based on cold ambient conditions. The rear defog indicator light will not come on during a remote start.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if:
. The remote key is in the vehicle . The hood is open . 60 minutes of remote start time has
been used
. The hazard flashers are on . The vehicle is not in P (Park) . The vehicle is already turned on
If the battery level is low, do not use the remote start feature. The battery may fully deplete.
The remote key range may be less while the vehicle is running.
Other conditions may affect the range and performance of the remote key. See Remote Key 0 9.
Starting the Vehicle Using Remote Start
Press S twice on the remote key. The turn
signal lamps will flash to confirm the remote start request was received. During the remote start, the parking lamps will remain on as long as the vehicle is on.
The vehicle will turn off after 60 minutes, unless you stop the remote start before remote start cycle has completed or the vehicle is turned on.
Press the brake pedal or close the door to drive the vehicle. See Power Modes 0 195.
Extending Remote Start Time
Remote start can be used for up to 60 minutes of total remote start time.
After a remote start of 60 minutes, or multiple shorter time starts totaling 60 minutes have been used, the vehicle must be started and then turned off before the remote start can be used again.
Canceling a Remote Start
To cancel a remote start, do one of the following:
. Press /. The parking lamps will turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 15
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
Door Locks
{ Warning
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. The doors can be unlocked and opened while the vehicle is moving. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear seat belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.
16 Keys, Doors, and Windows
To lock or unlock the doors from outside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the remote key. See
Remote Key Operation 0 9. . Use the mechanical key in the
driver door.
To lock or unlock the doors from inside the vehicle:
. Press Q or K on the power door lock
switch. . Pulling an interior door handle will unlock
the door. Pulling the door handle again unlatches it.
Keyless Access
The remote key must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the eTrunkTM or door being opened or locked. Press the button on the door handle to open. See "Keyless Access Operation" in Remote Key Operation 0 9.
Free-Turning Locks
The door key lock cylinder turns freely when either the wrong key is used, or the correct key is not fully inserted. The free-turning door lock feature prevents the lock cylinder from being forced open. To reset the lock cylinder, ensure the correct key is fully inserted into the lock cylinder. Rotate the key until you feel the lock cylinder click back into place. Remove the key and reinsert fully, rotate the key to unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
Q : Press to lock the doors. The indicator
light in the switch will illuminate when locked.
K : Press to unlock the doors. Delayed Locking
This feature delays the locking of the doors until five seconds after all doors are closed.
When Q is pressed on the power door lock
switch while the door is open, a chime will sound three times indicating delayed locking is active.
The doors will lock automatically five seconds after all doors are closed. If a door is reopened before that time, the five-second timer will reset when all doors are closed again.
Press Q on the door lock switch again or press Q on the remote key to lock the
doors immediately.
This feature can be programmed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Power Door Locks.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the vehicle is on, and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
If a vehicle door is unlocked, and then opened and closed, the doors will lock either when your foot is removed from the brake or the vehicle speed becomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).
To unlock the doors:
. Press K on the power door lock switch.
. Shift the vehicle into P (Park).
Automatic door locking cannot be disabled. Automatic door unlocking can be programmed. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Power Door Locks.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking remote keys in the vehicle.
When the lock button is pressed, the driver door is open, and the vehicle is on, all of the doors will lock and then the driver door will unlock.
If the vehicle is off and locking is requested while a door is open, when all doors are closed the vehicle will check for remote keys inside. If a remote key is detected and the number of remote keys inside has not reduced, the driver door will unlock and the horn will sound three times.
This can be manually overridden by pressing
and holding Q on the power door lock
switch.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 17
The safety locks are on the inside edge of the rear doors. To engage a safety lock: 1. Move the lever down to the lock
position. 2. Close the door. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the other door,
if desired. To open a rear door when the safety lock is on: 1. Unlock the door by pulling the inside
handle, by pressing the power door unlock switch, or by using the remote key. 2. Open the door from the outside.
18 Keys, Doors, and Windows
To disengage a safety lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Move the lever up to unlock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the other door, if desired.
Digital Key
If equipped and enabled, the Digital Key feature allows you to access and operate the vehicle using a smartphone. Many of the functions performed by a remote key can also be done using a Digital Key. See Remote Key Operation 0 9.
Only certain smartphones support Digital Key. Please see the myChevrolet app to see if your device is compatible.
If the smartphone battery is weak or if there is interference with the signal, the Driver Information Center (DIC) may display NO KEY FOUND or NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED, PLACE KEY IN KEY POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE when starting the vehicle. Charge the smartphone battery as soon as possible.
You can use the myChevrolet mobile app to pair, manage, or delete your Digital Key.
If the Digital Key is not working:
. Check the distance. The smartphone may be too far from the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Your body could also impact the signal. Hold the smartphone in your hand, away from your body, and toward the vehicle for best results.
. Check that the smartphone is turned on and has sufficient battery power.
. Check the connection. Your smartphone's bluetooth connection must be enabled.
. Check the myChevrolet app. Ensure that it is open. Try relaunching the app if it is open but is still not working.
Setting up Digital Key
Digital Key is only available with an OnStar account associated with the vehicle.
1. Log in to your OnStar account in the MyChevrolet mobile app.
2. Select the Digital Key menu option, and follow the steps on your screen to pair your phone.
Using Your Digital Key
Digital Key allows you to:
. Use keyless access features to lock and unlock the vehicle's doors, and access the rear compartments without a remote key.
See "Keyless Access Operation" under Remote Key Operation 0 9.
. Start the vehicle with just your phone present.
. Use remote commands in the myChevrolet app to lock, unlock, and remote start the vehicle.
Digital Key Personal Identification Number (PIN)
As an added security measure, you will have the option to set up a PIN to be used with the Digital Key. When a PIN is enabled, you will be prompted to enter the PIN on your infotainment screen before starting your vehicle. After entering your PIN successfully, the vehicle can be started for a short period of time. If you do not start your vehicle within that time, you will be prompted for your PIN again.
Even if PIN to Start is enabled, you can still start your vehicle without entering a PIN if a remote key is in the vehicle, or by using your key card. See "Key Card" later in this section.
PIN Settings
If you forget your PIN, would like to change your PIN, or would like to enable/disable your PIN, you can do so via the Digital Key menu in your myChevrolet app.
PIN Lockout
If the PIN is entered incorrectly too many times, you will need to wait several minutes before attempting to enter your PIN again. You can still start your vehicle by using a remote key or key card. You may also reset your PIN or disable the PIN setting via the Digital Key menu in your myChevrolet app.
Key Card
Your vehicle may be equipped with a key card that unlocks, locks, and starts the vehicle. The key card works by tapping it on the location of the vehicle shown on the back of the key card.
It is highly recommended to carry a key card as a back up to the Digital Key in case the Digital Key battery is weak or there is interference to the signal. Only key cards programmed to the vehicle will work. If a key card is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. To prevent lost or stolen key cards from being able to operate the vehicle, see your dealer. Each vehicle can have up to eight key cards programmed to it.
Unlocking with the Key Card Tap your key card on the driver door near the edge of the window to unlock the driver door. Only the driver door may be unlocked
Keys, Doors, and Windows 19
this way. See Door Locks 0 15 for how to unlock the other doors and rear compartment.
Locking with the Key Card
With all doors closed, the vehicle off, and any door unlocked, tap your key card on the on the driver door near the edge of the window to lock all doors.
Starting with the Key Card
You can start your vehicle for a short period after unlocking it with your key card. If the period has ended, you will need to unlock the vehicle with the key card again to start your vehicle.
Doors
Hood
Manual Hood Release
{ Warning
Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before
(Continued)
20 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Warning (Continued)
driving. When the hood is not closed, the vehicle will not exceed 42 km/h (26 mph). Close the hood to drive faster than 42 km/h (26 mph).
The hood compartment can be accessed in several ways.
Ensure the hood is clear of any objects before opening.
If the hood is not closed, the electronic drive unit lockout prevents the vehicle from shifting out of P (Park). Close the hood to shift out of P (Park). Confirm the hood is closed by checking that the hood is flush with the surrounding components.
If the hood is closed but the ajar message is present, the electronic drive unit lockout can be overridden. Hold the brake for 20 seconds and then shift into D (Drive). The vehicle will not exceed 42 km/h (26 mph). See your dealer for service.
Hood Latch Release Button
1. To open the hood, press d on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 2. From the front of the vehicle, lift the hood slightly until the gas strut system automatically raises and holds it in the fully open position. 3. The hood light and Open Hood message will display in the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the hood is open. Using the Remote Key 1. To open the hood with the remote key,
press d twice.
2. From the front of the vehicle, lift the hood slightly until the gas strut system automatically raises and holds it in the fully open position.
Closing the Hood
1. Make sure all cargo is properly stowed and does not go above or across the storage bin seal.
2. Pull the hood down until the self-closing latch engages.
3. Check to make sure the hood is latched completely. Push down on the hood to latch if it does not latch completely. Repeat this step with additional force if necessary.
Power Hood Operation
Ensure the hood is clear of any objects before opening.
{ Warning
You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power hood. Make sure there is no one in the way of the hood as it is opening and closing.
The vehicle must be in P (Park), doors unlocked, or the remote key in range of the vehicle to operate the power hood. To open or close the power hood, do one of the following:
. To open the hood, press d on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
To close the hood, press and hold d
until the hood closes.
. If equipped, to open or close the hood, press the touchpad right of center of the front fascia once, when the vehicle is unlocked, or the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the vehicle.
. To open the hood with the remote key,
press m once, and then immediately
press again.
To close the hood with the remote key,
press m once, and then immediately
press again and hold until the hood is closed. See Remote Key Operation 0 9.
Pull to Close
To close the hood without using the switches, pull down on the hood until the power assist engages to close the rest of
Keys, Doors, and Windows 21
the way. A chime will sound to indicate power assist activation. The power assist will only activate when the hood is above a minimum open position.
Manually forcing the hood to open or close can damage the vehicle. Always allow the automatic operation to complete before using the hood again.
Caution
Manually operating the hood during a power open or close can damage the hood system. Always wait for the power operation to complete before manually operating the hood.
Open Settings
To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience > Power Hood Opening.
Maximum
The hood opens to the full open position. Use caution in this mode to avoid hitting overhead obstructions.
22 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Custom
To adjust the hood open angle, press the
exterior switch d or double press the remote key button m. When the hood
reaches the desired position where the height is to be programmed, press the remote key button or the exterior switch one time. The hood will stop.
The hood can be manually moved up or down. Pulling the hood too quickly may cause power assist to engage and close the
hood. Press d until the exterior lights flash
and a chime sounds. The hood cannot be set below the preset minimum programmable height. If no exterior lights flash or sound, then the height adjustment may be too low.
The hood is restricted to only open to a default height when the vehicle is on a steep downhill grade.
Off (Manual Operation)
Press and release the touch pad on the front fascia. Lift the hood to open to a desired height.
Pull down on the hood until the power assist engages to close. A chime will sound to indicate power activation. The power assist will only activate when the hood is above a minimum open position.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, do not move the hood too quickly or use excessive force.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the hood encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle, the hood will automatically reverse direction and move away from the obstacle. After removing the obstruction, the power hood operation can be used again.
If the vehicle is locked while the hood is closing and an obstacle is encountered that prevents the hood from completely closing, the horn will sound an alert that the hood did not close.
Falling Hood Detection
If the power hood encounters excess weight or a possible mechanical failure, a repetitive chime will sound and the hood will automatically lower to a stable position. If the hood stops before fulling closing,
carefully push the hood closed while keeping hands away from the edges of the hood.
If the hood continues to automatically close after opening, see your dealer for service before using the power hood.
Interfering with the power hood motion or manually closing the hood too quickly may activate the falling hood detection feature. Allow the hood to complete its operation and wait a few seconds before manually closing the hood.
Operating the Hood When There is No Electrical Power
The manual release cable should only be used for service and/or emergency use, such as loss of vehicle electrical power. Do not store any cargo in the area near the hood release cable.
To open the hood:
1. Firmly pull the hood release cable twice to release the hood. It is on the lower left side of the instrument panel.
3. Go to the front of the vehicle and lift the hood to the desired height.
To close the hood:
1. Before closing the hood, make sure all cargo is properly stowed and does not go above or across the hood seal.
2. Pull the hood down until it is secured in the latch.
3. Check to make sure the hood is latched completely. Push down on the hood to latch if it does not latch completely. Repeat this step with additional force if necessary.
When the hood is not latched, a message will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the vehicle will not be able to
shift out of P (Park). To override this function, press and hold the shift button and brake pedal until the DIC message shifter unlock complete is displayed. The vehicle's speed will be limited to 42 km/h (26 mph) when the hood is not completely closed.
If the vehicle has lost power, and the hood is open when the power is restored, the power hood and power closing latch will not operate. To allow powered hood operation again, the hood must be manually closed and fully latched.
{ Warning
Do not drive the vehicle if the hood is not latched completely. The hood could open fully, block your vision, and cause a crash. You or others could be injured. Always close the hood completely before driving.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 23 Emergency Hood Release Button
The underhood compartment is equipped with a glow-in-the-dark emergency hood release button. This button will glow following exposure to light. Press the button to open the hood from inside the underhood compartment.
{ Warning
The emergency hood release button inside the underhood compartment will not function when the battery is disconnected or depleted. To avoid personal injury or death, always keep the hood fully closed and latched when
(Continued)
24 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Warning (Continued)
storing the vehicle. If the hood is not latched, a person could climb into the underhood compartment and inadvertently close the hood. People should never climb inside the underhood compartment. Never shut the hood when a person is inside.
Midgate
Midgate Operation
This vehicle may be equipped with a midgate and a removable rear glass panel. The midgate allows you to extend the length of the vehicle cargo area.
The following are the main components of the Midgate system:
A. Glass Latch Levers
B. Glass Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch Release Button
D. Glass Stow Retainer
E. Glass Retaining Tabs
F. Switch Buttons
G. Glass Alignment Arrows
Water may flow between the doors and around the base of the midgate while being directed into a gutter system. There are water symbols located on the midgate switch buttons (F) to indicate that the midgate surface may be wet. Water
drippings may be visible inside the vehicle when the full midgate or passthrough doors are opened.
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
{ Warning
If the removable rear glass is not stored properly, it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store the rear glass in the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored securely in the Midgate® storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is on. If you do, you may see a discharge spark coming from the glass latch area.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
1. Make sure that the midgate defroster is turned off.
2. Fold the rear seats. See Rear Seats 0 49. The front seats may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold completely.
Although the rear glass can be removed without folding the rear seats, you will not be able to access the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold the seats before removing the rear glass.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 25
3. Squeeze and pull down the glass latch levers (A), located near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch. Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C) will catch the rear glass and prevent it from falling forward.
4. While holding the rear glass in place, press the glass-catch release button (C) and pull the top of the rear glass toward you using the grab handles (B) located at the top of the rear glass.
5. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from the lower window frame channel. Use the grab handles (B) to assist you in removing the rear glass.
26 Keys, Doors, and Windows
6. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the midgate, guiding the lower edge of the rear glass behind the two rear glass retaining tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket, with grab handles facing you, until the next step.
7. Push the glass against the glass stow retainer (D), located on the interior side of the door. Push until the glass handle slides down to lock the glass in place.
Once the glass stow retainer handle is in the locked position, the rear glass is securely stored.
8. Push both glass latch levers (A) up to the locked position. You should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly.
The rear seats can be returned to the normal position when the rear glass is out and stored properly in the storage pocket.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the glass latch levers (A), located near the upper corners of the rear glass opening, to unlatch.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and push up on the glass stow retainer handle. You should hear a click sound when the handle is all the way up.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using the grab handles (B).
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place the bottom edge in the lower channel of the window frame.
Be sure to align the rear glass side-to-side using the glass alignment arrows (G).
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the rear glass flat against the window frame. Use the grab handles (B) at the top of the rear glass to assist you.
6. Push the rear glass flat against the window frame and push each glass latch lever (A) up until it locks. You should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 27
Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in Place
The midgate can be lowered to allow the cargo area of your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.
To lower the midgate:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold. See Rear Seats 0 49.
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the midgate securely so it does not fall forward. Press and hold the switch button depending on configuration below:
Glass and Crossbar in, Pass Through Doors Only
. A short press on either switch button, of less than two seconds opens the larger door of the midgate.
. A short press on either switch button, of less than two seconds, opens smaller door of the midgate if larger door is already open.
28 Keys, Doors, and Windows
. A double short press opens both doors of the midgate.
Glass Stowed in Midgate, Full Open Cab A short press of less than two seconds is required to open full midgate. Lowering the Midgate with the Rear Glass in the Storage Pocket
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Attached
This procedure works the same as the procedure described previously, but when you lower the midgate with the rear glass in the stored position, you will notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the midgate. This is completely normal; however, since the crossbar lowers with the midgate, it will be heavier. As you lower the midgate be ready for the extra weight and do not let the midgate fall as you lower it.
{ Warning
Unsecured cargo can be tossed about during a sudden stop or collision potentially causing passengers to be struck by flying objects. When storing cargo on midgate, ensure it is secured properly.
Raising the Midgate
To return the midgate to its normal position:
1. Temporarily secure the seatbelt buckle to the opening slot in the door trim to move it out of the path of the midgate.
2. Raise the midgate up with a firm swinging motion until it latches into place securely. This will help to ensure that the midgate closes with enough force to engage the latches.
3. Once the midgate is securely latched, release the seatbelt buckle from the slot in the door trim.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put it back, do so using the instructions given previously.
Tailgate
Manual Tailgate
{ Warning
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds. People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death. Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
Use the remote key to unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate down.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After closing the tailgate, pull it back to be sure it is latched securely.
Some tailgates electronically control if the tailgate is locked or unlocked. If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage, and the tailgate is locked, the tailgate will not open. The tailgate will resume operation when the battery is reconnected or recharged.
MultiFlex Tailgate
{ Warning
Make sure there is no one in the way of the power tailgate as it is opening and closing, and keep hands away from the tailgate hinges when in use. You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power tailgate or tailgate hinges.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 29
Caution
To avoid damage to the tailgate, make sure the area behind the tailgate is clear before opening it.
In the case of a dead battery, the tailgate can be opened manually. Contact your dealer or Roadside Assistance.
Use the remote key to lock or unlock the tailgate. See Remote Key Operation 0 9.
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
Switches in the inner tailgate prevent the primary tailgate from being opened when the inner tailgate is not fully closed. When the primary or inner tailgate are open, a message may display on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
30 Keys, Doors, and Windows
. Press x twice quickly on the remote
key until the tailgate moves. See Remote Key Operation 0 9. The tailgate can be opened if the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft).
To open the primary tailgate, use one of the following methods:
. Press 5 on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering wheel.
. Press Button 1 to open the primary tailgate. Use the top of the tailgate to pull against if additional force is required. A locked tailgate can be opened if the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft).
To close the primary tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches. Pull it back to be sure it is latched securely.
To open the inner tailgate:
Press Button 2 on the tailgate handle after unlocking all doors. Pull the top of the tailgate to open.
The inner tailgate may be equipped with an enable/disable feature to prevent the inner tailgate from being opened when a hitch or other equipment is installed that could damage the inner tailgate. To disable the inner tailgate from opening, ensure that the remote key is within 1 m (3 ft) of the rear bumper and then hold the Button 2 on the tailgate handle for seven seconds. The tail lamps will flash to alert you that the inner gate has been disabled. The inner and outer
tailgate can still be operated like a traditional tailgate, but the inner gate will not be able to be opened alone. To enable the inner tailgate function, hold the Button 2 on the tailgate handle for seven seconds while the remote key is within 1 m (3 feet) until the tail lamps flash. The inner tailgate can now be opened separately from the outer tailgate.
Caution To avoid vehicle damage, do not open the inner tailgate when the primary tailgate is open if there is not enough distance to the attached hitch ball or trailer.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 31
To close the inner tailgate with the primary tailgate closed, firmly push or pull it upward until it latches. Pull or push it back to be sure it is latched securely.
To close the inner tailgate with the primary tailgate open: . Hold the primary tailgate and firmly close
the inner tailgate. . Raise the inner tailgate so it meets the
primary tailgate and close together at the same time.
When using the tailgate step as a load stop, the load must be secured as the load could shift. See Cargo Tie-Downs 0 97.
Tailgate Step (Step Mode)
{ Warning
To avoid personal injury, keep hands away from the hinges when operating the tailgate step.
With the primary and inner tailgates open, the tailgate step can be lowered to access the pickup bed.
32 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Using the Step
Caution When using the tailgate as a step, the load rating is 170 kg (375 lb), which includes a person and cargo. Overloading the tailgate step can cause damage to the tailgate system.
. To lower the tailgate step, press the button at the center of the step. Make sure it lowers to the fully open position.
. To close the tailgate step, lift it firmly. Make sure that both side latches are engaged.
Do not place a load on top of the step when using it as a load stop.
Applying Loads to Tailgates
Caution Do not put ramp loads on the inner tailgate alone. Damage to the inner tailgate may occur.
Preferred Method Alternate Method
When applying any load to the tailgate, distribute the weight evenly across the width of the tailgate. This applies to all tailgate types. . Use a load-distributing item (1). . Secure the ramp to the bumper (2).
Vehicle Security
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal.
Vehicle Alarm System
The indicator light on the driver door switch indicates the status of the system. See Power Door Locks 0 16
Arming the Alarm System
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Lock the vehicle in one of three ways:
. Use the remote key.
. Use the Keyless Access system.
. With a door open, press Q on the
interior of the door.
3. After 30 seconds the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to
slowly flash. Pressing Q on the remote
key a second time will bypass the 30-second delay and immediately arm the alarm system.
The vehicle alarm system will not arm if the doors are locked with the mechanical key.
If the driver door is opened without first unlocking with the remote key, the horn will chirp and the lights will flash to indicate pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started, or if
the door is not unlocked by pressing K on
the remote key during the 10-second pre-alarm, the alarm will be activated.
The alarm will also be activated if a passenger door, the tailgate, or the hood is opened without first disarming the system. When the alarm is activated, the turn signals flash and the horn sounds for about
Keys, Doors, and Windows 33
30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event.
Disarming the Alarm System
To disarm the alarm system or turn off the alarm if it has been activated:
. Press K on the remote key.
. Unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Access system.
. Start the vehicle.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: . Lock the vehicle after all occupants have
exited. . Always unlock a door with the remote
key, or use the Keyless Access system.
Unlocking the driver door with the mechanical key will not disarm the system or turn off the alarm.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If K is pressed on the remote key and the
horn chirps three times, an alarm occurred previously while the alarm system was armed.
34 Keys, Doors, and Windows
If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Immobilizer
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system. The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off. The immobilization system is disarmed when the vehicle is turned on and a valid remote key is present in the vehicle.
The security light in the instrument cluster comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
The system has one or more remote keys matched to an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched remote key will start the vehicle. If the remote key is ever damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, the security light may come on briefly.
If the vehicle does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the vehicle off and try again.
If the vehicle will not turn on or off, and the remote key appears to be undamaged, try another remote key. You may also try placing the remote key in the backup location. See Remote Key Operation 0 9.
If the vehicle will not turn on or off with the other remote key or in the backup location, the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle does turn on or off, the first remote key may be faulty. See your dealer.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement remote keys. Up to eight remote keys can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional remote keys, see "Programming Remote Keys to the Vehicle" under Remote Key Operation 0 9.
Do not leave the remote key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Exterior Mirrors
Power Mirrors
Uplevel Truck Shown, Base Truck Similar To adjust the mirrors:
1. Press } or | to select the driver or
passenger side mirror. The indicator light comes on. 2. Press the arrows on the control pad to move the mirror up, down, right, or left.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen.
4. Press either } or | again to deselect
the mirror. The indicator light goes off.
Puddle Lamps
Puddle lamps project light to the area of ground below the front and rear doors, on both the driver and passenger side. See Entry Lighting 0 146 and Exit Lighting 0 147.
Memory Mirrors
The vehicle may have memory mirrors. See Memory Seats 0 45.
Lane Change Alert (LCA)
The vehicle may have LCA. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 267.
Folding Mirrors
To adjust power folding mirrors:
1. Press { to fold the mirrors inward. 2. Press { again to return the mirrors to
the driving position. The outside mirrors may automatically unfold when the vehicle is driven above 20 km/h (12 mph), but may be folded with the power folding mirror switch. If the vehicle speed is driven above 40 km/h (25 mph), they may automatically unfold and may not be refolded with the power folding mirror switch.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 35
Resetting the Power Folding Mirrors
Reset the power folding mirrors if: . The mirrors are accidentally obstructed
while folding. . They are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded. . The mirrors do not stay in the unfolded
position. . The mirrors vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A noise may be heard during the resetting of the power folding mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation.
Remote Mirror Folding
If the mirrors have been folded with the power folding mirror switch, they may not be unfolded by use of remote key.
If the mirrors have not been folded with the power folding mirror switch and the vehicle is in P (Park), they may be automatically folded/unfolded as follows:
. If doors are locked by double pressing
and holding H on the remote key, the
mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by
36 Keys, Doors, and Windows
double pressing and holding I on the
remote key, the mirrors will unfold. See Remote Key Operation 0 9. . If doors are locked by pressing the door handle button, the mirrors will fold. If doors are unlocked by pressing the door handle button, the mirrors will unfold. See "Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door" in Remote Key Operation 0 9. . If passive locking is enabled and doors are locked by that feature, the mirrors will fold. See "Passive Locking" in Remote Key Operation 0 9.
Heated Mirrors
To heat the mirrors, press K on the
infotainment display.
See "Rear Window Defogger" under Dual Automatic Climate Control System 0 176.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The driver outside mirror automatically adjusts for the glare of the headlamps from behind. This feature comes on when the vehicle is started.
Reverse Tilt Mirrors
If equipped with reverse tilt mirrors and memory seats, the passenger and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the curb to be seen when parallel parking.
The mirror(s) may move from their tilted position when: . The vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) or
remains in R (Reverse) for about 30 seconds. . The vehicle is turned off. . The vehicle is driven in R (Reverse) above a set speed.
To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience.
Interior Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirrors
Adjust the rearview mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water.
Manual Rearview Mirror
If equipped, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it rearward for nighttime use to avoid glare of the headlamps from behind.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If equipped, automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started.
Rear Camera Mirror
The rear camera mirror provides a wide angle camera view of the area behind the vehicle.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 37
The adjustment options are:
Pull the tab back to turn on the display. Push the tab to turn it off. When off the mirror automatically dims. Adjust the mirror for a clear view of the area behind the vehicle while the display is off.
Press V to scroll through the adjustment
options.
Press t and u to adjust the settings using
the indicators on the mirror. The indicators will remain visible for five seconds after the last button activation, and the settings will remain saved.
. Brightness
. Zoom
38 Keys, Doors, and Windows
. Tilt
{ Warning
The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) has a limited view. Portions of the road, vehicles, and other objects may not be seen. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only this camera. Objects may appear closer than they are. Check the outside mirrors or glance over your shoulder when making lane changes or merging. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Troubleshooting
See your dealer for service if a blue screen
and 3 are displayed in the mirror, and
the display shuts off. Also, push the tab forward to return to the automatic dimming mode.
The Rear Camera Mirror may not work properly or display a clear image if:
. There is glare from the sun or headlamps. This may obstruct objects from view. If needed, push the tab to turn off the display.
. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocks the camera lens. Clean the lens with a soft damp cloth.
. The camera mounting on the vehicle has been damaged, and/or the position or the mounting angle of the camera has changed.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 39
Warning (Continued) children in the rear seat, use the window lockout switch to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys 0 8.
Windows
{ Warning
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.
The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve vehicle range performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped.
Power Windows
{ Warning
Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave the remote key in a vehicle with children. When there are
(Continued)
The power windows work when the vehicle is on or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Power Modes 0 195.
Using the window switch, press to open or pull to close the window.
The windows may be temporarily disabled if they are used repeatedly within a short time.
40 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Window Lockout
This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating, except from the driver position.
There is a button on the infotainment display used to enable or disable this feature.
Windows Express Movement
All windows can be opened without holding the window switch. Press the switch down fully and quickly release to express open the window.
If equipped, pull the window switch up fully and release to express close the window.
Briefly press or pull the window switch to stop that window's express movement.
Window Automatic Reversal System
The express-close feature will reverse window movement if it comes in contact with an object. Extreme cold or ice could also cause the windows to autoreverse. The window will operate normally after the object or condition is removed.
Programming the Power Windows
Programming may be necessary if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the window is unable to express-up, program each express-close window:
1. Close all doors.
2. Turn the vehicle on.
3. Partially open the window to be programmed. Then close it and continue to pull the switch briefly after the window has fully closed.
4. Open the window and continue to press the switch briefly after the window has fully opened.
Remote Window Operation
If equipped, this feature allows the windows to be opened remotely. If enabled in vehicle
settings, double press and hold K on the
remote key. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, Start.
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. If equipped, detach the sun visor from the center mount to pivot to the side window or to extend along the rod. If equipped, there is a lighted mirror on the sun visor. Lift the cover to open.
Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Front Seats Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Heated and Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . 48
Rear Seats Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Heated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Seat Belts Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . . . . 54 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . 59 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag System Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . 63 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . 63 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . 64 What Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Child Restraints Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) . . . . . 89
Seats and Restraints 41
Head Restraints
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Front Seats
The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
42 Seats and Restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Rear Head Restraints
The vehicle's rear seat has head restraints in the outboard seating positions that cannot be adjusted.
If you are installing a child restraint in the rear seat, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76.
Center Headrest
To raise or lower the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint and pull up or push the head restraint down and release the button.
Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The front seat outboard head restraints are not removable.
The head restraint can be folded forward to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied. To fold the head restraint, press the button on the side of the head restraint.
When an occupant is in the seat, always return the head restraint to the upright position until it locks into place. Push and pull on the head restraint to make sure that it is locked.
The vehicle's rear seat has adjustable headrest in the center seating position. The headrest can be fully lowered into the seatback to allow for better visibility when the rear seat is unoccupied. When an occupant is in the seat, always pull the headrest up to raise it. Try to move the headrest to make sure that it is locked in place.
To lower the headrest, press the button located on the top of the seatback and push the headrest down. Try to move the headrest after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place.
If you are installing a child restraint in the rear seat, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76.
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust a manual seat:
1. Pull the handle at the front of the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and forth to be sure it is locked in place.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 44.
To adjust the lumbar support, if equipped, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 45.
Seats and Restraints 43
Power Seat Adjustment
{ Warning
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
{ Warning
The power seats will work with the vehicle off. Children could operate the power seats and be injured. Never leave children alone in the vehicle.
44 Seats and Restraints
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: . Move the seat forward or rearward by
sliding the control forward or rearward. . Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks 0 44.
To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment 0 45.
Some vehicles are equipped with a feature that activates a vibrating pulse alert in the driver seat to help the driver avoid crashes. See Driver Attention Assist 0 271.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the seat belts cannot do their job.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the seat belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ Warning
If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked.
To adjust a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
The seatback will automatically fold forward.
2. To recline, move the seatback rearward to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback, and the seatback will return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline a power seatback, if equipped: . Tilt the top of the control rearward to
recline. . Tilt the top of the control forward to
raise.
Lumbar Adjustment
To adjust the lumbar support, if equipped:
. Press and hold the front or rear of the control to increase or decrease lumbar support.
. If equipped, press and hold the top or bottom of the control to raise or lower lumbar support.
Seats and Restraints 45 Memory Seats
Overview If equipped, the memory seat feature allows drivers to save their unique driving positions and a shared exit position. See "Saving Seating Positions" later in this section. The saved positions can be recalled manually by all drivers, see "Manually Recalling Seating Positions" later in this section, and drivers with remote key 1 and 2 can also recall them automatically. See "Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall" or "Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall" later in this section. To enable automatic recalls, turn on Seat Entry Memory and/or Seat Exit Memory. See "Enabling Automatic Recalls" later in this
46 Seats and Restraints
section. The memory recalls may be canceled at any time during the recall. See "Cancel Memory Seating Recalls" later in this section.
Identifying Driver Number
The vehicle identifies the current driver by their remote key number 18. The current remote key number may be identified by Driver Information Center (DIC) welcome message, "You are driver x for memory recalls." This message is displayed the first few times the vehicle is turned on when a different remote key is used. For Seat Entry Memory to work properly, save positions to the 1 or 2 memory button matching the driver number of this welcome message. To aid in identifying remote key IDs, it is recommended to only carry one remote key when entering the vehicle. Perform the following if the welcome message is not displayed:
1. Move all keys and remote keys away from the vehicle.
2. Start the vehicle with another remote key. A DIC welcome message should display indicating the driver number of the other remote key. Turn the vehicle off and remove the other key or remote key from the vehicle.
3. Start the vehicle with the initial key or remote key. The DIC welcome message should display the driver number of the initial remote key.
Saving Seating Positions
Read these instructions completely before saving memory positions.
To save preferred driving positions to 1 and 2:
1. Turn the vehicle on. A DIC welcome message may indicate the driver number of the current remote key. See "Identifying Driver Number" previously in this section.
2. Adjust all available memory features to the desired driving position.
3. Press and release SET; a beep will sound.
4. Immediately upon releasing SET, press and hold memory button 1 or 2 matching the current remote key number until two beeps sound. If too much time passes between releasing SET and pressing 1 or 2, the two beeps will not sound indicating memory position were not saved. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to try again.
5. Repeat Steps 14 for the other remote key 1 or 2 using the other 1 or 2 memory button.
It is recommended to save the preferred driving positions to both 1 and 2 if you are the only driver.
To save the common exit seating position to
B that is used by all drivers for Manually
Recalling Seating Positions and Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall features, repeat Steps 1
4 using B, the exit button.
Manually Recalling Seating Positions
Press and hold 1, 2, or B button until the
recall is complete, to recall the positions previously saved to that button.
Manual Memory recall movement for 1, 2 or
B buttons may be initiated and will
complete to the saved memory position if the vehicle is in or out of P (Park).
Enabling Automatic Recalls
. Seat Entry Memory moves the driver seat to the selected 1 or 2 position when the vehicle is started. Select Settings > Vehicle > Seating Position > Seat Entry Memory > ON or OFF. See "Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall" later in this section.
. Seat Exit Memory moves the driver seat
to the preferred exit position of the B
button when the vehicle is turned off and the door is opened. Select Settings >
Vehicle > Seating Position > Seat Exit Memory > Select ON or OFF. See "Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall" later in this section.
Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall
Seat Entry Memory will automatically begin movement to the seating positions of the 1 or 2 button corresponding to remote key number 1 or 2 detected by the vehicle when:
. The vehicle is turned ON.
. Seating positions have been previously saved to the same 1 or 2 button. See "Saving Seating Positions" previously in this section.
. Seat Entry Memory is enabled. See "Enabling Automatic Recalls" previously in this section.
. The vehicle is in P (Park).
Seat Entry Memory Recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.
If the saved memory seat position does not automatically recall, verify the recall is enabled. See "Enabling Automatic Recalls" previously in this section.
If the memory seat recalls to the wrong position, remote key number 1 or 2 may not match the memory button number positions they were saved to. Try the other remote key or try saving the positions to the other 1 or 2 memory button. See "Saving Seating Positions" previously in this section.
Automatic Seat Entry Memory recalls are only available for remote key numbers 1 and 2. Remote keys 38 will not provide Seat Entry Memory recalls.
Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall
Seat Exit Memory will begin movement to
the seating position of the B
button when:
. The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is open or opened within a short time.
. A seating position has been previously
been saved to the B memory button.
See "Saving Seating Positions" previously in this section.
. Seat Exit Memory is enabled. See "Enabling Automatic Recalls" previously in this section.
. The vehicle is in P (Park).
Seats and Restraints 47
Seat Exit Memory recall will continue if the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) prior to reaching the saved memory position.
Seat Exit Memory is not linked to a remote
key. The seating position saved to B is
used for all drivers.
Cancel Memory Seating Recalls . During any memory recall:
Press a power seat control
Press SET memory button . During Manual memory recall:
Release 1, 2, or B memory button
. During Auto Seat Entry Memory Recall: Turn vehicle off
Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons
. During Auto Seat Exit Memory Recall:
Press SET, 1, 2, or B memory buttons
Obstructions
If something has blocked the seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction and try the recall again. If the memory position still does not recall, see your dealer.
48 Seats and Restraints
Heated and Ventilated Front Seats
{ Warning
If temperature change or pain to the skin cannot be felt, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat.
Base Model
If equipped, the buttons are located on the center stack. To operate, the vehicle must be on.
Press M or L to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion.
Uplevel Model
To operate, press heated and ventilated seats launch button. The panel will remain open for approximately five seconds.
Press I or + to heat the driver or
passenger seatback.
Press J or z to heat the driver or
passenger seatback and cushion.
Press C or {, if available, to ventilate the
driver or passenger seat. A ventilated seat has a fan that pulls or pushes air through the seat. The air is not cooled. When this feature is off, the heated and ventilated seat
symbols are white. When a heated seat is on, the symbol is red. When a ventilated seat is on, the symbol is blue.
Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes.
The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.
Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats
When the vehicle is on, this feature will automatically activate the heated or ventilated seats at the level required by the vehicle's interior temperature.
The active high, medium, low, or off heated or ventilated seat level will be indicated by the manual heated or ventilated seat buttons on the door panel. Use the manual heated or ventilated seat buttons on the door panel to turn auto heated or ventilated seats off. If the passenger seat is unoccupied, the auto heated or ventilated seats feature will not activate that seat. To
enable or disable auto heated or ventilated seats, select Settings > Vehicle > Climate and Air Quality > Auto Cooled or Auto Heated Seats > ON or OFF.
Remote Start Heated and Ventilated Seats
During a remote start, the heated or ventilated seats, if equipped, can be turned on automatically. When it is cold outside, the heated seats turn on, and when it is hot outside the ventilated seats turn on. If the auto heated or ventilated seats feature is not on when then vehicle is turned on, the heated or ventilated seats may be canceled. If necessary, press the heated or ventilated seat button to use the heated or ventilated seats after the vehicle is started.
The heated or ventilated seat indicator lights may turn on during a remote start.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
To enable or disable remote start heated or ventilated seats, select Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start > Remote Start Auto Heat Seats or Remote Start Auto Cool Seats > ON or OFF. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
Seats and Restraints 49
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Reminder
If equipped, the message REAR SEAT REMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEAT displays under certain conditions indicating there may be an item or passenger in the rear seat. Check before exiting the vehicle.
This feature will activate when a second row door is opened while the vehicle is on or up to 10 minutes before the vehicle is turned on. There will be an alert when the vehicle is turned off. The alert does not directly detect objects in the rear seat; instead, under certain conditions, it detects when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seat.
The feature is active only once each time the vehicle is turned on and off, and will require reactivation by opening and closing the second row doors. There may be an alert even when there is nothing in the rear seat; for example, if a child entered the vehicle through the rear door and left the vehicle without the vehicle being shut off.
50 Seats and Restraints
The feature can be turned on or off. Select Settings > Vehicle > Rear Seat Reminder > ON or OFF.
Folding the Rear Seat Cushion (Uplevel Models)
Either side of the rear seat cushion can be folded down for added cargo space.
{ Warning
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat.
{ Warning
Do not operate the vehicle with the rear seat cushion(s) folded down and the rear seatbacks in the upright position. The folded seat cushion is not locked. It can move when the vehicle is in motion. People in the vehicle could be injured in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat cushion to the seating position
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) or fold the adjoining seatback down before driving the vehicle. Push and pull on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked into place. Make sure that nothing is on the seat cushion and the floor area in front of the rear seats is clear.
Pull the strap on the rear edge of the rear seat cushion to release the cushion. Tilt the seat cushion forward toward the front of the vehicle.
Raising the Rear Seat Cushion (Uplevel Models)
Return the seat cushion to its original position and push down on the rear part of the seat cushion until it latches. Make sure the seat belts and seat belt buckles are not trapped under the seat cushion and are properly positioned for use.
Folding the Rear Seatback (Uplevel Models)
{ Warning
Folding a rear seatback with the head restraint in the upright position may cause damage to the seat or the head restraint. Always fold the head restraint before folding the seatback. See Head Restraints 0 41.
Caution
Folding the rear seatback prior to tilting the seat cushion forward may damage the rear seat. Always tilt the rear seat cushion forward before folding the seatback.
Either side of the seatback can be folded down for more cargo space. Fold a seatback only when the vehicle is not moving. The seat cushion must be tilted forward before the folding seatback is folded down. Otherwise, the seatback will not fold down properly.
Pull the release strap located below the seat cushion to unlock the seatback. Fold the seatback forward and down.
Raising the Seatback (Uplevel Models)
{ Warning
A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After restoring the seat to the normal seating position, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1. Lift the seatback and push it rearward to lock it in place.
Make sure the seat belts are not pinched by the seatback locking mechanism.
2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position.
If additional cargo space is not needed, the seatbacks should be kept in the upright, locked position.
Folding the Rear Seat Cushion (Base Models)
Either side of the rear seat cushion can be folded up for added cargo space.
Seats and Restraints 51
{ Warning
Folding a rear seat with the seat belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the seat belts. Always unbuckle the seat belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Make sure that nothing is on the seat cushion and the floor area in front of the rear seats is clear.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up. To return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly pull the seat cushion down.
52 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
A seat belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After restoring the seat to the normal seating position, always check to be sure that the seat belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted.
Heated Rear Seats
{ Warning
If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns. See the Warning under Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 48.
If available, the buttons are on the rear of the center console. To operate, the vehicle must be on.
Press M or L to heat the left or right
outboard seat cushion. An indicator on the climate control display appears when this feature is on.
This feature turns on at the highest setting. With each press of the button, the heated seat changes to the next lower setting, and then the off setting. Three lights indicate the highest setting, and one light indicates the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes.
Remote Start Heated Seats
If equipped, the heated seats will turn on automatically during a remote start if it is cold outside. The heated seat indicators may come on during this operation. The heated seats may cancel when the vehicle is turned on. These features can be manually selected with the heated seat buttons after the vehicle is turned on.
The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal.
To enable or disable remote start heated seats, select Settings > Vehicle > Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start > Remote Start Auto Heat Seats > ON or OFF. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14.
Seat Belts
This section describes how to use seat belts properly, and some things not to do.
{ Warning
Do not let anyone ride where a seat belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
wearing seat belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing seat belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the seat belts. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 114.
Why Seat Belts Work
When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the seat belts! When you wear a seat belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the seat belts. That is why wearing seat belts makes such good sense.
Seats and Restraints 53
Questions and Answers About Seat Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a seat belt?
A: You could be -- whether you are wearing a seat belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear seat belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only. They work with seat belts -- not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing seat belts.
Buckle To Drive
If equipped, this feature delays the vehicle from shifting out of P (Park) when the driver seat belt is not buckled. The Buckle to Drive feature must be turned ON in the infotainment system to work. To turn the Buckle to Drive feature on or off, select Settings > Vehicle > Buckle to Drive. See Teen Driver 0 171, if equipped.
54 Seats and Restraints
If the vehicle is on and the brake pedal is pressed with the vehicle in P (Park) but the driver seat belt is not buckled, a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the vehicle will be delayed from shifting out of P (Park). Buckle the driver seat belt to clear the message and shift out of P (Park). Shifting from P (Park) will be delayed once for each time the vehicle is started.
On some models, Buckle to Drive may also delay shifting out of P (Park) if a front passenger seat belt is unbuckled. A message displays in the DIC. Buckle the front passenger seat belt to clear the message and shift out of P (Park). This feature may delay the vehicle from shifting out of P (Park) if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is on the front passenger seat. If this happens, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt to shift out of P (Park).
If the driver, or on some vehicles, the present front passenger remains unbuckled, the DIC message will turn off after several seconds and the vehicle can be shifted out of P (Park). See "Seat Belts" and "Child
Restraints" in the Index for information about the importance of proper restraint use.
If the driver seat belt or the front passenger seat belt is unbuckled when driving, the seat belt reminder chime and light(s) will come on. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 114. This feature may not function properly if the airbag readiness light is on. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115.
How to Wear Seat Belts Properly
Follow these rules for everyone's protection.
There are additional things to know about seat belts and children, including smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children 0 70 or Infants and Young Children 0 71. Review and follow the rules for children in addition to the following rules.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing seat belts.
There are important things to know about wearing a seat belt properly.
. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you (if possible).
. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
{ Warning
You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your seat belt properly.
Seats and Restraints 55
Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.
Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.
Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.
56 Seats and Restraints
Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest.
{ Warning
The seat belt can be pinched if it is routed under plastic trim on the seat, such as trim around the rear seatback folding handle or side airbag. In a crash, pinched seat belts might not provide adequate protection. Never allow seat belts to be routed under plastic trim pieces.
{ Warning
You can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind your back, under your legs, or wrapped around your neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around you. You may have to cut the seat belt if it is locked and tightened around you.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see "Seats" in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. See Child Restraint Systems 0 73. If this occurs, let the belt go back all the way and start again. If the locking feature stays engaged after letting the belt go back to stowed
position on the seat, move the seat rearward or recline the seat until the shoulder belt retractor lock releases.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the front outboard seating position may affect the passenger sensing system, if equipped. See Passenger Sensing System 0 65.
Seats and Restraints 57
If the webbing locks in the latch plate before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate flat to unlock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Seat Belt Extender 0 59.
Position the release pushbutton on the buckle so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See "Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster" later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt.
58 Seats and Restraints
To unlatch the belt, push the release pushbutton on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position.
Always stow the seat belt slowly. If the seat belt webbing returns quickly to the stowed position, the retractor may lock and cannot be pulled out. If this happens, pull the seat belt straight out firmly to unlock the webbing, and then release it. If the webbing is still locked in the retractor, see your dealer.
Before a door is closed, be sure the seat belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a seat belt, damage can occur to both the seat belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle may have a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and front outboard passenger positions.
Adjust the height so the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash. See How to Wear Seat Belts Properly 0 54.
Push the release button to move the height adjuster to the desired position.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has seat belt pretensioners for the front outboard occupants. Although the seat belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the seat belt assembly. They can help tighten the seat belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are
met. Seat belt pretensioners can also help tighten the seat belts in a side crash or rollover event.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and probably other parts of the vehicle seat belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash 0 60.
Do not sit on the outboard seat belt while entering or exiting the vehicle or at any time while sitting in the seat. Sitting on the seat belt can damage the webbing and hardware.
Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides
Rear seat belt comfort guides may provide added seat belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder belt away from the neck and head.
Comfort guides are available through your dealer for the rear outboard seating positions. Instructions are included with the comfort guides.
Seat Belt Use During Pregnancy
Seat belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear seat belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a seat belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making seat belts effective is wearing them properly.
Seat Belt Extender
If the vehicle seat belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a seat belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. Only a GM dealer issued extender should be used. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child restraints. For more information on the proper use and fit of seat belt extenders see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Safety System Check
Periodically check the seat belt reminder, seat belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), and seat belt anchorages to make sure they are all in working order. Look for any other loose or damaged seat belt system parts that might keep a seat belt system from performing properly. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn, frayed, or twisted seat belts may not protect you in a crash.
Seats and Restraints 59
Torn or frayed seat belts can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, have it replaced immediately. If a belt is twisted, it may be possible to untwist by reversing the latch plate on the webbing. If the twist cannot be corrected, ask your dealer to fix it.
Make sure the seat belt reminder light is working. See Seat Belt Reminders 0 114.
Keep seat belts clean and dry. See Seat Belt Care 0 59.
Seat Belt Care
Keep belts clean and dry.
Seat belts should be properly cared for and maintained.
Seat Belt hardware should be kept dry and free of dust or debris. As necessary exterior hard surfaces and seat belt webbing may be lightly cleaned with mild soap and water. Ensure there is not excessive dust or debris in the mechanism. If dust or debris exists in the system after proper cleaning please see the dealer. Parts may need to be replaced to ensure proper functionality of the system.
60 Seats and Restraints
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Replacing Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the seat belt system in the vehicle. A damaged seat belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the seat belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
After a minor crash, replacement of seat belts may not be necessary. But the seat belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the seat belt assemblies inspected or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the seat belt system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Have the seat belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags: . A frontal airbag for the driver . A frontal airbag for the front outboard
passenger . A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver . A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
front outboard passenger . A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the
passenger seated directly behind the driver
. A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the front outboard passenger
All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger.
For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback or side of the seat closest to the door.
For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by seat belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system:
{ Warning
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your seat belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with seat belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes seat belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 63.
Wearing your seat belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are "supplemental restraints" to the seat belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a seat belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Seat belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a seat belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The seat belts and the front outboard passenger airbags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Always
(Continued)
Seats and Restraints 61 Warning (Continued)
secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children 0 70 or Infants and Young Children 0 71.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115.
62 Seats and Restraints Where Are the Airbags?
The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.
The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The driver and front outboard passenger seat-mounted side impact airbags are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, front outboard passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows.
{ Warning
If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie-down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
This vehicle is equipped with airbags. See Airbag System 0 60. Airbags are designed to inflate if the impact exceeds the specific airbag system's deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. The vehicle has electronic sensors that help the airbag system determine the severity of the impact. Deployment thresholds can vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or many side impacts.
In addition, the vehicle has advanced technology frontal airbags. Advanced technology frontal airbags adjust the restraint according to either crash severity or occupant interaction.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. These airbags may also inflate in some moderate to severe frontal impacts.
Seats and Restraints 63
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not designed to inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is designed to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Roof-rail airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags may inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags are not designed to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags may inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module.
64 Seats and Restraints
For airbag locations, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 62.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by seat belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? 0 63.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to seat belts.
What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates?
After frontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize the airbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 62.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{ Warning
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers after the airbags inflate. The feature may also activate, without airbag inflation, after an event that exceeds a predetermined threshold. After turning the vehicle off and then on again, the doors can be locked, the interior lamps can be turned off, and the hazard warning flashers can be turned off using the controls for those features. If any of these systems are damaged in the crash they may not operate as normal.
{ Warning
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if attempting to restart the vehicle after a crash has occurred.
Plug-in vehicles have a high voltage battery and a standard 12-volt battery.
If an airbag inflates or the vehicle has been in a crash, the sensing system may shut down the high voltage system. When this occurs, the high voltage battery is disconnected and the vehicle will not start. Before the vehicle can be operated again, it must be serviced at your dealer.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy 0 405 and Event Data Recorders 0 406.
. Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag system. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
Seats and Restraints 65
The words ON and OFF will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 116. The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag should be allowed to inflate or not. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child restraint for their weight and size.
66 Seats and Restraints
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the airbag is off. If securing a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure child restraints in the rear seat. Consider using another vehicle to transport the child when a rear seat is not available.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if:
. The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.
. The system determines an infant is present in a child restraint.
. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the OFF indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 116.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the ON indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbag is active.
For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a seat belt properly -- whether or not there is an airbag for that person.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115 for more information, including important safety information.
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag if the system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint. If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 86 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 89.
Make sure the seat belt retractor is locked by pulling the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor when installing the child restraint, even if the child restraint is equipped with a seat belt lock off. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints 0 41.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's size. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat, even if the ON indicator is not lit.
Seats and Restraints 67 If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Sized Occupant
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat or that the child restraint locking feature is engaged. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the
seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
68 Seats and Restraints
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult-sized occupants. If this happens, unbuckle the belt, let the belt go back all the way, and then buckle the belt again without pulling the belt out all the way.
6. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the ON indicator is lit.
{ Warning
If the front outboard passenger airbag is turned off for an adult-sized occupant, the airbag will not be able to inflate and help protect that person in a crash, resulting in an increased risk of serious injury or even death. An adult-sized occupant should not ride in the front outboard passenger seat, if the passenger airbag OFF indicator is lit.
Additional Factors Affecting System Operation
Seat belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See "Seat Belts" and "Child Restraints" in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates.
The ON indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat.
{ Warning
Stowing articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 404.
{ Warning
For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal may keep the airbag system from working properly.
The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing, including improperly repairing or replacing, any parts of the following: . Airbag system, including airbag modules,
front or side impact sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, or airbag wiring . Front seats, including stitching, seams, or zippers . Seat belts . Steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead console, ceiling trim, or pillar garnish trim . Inner door seals, including speakers
Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag modules and sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring along with the proper replacement procedures.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery, or trim; or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort-enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System 0 65.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels 0 359 for additional important information.
Seats and Restraints 69
If the vehicle must be modified because you have a disability and have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 398.
Airbag System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115.
Caution
If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag coverings, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? 0 62. See your dealer for service.
70 Seats and Restraints
Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not properly protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle seat belts. Refer to How to Wear Seat Belts Properly 0 54. The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below: . Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the
knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear seat belt comfort guide, if available. See "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 56. If a comfort guide is not available, or if the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
. Can proper seat belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.
Q: What is the proper way to wear seat belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Also see "Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides" under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 56.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use seat belts properly.
{ Warning
Never allow more than one child to wear the same seat belt. The seat belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A seat belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Seats and Restraints 71
{ Warning
Never allow a child to wear the seat belt shoulder belt under both arms or behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or killed if the shoulder belt is worn behind their back, under their legs, or wrapped around
(Continued)
72 Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around the child. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to improperly wear, or play with, the seat belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Neither the vehicle seat belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ Warning
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's arms. An infant or child should be secured in an appropriate child restraint.
{ Warning
Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) outboard seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
Child restraints are devices used to restrain, seat, or position children in the vehicle and are sometimes called child seats or car seats. There are three basic types of child restraints: . Forward-facing child restraints
. Rear-facing child restraints
. Belt-positioning booster seats
The proper child restraint for your child depends on their size, weight, and age, and also on whether the child restraint is compatible with the vehicle in which it will be used.
For each type of child restraint, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle and is designed by a genuine child restraint manufacturer. If it is, the child restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The instruction manual that is provided with the child restraint states the weight and height limitations for that particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of child restraints available for children with special needs.
{ Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury in a crash, infants and toddlers should be secured in a rear-facing child
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
restraint until age two, or until they reach the maximum height and weight limits of their child restraint.
{ Warning
A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle seat belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in an appropriate child restraint.
Seats and Restraints 73 Child Restraint Systems
Rear-Facing Infant Restraint A rear-facing child restraint provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
74 Seats and Restraints
Forward-Facing Child Restraint A forward-facing child restraint provides restraint for the child's body with the harness.
Booster Seats
A belt-positioning booster seat is used for children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint. Boosters are designed to improve the fit of the vehicle seat belt system until the child is large enough for the vehicle seat belts to fit properly without a booster seat. See the seat belt fit test in Older Children 0 70.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle seat belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraints must be secured in vehicle seats by the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for more information. Never use a seat belt extender when installing a child restraint. Never use non-regulated aftermarket anchors or attachments to secure a child restraint. Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the following:
. Instruction labels provided on the child restraint
. Instruction manual provided with the child restraint
. This vehicle owner's manual
The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
In some areas Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in an appropriate child restraint secured in a rear seating position.
Whenever possible, children aged 12 and under should be secured in a rear seating position.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys.
Seats and Restraints 75
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 65 for additional information.
76 Seats and Restraints
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Do not install a child restraint in any rear seating position where it cannot be installed securely.
Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent seat belts or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the seat belt.
Adjust the seat in front of a child restraint to ensure proper installation according to the child restraint manual. Move the front seat forward to avoid contact between the child restraint and the seat or any accessories mounted to the seat.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle -- even when no child is in it.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System)
The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. LATCH-compatible rear-facing and forward-facing child seats can be properly installed using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belts. Do not use both the seat belts and the LATCH anchorage system to secure a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats use the vehicle's seat belts to secure the child and the booster seat. If the manufacturer recommends that the booster seat be secured with the LATCH system, this can be done as long as the booster seat can
be positioned properly and there is no interference with the proper positioning of the lap-shoulder belt on the child.
Make sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the seat belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether.
For a forward-facing 5-pt harness child restraint where the combined weight of the child and restraint are up to 29.5 kg (65 lb), use either the lower LATCH anchorages with the top tether anchorage, or the seat belt with the top tether anchorage. Where the combined weight of the child and restraint are greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb), use the seat belt with the top tether anchorage only.
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint
Seats and Restraints 77
Recommended Methods for Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint
Use Only Approved Attachment Methods Shown with an X
LATCH Lower Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH Lower Anchors and Top Tether Anchor
Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)
X
X
Seat Belt and Top Tether Anchor
Greater than 29.5 kg (65 lb)
Up to 29.5 kg (65 lb)
X
X
X
Greater than
X
29.5 kg (65 lb)
See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 86 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 89.
Child restraints built after March 2014 are labeled with the maximum child weight, with which the LATCH system can be used for installing the child restraint.
The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions have lower anchors. In this case, the seat belt must be used (with top tether where available) to secure the child restraint. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 86 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 89.
78 Seats and Restraints Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations
Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).
A top tether (3, 4) is used to secure the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment hook (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in the event of a crash.
The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment hook (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints with a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the
I : Seating positions with top tether
anchors.
H : Seating positions with two lower
anchors.
Seats and Restraints 79
To assist in locating the lower anchors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
Do not install a child restraint that requires lower anchors in the center rear seating position. See Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 86 or Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat) 0 89 for more information.
Uplevel Models
For uplevel models, the top tether anchors for each rear seating position are on the back of the rear seatback. Release the seatback and fold the seatback forward to access the anchors. See Rear Seats 0 49. Be sure to use an anchor located directly behind the seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
Driver Side Anchor and Loop (Base Model)
For uplevel models, there are top tether anchor symbols to assist you in locating the top tether anchors.
Center Anchor and Loop (Base Model)
80 Seats and Restraints
Passenger Side Loop (Base Model) For base models, the top tether is routed through loops (2) to the top tether anchors (1). Be sure to use the correct anchor for the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Be sure to read the following instructions to properly install a child restraint using these loops and anchors. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 75 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
{ Warning
A child could be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly attached to the vehicle using either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle seat belt. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ Warning
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor, except for the center top tether anchors in the crew cab models. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ Warning
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck. The shoulder belt can tighten but cannot be loosened if it is locked. The shoulder belt locks when it is pulled all the way out of the retractor. It unlocks when the shoulder belt is allowed to go all the way back into the retractor, but it cannot do this if it is wrapped around a child's neck. If the shoulder belt is locked and tightened around a child's neck, the only way to loosen the belt is to cut it.
Buckle any unused seat belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, and
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
tighten the belt behind the child restraint after the child restraint has been installed.
Caution
Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle's seat belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled seat belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
Do not fold the rear seat cushion when the seat is occupied. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a seat belt buckled. This could damage the seat belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the seat belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint 0 75.
Uplevel Models 1. For forward-facing child restraints, attach
and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle has one.
Follow the child restraint instructions and the vehicle LATCH anchor weight limits described at the beginning of this section, and the following steps: 1.1. Set/Place the child restraint on the
seat cushion. 1.2. Fold the seatback forward. See Rear
Seats 0 49. 1.3. Route and attach the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:
If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint, adjust it accordingly to allow proper fitment. If you are using a dual tether, route the tether around the headrest or head restraint posts.
Seats and Restraints 81
If the child restraint is installed next to a center seat, make sure the top tether does not interfere with the center seating position shoulder belt/retractor. If it does, find another suitable seating position to install the child restraint.
If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint, adjust it accordingly to allow proper fitment. If you are using a single tether, route the tether. Make sure the top tether does not interfere with the center seating position shoulder belt/ retractor.
82 Seats and Restraints
2. Make sure the child restraint top tether hook is completely closed and secured to the top tether anchor.
2.1. While pulling on the top tether strap to remove the slack, and keeping the child restraint in contact with the seat cushion and seatback, fold the seatback to the latched position.
2.2. All slack needs to be removed from the top tether before securing the seatback to the latches.
3. Raise the seatback. See Rear Seats 0 49.
3.1. Confirm the seatback is secure on the latches.
3.2. Confirm the child restraint is contacting the seat cushion and seatback.
4. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the seat belt. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
4.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
4.2. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
5. Tighten the top tether.
6. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.
Base Models
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the seat belt. Refer to the child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2. For forward-facing child restraints, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle has one. Follow the child restraint instructions and the vehicle LATCH anchor weight limits described at the beginning of this section, and the following steps:
Rear Driver Side Position
Seats and Restraints 83
Rear Driver Side Position
2.1. For a top tether in the rear driver side position:
2.1.1. Remove the driver side head restraint and center headrest. See "Head Restraint or Headrest Removal and Reinstallation" later in this section.
2.1.2. For first time use, remove and discard the rubber band from the top tether loop (2).
2.1.3. Route the top tether (3) through the loop (2).
2.1.4. Attach the top tether (3) to the driver side of the center top tether metal anchor (1).
2.1.5. Make sure the child restraint top tether hook is completely closed and secured to the top tether anchor.
Rear Passenger Side Position
Rear Passenger Side Position 2.2. For a top tether in the rear
passenger side position:
84 Seats and Restraints
2.2.1. Remove the passenger side head restraint and center headrest. See "Head Restraint or Headrest Removal and Reinstallation" later in this section.
2.2.2. Route the top tether (3) through the loop (2).
2.2.3. Attach the top tether (3) to the passenger side of the center top tether metal anchor (1).
2.2.4. Make sure the child restraint top tether hook is completely closed and secured to the top tether anchor.
Rear Center Position Rear Center Position
2.3. For a top tether in the rear center position:
2.3.1. Remove the driver side head restraint and center headrest. See "Head Restraint or Headrest Removal and Reinstallation" later in this section.
2.3.2. Route the top tether (1) through the center loop (2).
2.3.3. Attach the top tether (1) to the driver side top tether metal anchor (3).
2.3.4. Make sure the child restraint top tether hook is completely closed and secured to the top tether anchor.
3. Tighten the top tether per the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
When the top tether is properly tightened, the loop may bend. This is normal and will not damage the vehicle.
If child restraints are installed in both outboard positions, both top tethers can be attached to the center anchor. Top tethers can be attached for child
restraints in all three rear seating positions at the same time, following the routing instructions above.
4. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.
Head Restraint or Headrest Removal and Reinstallation
For base models, the second row outboard head restraints or center headrest can be removed if they interfere with the proper installation of the child restraint.
To remove the second row head restraints or center headrest:
1. Press both buttons on the head restraint or headrest posts at the same time, and pull up on the head restraint or headrest.
2. Store the head restraint or headrest in a secure place.
3. When the child restraint is removed, reinstall the head restraint or headrest before the seating position is used.
Seats and Restraints 85
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. To reinstall the head restraint or headrest:
1. Insert the head restraint or headrest posts into the holes in the top of the seatback. The notches on the posts must face the driver side of the vehicle.
86 Seats and Restraints
2. Push the head restraint or headrest down.
3. Try to move the head restraint or headrest to make sure that it is locked in place.
Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint with the seat belts in a rear seat position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a seat belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
If the child restraint or vehicle seat position does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the seat belt to secure the child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint 0 75.
Uplevel Models
1. For forward-facing child restraints, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle has one.
1.1. Place the child restraint on the seat cushion.
1.2. Fold the seatback forward. See Rear Seats 0 49.
1.3. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for more information on using the top tether anchors.
2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. Ensure the seat belt webbing is
routed as directly as possible and is not caught on seat handles or plastic trim. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Seats and Restraints 87
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release pushbutton on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
There must not be direct contact of the child restraint to the release pushbutton.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and 5.
6. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to
88 Seats and Restraints
move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If the head restraint was removed, reinstall it before the seating position is used. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for additional information on installing the head restraint properly.
Base Models
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. If the head restraint interferes with the proper installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be removed. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76.
3. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the child restraint. Ensure the seat belt webbing is routed as directly as possible and is not
caught on seat handles or plastic trim. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release pushbutton on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. There must not be direct contact of the child restraint to the release pushbutton.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for more information on using the top tether anchors.
8. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
If the head restraint was removed, reinstall it before the seating position is used. See "Head Restraint Removal and Reinstallation" under Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for additional information on installing the head restraint properly.
Seats and Restraints 89
Securing Child Restraints (With the Seat Belt in the Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint 0 75.
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System 0 65 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 116 for more information, including important safety information.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ Warning
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very
(Continued)
90 Seats and Restraints
Warning (Continued)
close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System 0 65 for additional information.
If the child restraint uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) 0 76 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached.
When using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position, follow the instructions that came with the child restraint and the following instructions:
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. Move the seat upward or the seatback to an upright position, if needed, to get a tight installation of the child restraint. There must be finger clearance between the pushbutton and the child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag, the OFF indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 116.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle seat belt through or around the restraint. Ensure the seat belt webbing is routed as direct as possible and is not caught on seat handles or plastic trim. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
Seats and Restraints 91
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release pushbutton on the buckle, away from the child restraint, so that the seat belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
There must be finger clearance between the release pushbutton and the child restraint. If there is not clearance between the buckle release pushbutton and the child restraint, move the seat upward and repeat prior installation steps. Otherwise secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
92 Seats and Restraints
Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and 6.
7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the seat belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbag is off, the OFF indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed and the ON indicator is lit, see "If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint" under Passenger Sensing System 0 65.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and let it return to the stowed position.
Storage
Storage Compartments Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Underhood Storage (eTrunkTM) . . . . . . . . . . 93 Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Luggage/Load Locations Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Storage Compartments
{ Warning
Do not store heavy or sharp objects in storage compartments. In a crash, these objects may cause the cover to open and could result in injury.
Glove Box
Storage 93
Cupholders
The front cupholders are in the center console.
Rear Seat Cupholders
To open the glove box, pull the handle to the left. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock. See Keys 0 8.
If equipped, lower the rear seat armrest to access the cupholders.
Underhood Storage (eTrunkTM)
There is storage in the front, under the hood. To access the eTrunkTM, open the hood. See Hood 0 19.
94 Storage
{ Warning
The emergency hood release button inside the underhood compartment will not function when the battery is disconnected or depleted. To avoid personal injury or death, always keep the hood fully closed and latched when storing the vehicle. If the hood is not latched, a person could climb into the underhood compartment and inadvertently close the hood. People should never climb inside the underhood compartment. Never shut the hood when a person is inside.
Caution
When cleaning the eTrunkTM, do not get the exposed electrical components wet. This may damage the vehicle.
Base Level Underseat Storage
There are four hooks (1) for use with the convenience net, if equipped. The maximum load per hook is 30 kg (66 lbs).
There are also four cargo tie-downs (2) in the eTrunkTM. These can be used to strap cargo down and keep it from moving inside the vehicle. The maximum load per corner is 50 kg (110 lbs).
Underseat Storage
There may be storage under the rear passenger seat.
Lift up on the seat bench to access. Push the seat bench down to close.
Uplevel Underseat Storage
Pull the strap on the rear edge of the seat cushion to release. Tilt the seat cushion forward to access the storage. Rotate the seat bench rearward and push down to close.
Floor Console Storage
To access the floor console storage, lift to open. If equipped, there is a USB port and auxiliary power outlet.
Luggage/Load Locations
Cargo Area
{ Warning
Rain and snow can cause the cargo box to become very slippery. Therefore, always remove snow and ice from your
(Continued)
Storage 95
Warning (Continued)
shoes and the cargo box, and be careful not to slip when getting in and out of the cargo box.
All-Weather Cargo Area
The vehicle's cargo area can be used in many different configurations -- cargo panels on or off, midgate up or down, rear glass in or out. It has features that resist the elements and protect cargo. It is designed to quickly direct water out of the cargo box. The top drain grates and midgate drain help do this.
96 Storage
Even when all of these things are working properly and the cover system is on, there may be some instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.) when water can collect in the following areas:
A. Top drain grates
B. Front drain grate (midgate drain grate)
C. Water drainage area around both sides of the box and the tailgate side
D. Cargo floor
Maintenance and Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs properly, be sure that the midgate, tailgate, and cover system are fully closed and that all parts are clean and not blocked with debris. Follow the instructions given next in this section for the proper procedures on cleaning each item.
Top Drain Grates Cleaning
The top drain grates are located near the rear window on both sides of the vehicle. Clean the grates and drains if there is a blockage.
Midgate Drain Grate Removal and Cleaning
The midgate drain grate is located near the base of the midgate.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
Base Level Shown, Uplevel Similar
Storage 97
Keep the drain grate clean to avoid blocking the path of water to the gutter system. After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles, etc., check the midgate drain to ensure the drain path is clear. The drain grate can be removed and flushed with water if necessary.
To remove the drain grate:
1. Lower the midgate. See Midgate 0 24 for more information.
2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate, tilt it toward the front of the vehicle, and pull it out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
This vehicle is equipped with eight fixed cargo tie-downs.
Caution The truck bed walls will collapse if the tie-downs are overloaded.
Any of the eight locations inside the truck bed can be used. The maximum load per corner is 227 kg (500 lb).
Caution
Placing tall or oversized items near or against the spoiler or the lamp above the truck bed can result in vehicle damage. To prevent vehicle damage, properly store cargo in the truck bed away from the spoiler and the lamp using the cargo tie-downs.
98 Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Pedestrian Safety Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Onboard Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 On-Screen Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Instrument Cluster (Work Truck) . . . . . . 109 Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Battery Gauge (High Voltage) . . . . . . . . . . 112 Power Indicator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Speed Limiter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . 116 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Low State of Charge Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Charge Cord Connected Light . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Battery Fault Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Propulsion Power is Limited Light . . . . . . 117 Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion
System Failure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Service Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . 118 Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
Disabled Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic
Stability Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Four-Wheel Steering Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Air Suspension Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Vehicle Ready Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Driver Attention Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Information Displays Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Vehicle Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Propulsion Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Universal Remote System Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Universal Remote System Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Universal Remote System Operation . . . 141
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Power Tilt and Telescoping Steering Wheel
Manual Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls 99 Heated Steering Wheel
To adjust the steering wheel, if equipped:
1. Press the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down.
2. Press the control rearward or forward to move the steering wheel closer or away from you.
To adjust the steering wheel, if equipped: 1. Pull the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down. 3. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
( : Press to turn the heated steering wheel
on or off. An indicator next to the button is lit when the feature is turned on.
The steering wheel takes about three minutes to start heating.
Automatic Heated Steering Wheel
The heated steering wheel may turn on during a remote start along with the heated seats when it is cold outside. The heated steering wheel indicator may come on in remote start.
100 Instruments and Controls
The heated steering wheel will turn on when the auto heated seat is activated. The heated steering wheel indicator will display the state of the steering wheel heat.
See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 48.
To turn this feature on or off, select Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience > Heated Steering Wheel > Select ON or OFF.
Horn
To sound the horn, press a on the
steering wheel.
Pedestrian Safety Signal
The vehicle is equipped with automatic sound generation. The automatic sound is generated to indicate the vehicle presence to pedestrians. The sound changes if the vehicle is speeding up or slowing down. It is activated when the vehicle is shifted into a forward gear, N (Neutral), or R (Reverse), up to driving speeds of 34 km/h (21 mph).
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wiper/washer lever is on the left side of the steering column. With the vehicle on or in accessory mode, move the windshield wiper knob to select the wiper speed. HI : Use for fast wipes. LO : Use for slow wipes.
INT : Turn the knob to INT for intermittent
wipes, then turn the O INT band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.
T 8 : For a single wipe, push the button
to the first stop position briefly and release. For several wipes, hold the button at the first stop position longer and release.
| L : Push the button beyond the first
stop position to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the button is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the windshield wiper button is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer has been activated. See Washer Fluid 0 328 for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and windshield before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 333.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
{ Warning
In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
{ Warning
Before driving the vehicle, always clear snow and ice from the hood, windshield, washer nozzles, roof, and rear of the vehicle, including all lamps and windows. Reduced visibility from snow and ice buildup could lead to a crash.
Wiper Parking
If the vehicle is turned off while the wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they will immediately stop.
If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield.
If the vehicle is turned off while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield.
Rain Sense
If equipped with Rain Sense and the feature is turned on, a sensor near the top center of the windshield detects the amount of water on the windshield and controls the frequency of the windshield wiper based on the current sensitivity setting.
Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
To turn the Rain Sense feature on or off, see "Rain Sense Wipers" under Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience > Rain Sense > Enable/Disable.
If Rain Sense is enabled in Settings, turning the wiper lever to INT will activate Rain Sense.
Clock
Set the time and date using the infotainment system. See "Date/Time" under Settings 0 169.
Power Outlets
Power Outlets 12-Volt Direct Current
The vehicle has one 12-volt outlet that can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a tablet or MP3 player.
Instruments and Controls 101
Lift the cover to access the outlet and replace when not in use. The power outlet is located underneath the temperature controls.
Front Console 12 Volt Power Outlet Caution
Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for an extended period of time while the vehicle is off will drain the battery. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 15 amp rating.
102 Instruments and Controls
Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle and adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 320.
Caution
Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords.
Power Outlet 110/120 Volt Alternating Current
The vehicle has two 110/120 Volt Alternating Current outlets.
Lift the cover to access and replace when not in use.
The power outlets are located: . On the rear of the center console . In the truck bed
. In the eTrunk Truck Bed Powerpack Power Outlet eTrunk Power Outlet
Rear of Center Console Power Outlet
When the power button is ON/RUN, power to the 110 Volt outlet is enabled after the
- button is pressed, see Instrument
Panel Overview 0 4 for button location. A green indicator light on the button indicates when the 110 Volt outlet is enabled. 110 Volt power is supplied to the outlet when it is enabled and electrical equipment is plugged into that outlet. One power outlet can be used with electrical equipment that uses a maximum of 400 watts. Ensure that all connected devices do not exceed 400 watts.
The power outlet can be turned off by
pressing the - button.
Instruments and Controls 103
An indicator light on the outlet illuminates
. Other equipment requiring an extremely
Cabin
when the system is enabled and no system
stable power supply, such as
fault is detected. The outlet will not provide
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets
power when the vehicle is off, the -
and touch sensor lamps
button is not pressed, or the plug is not
. Medical equipment
fully seated into the outlet. The outlet does not operate while the vehicle is starting. If a
Onboard Generator
USB powered streaming device is being used, it is suggested to use a USB Port for power, see USB Port 0 157. If uninterrupted power supply is required while driving, disable the auto-stop feature, see Power Modes 0 195.
If equipped and enabled, the vehicle outlets can be used to power compatible devices up to 7.2 kW. Through the use of a GM accessory, 3 kW of power is also available through the charge port to external devices.
If equipment is connected using more than
Locating the Outlets
400 watts or a system fault is detected, a
The power outlets are located in the cabin,
protection circuit shuts off the power supply bed, and eTrunkTM of the vehicle.
and the indicator light will flash.
Do not use a power outlet with a missing or damaged cover.
The power outlet is not designed for the following, and may not work properly if they are plugged in:
. Equipment with high initial peak wattage, such as compressor-driven refrigerators and electric power tools
104 Instruments and Controls
Bed
eTrunkTM
{ Warning
Using a damaged power outlet could result in electrical shock causing personal injury or death. Inspect the power outlet for damage before use and do not use the outlet if it is damaged.
Outlet Indicators
The power outlet green indicator light displays the system status: . A steady green light displays when the
power outlet is working and the vehicle is on. . No green light displays when the power outlet is off and the vehicle is off.
Fault Mode
The power outlet will turn off if the connected device exceeds the watt limit for the outlet or total system. To troubleshoot fault mode, follow the steps below:
1. Unplug the device(s) from the outlet(s).
2. Check the vehicle display for information about the fault.
3. Check the two circuit breakers located near the power outlets in the bed of the vehicle.
4. If these are not tripped, press the green reset button also located near the power outlets in the bed of the vehicle.
If a fault continues to occur, the device may exceed the power outlet power limit.
Power Mode Indicator
The power mode indicator on the infotainment screen displays the power currently being used and the total amount of power available.
Make sure each device, or combination of devices, does not exceed the available power for the system
Switching the Outlets On and Off
The outlets will always be ready for use when the vehicle is on. Using the power outlets while the vehicle is charging can increase charge time.
To enable the power outlets when the vehicle is off, use the settings in the infotainment screen before turning the vehicle off.
Instruments and Controls 105
Troubleshooting
The power outlets will be momentarily unavailable at the start and the end of a 350 kW DC Fast Charge. This is normal operation.
For any error messages that can not be resolved by resetting fault mode as discussed earlier in this section, see your dealer.
{ Warning
The power outlets contain high-voltage electrical equipment. Disassembling the power outlets may result in electrical shock causing personal injury or death. Never attempt to disassemble a power outlet.
Wireless Charging
If equipped and enabled, the vehicle has wireless charging in the bin below the climate control system. The system operates at 145 kHz and wirelessly charges one Qi compatible smartphone. The power output of the system is capable of charging at a rate up to 3 amp (15 W), as requested by the compatible smartphone. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
106 Instruments and Controls
{ Warning
Wireless charging may affect the operation of an implanted pacemaker or other medical devices. If you have one, it is recommended to consult with your doctor before using the wireless charging system.
The vehicle must be on or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. The wireless charging feature may not correctly indicate charging when the vehicle is in RAP, during a Bluetooth phone call, or when phone projection (e.g. Apple CarPlay/Android Auto) is active. See Power Modes 0 195.
The operating temperature is -40 °C (-40 °F) to 85 °C (185 °F) for the charging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to 35 °C (95 °F) for the phone. A charging stopped alert may be displayed on the infotainment screen, if the wireless charger or smartphone are outside of normal operating temperature. Charging will automatically resume when a normal operating temperature is reached.
{ Warning
Remove all objects from the charger before charging your compatible smartphone. Objects, such as coins, keys, rings, paper clips, or cards, between the smartphone and charger may become very hot.
On the rare occasion that the charging system does not detect an object, and the object gets wedged between the smartphone and charger, remove the smartphone and allow the object to cool before removing it from the charger, to prevent burns.
To charge a compatible smartphone:
1. Confirm the smartphone is capable of wireless charging.
2. The wireless charger is below the climate control system.
3. Remove all objects from the charging pad. The system may not charge if there are any objects between the smartphone and charger.
4. Place the smartphone face up against the rubber charge mat in between the two small vertical rubber ribs.
To maximize the charge rate, ensure the smartphone is fully seated and centered in the holder with nothing under it.
A thick smartphone case may prevent the charger from working, or reduce the charging performance. See your dealer for additional information.
5. A green ] will appear on the
infotainment display, next to the phone icon. This indicates that the smartphone
is on the charger. The green ] will
remain on while the phone is charging.
6. If a smartphone is placed on the charger
and ] turns off or a yellow triangle
appears, remove the smartphone and any objects from the pad. Turn the smartphone 180 degrees and wait a few seconds before placing/aligning it on the pad again. If the status stays yellow, phone may not be a compatible phone. The status will turn yellow when any object other then a phone is placed on this charger mat.
7. If a smartphone is placed on the charger and a red circle appears, the charger and/or the smartphone is overheated. Remove the smartphone and any objects from the charger in order to cool the system.
The smartphone may become warm during charging. This is normal. In warmer temperatures, the speed of charging may be reduced.
For vehicles with wireless phone projection, the smartphone may overheat during wireless charging. The smartphone may slow down, stop charging, or shut down to protect the battery. The phone may need to be removed from its case to prevent
overheating. The ] may flash while the
phone is cooling down enough for wireless charging to automatically resume. This is normal. Individual phone performance may vary.
Software Acknowledgements
Certain Wireless Charging Module product from LG Electronics, Inc. ("LGE") contains the open source software detailed below. Refer to the indicated open source licenses (as are included following this notice) for the terms and conditions of their use.
OSS Notice Information
To obtain the source code that is contained in this product, please visit https:// opensource.lge.com. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers and copyright notices are available for download. LG Electronics will also provide open source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution (such as the
Instruments and Controls 107
cost of media, shipping, and handling) upon email request to opensource@lge.com. This offer is valid for three (3) years from the date on which you purchased the product.
Freescale-WCT Library
Copyright (c) 2012-2014 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the copyright holder nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
108 Instruments and Controls
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
On-Screen Controls
The Controls App organizes the on-screen controls for many vehicle functions on one screen. The specific controls available in the app vary by model.
To access the Controls App, select the Controls icon from the infotainment home screen.
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Some warning lights come on briefly when the propulsion system is started to indicate they are working. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
Instrument Cluster (Work Truck)
Instruments and Controls 109
Info : Displays one information zone under the speedometer.
Gauge : Displays no information zones and the gauges are located to the left and right of the speedometer.
Infotainment : Displays one information zone under the speedometer.
Driver Assistance : If equipped, displays information for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Follow Distance, Lane Keep Assist (LKA), and Forward Collision Alert (FCA).
Off Road : If equipped, displays one information zone under the speedometer.
English Gauge Layout Shown, Other Layouts, and Metric Similar
1. Battery Gauge (High Voltage) 0 112
2. Speedometer 0 112
3. Power Indicator Gauge 0 113
4. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster
The cluster display layout can be changed. Some of the selectable views may not be available for your particular vehicle.
The following are selectable views:
Clean : Displays no information zones.
110 Instruments and Controls
Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays.
To change the cluster configuration, press
i on the right steering wheel control.
To change the gauge faces, press and hold
i and use y or z on the right steering wheel control. Press V on the right steering
wheel control to select the desired option from the list.
Display Settings
The following options can be turned on or off using the infotainment display. Some may not be available for your particular vehicle. See Settings 0 169.
Speed Sign
Shows sign information from a roadway database in the onboard navigation. The sign will show "- -" when there is no detected speed limit or the system is unavailable.
Turn-by-Turn Graphics
Provides Turn-by-Turn navigation graphics during an active route in your driver display.
Traffic Sign Recognition
Displays the detected speed limit in your driver display.
Instrument Cluster (Uplevel)
English Single Gauge Layout Shown, Other Layouts, and Metric Similar
1. Battery Gauge (High Voltage) 0 112
2. Speedometer 0 112
3. Power Indicator Gauge 0 113
4. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133
Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster
The cluster display layout can be changed. Some of the selectable views may not be available for your particular vehicle.
The following are selectable views:
Clean : If equipped, displays no information zones.
Instruments and Controls 111
Single Gauge : Displays two information zones that are located to the left and right of the speedometer.
Dual Gauge : If equipped, displays the battery gauge and power indicator gauge to the left and right of the information zone.
Map : Displays a navigation map.
Driver Assistance : If equipped, displays information for Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Follow Distance, Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Forward Collision Alert (FCA), and Super Cruise. There is one information zone to the right of the display.
Off Road : If equipped, displays vehicle pitch and roll information, road wheel angle, and four-wheel drive (e4WD) status.
Wide Open Watts : If equipped, while in Wide Open Watts mode, the speedometer will appear in the center of the display with the battery gauge to right of it and the torque gauge to the left of it. There are two information zones on the left and right of the display. Follow the prompts on the instrument cluster. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
112 Instruments and Controls
Use the right steering wheel control to open and scroll through the different items and displays. To change the cluster configuration, press
i on the right steering wheel control.
To change the gauge faces, press and hold
i and use y or z on the right steering wheel control. Press V on the right steering
wheel control to select the desired option from the list. Display Settings The following options can be turned on or off using the infotainment display. Some may not be available for your particular vehicle. See Settings 0 169.
Speed Sign
Shows sign information from a roadway database in the onboard navigation. The sign will show "- -" when there is no detected speed limit or the system is unavailable.
Turn-by-Turn Graphics
Provides Turn-by-Turn navigation graphics during an active route in your driver display.
Traffic Sign Recognition
Displays the detected speed limit in your driver display.
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset.
The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Vehicle Status. See Vehicle Status 0 134.
Battery Gauge (High Voltage)
Metric Single Battery Gauge Shown, Others Similar
English Single Battery Gauge Shown, Others Similar
This displays the high voltage battery state of charge. The value at the bottom is an estimate of how far the vehicle can be driven on the remaining charge based on recent driving habits, conditions, and HVAC usage.
The fill bars shown inside of the gauge indicate the percentage range as estimated from current vehicle conditions and climate settings. The range estimate on the bottom also may be affected by climate settings, current vehicle conditions and ambient conditions. Estimated range may increase and decrease based on climate control energy consumption.
Driving aggressively through hard acceleration and/or braking events, excessive HVAC usage, using heated or cooled seats, battery preconditioning, and performance modes can affect vehicle range estimates.
When the high voltage battery state of charge level gets low, the gauge will change color to amber. When the charge is very low the gauge will flash, and the estimated range value on the bottom will change to LOW. Additional alerts may display and a sound may also be heard at low state of charge.
Power Indicator Gauge
Instruments and Controls 113
The power indicator gauge is in the center of the display to the right of the speedometer in the Single Gauge layout.
This gauge displays the instantaneous charge and consumption power of the high voltage battery. Maximum power consumption is available when the high voltage battery is fully charged. During normal operation, a slight reduction in consumption power may occur as the high voltage battery state of charge decreases.
Regenerative Braking
When regenerative braking is active, the regen battery icon displays and will fill the lower section of the gauge. The power indicator gauge value shows the amount of instantaneous power being regenerated.
Regenerative Power Limited
Regenerative power may be limited when the high voltage battery is near full charge or cold. This will affect the vehicle's maximum regenerative braking power.
Single Power Indicator Gauge Shown, Others Similar
114 Instruments and Controls Wide Open Watts
Metric Torque Gauge
English Torque Gauge
If equipped, the power indicator gauge is replaced with a torque gauge while in Wide Open Watts mode. The torque gauge is located to the left of the speedometer and indicates current propulsion torque for maximum acceleration. Follow the prompts on the instrument cluster. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Speed Limiter Indicator
This light is white when the speed limiter is on and ready, and turns green when the speed limiter is set and active. See Speed Limiter 0 214.
Seat Belt Reminders
Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light There is a driver seat belt reminder light on the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt.
Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the driver seat belt is buckled, neither the light nor the chime comes on.
Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light
The vehicle may have a front passenger seat belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System 0 65.
When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their seat belt.
Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the front passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving.
If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger seat belt reminder light and chime may come on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the reminder light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the seat belt.
Second Row Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Lights
The vehicle may have second row passenger seat belt reminder lights. The vehicle has one of the following displays.
. A shaded or green light indicates the seat belt is buckled.
. An X indicates the seat belt is not buckled. A check mark indicates the seat belt is buckled. For information on the front seat belt reminder lights, see "Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light" and "Front Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Light" listed previously in this section.
When the vehicle is started, these lights come on solid to remind rear passengers to fasten their seat belts. Then each light may stay on solid or flash, and a chime may come on if the rear passenger remains unbuckled, or becomes unbuckled, when the vehicle is moving. If all rear seat positions are buckled, neither the chime nor the lights will come on.
Instruments and Controls 115 Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. It is located in the instrument cluster. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), the passenger sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System 0 60.
The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in
(Continued)
116 Instruments and Controls
Warning (Continued) a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System 0 65 for important safety information. The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator.
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF for several seconds as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag is allowed to inflate.
If the word OFF is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, or if the airbag readiness light is on, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service right away.
{ Warning
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light 0 115 for more information, including important safety information.
Charging System Light
The charging system light comes on briefly when the vehicle is started, as a check to show the light is working. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the 12-volt battery. If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio. Find a safe place to stop the vehicle.
Low State of Charge Light
Instruments and Controls 117
This light is amber when the vehicle state of charge is low. Proceed to a charging station to charge the vehicle.
Propulsion Power is Limited Light
Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure)
Charge Cord Connected Light
This light comes on when a charge cord is connected to the vehicle.
Battery Fault Light
These lights display when the vehicle propulsion power is limited, which may affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. The vehicle may be driven while these lights are on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be limited.
This light comes on if a condition exists that may require the vehicle to be taken in for service.
If the light comes on, take the vehicle to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
Brake System Warning Light
This light indicates a fault with the high voltage battery. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See your dealer for service.
Metric
English
118 Instruments and Controls
{ Warning
The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light comes on and stays on, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. This light may come on if the brake fluid is low. See Brake Fluid 0 329.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The brake system has electric brake boost. Vehicle speed may be limited when the brake system warning light comes on. The brake pedal might be harder to push, or the brake pedal may go closer to the floor. It could
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 377.
Electric Parking Brake Light
Metric
English
This light comes on when the parking brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the parking brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake system. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, see your dealer.
Service Electric Parking Brake Light
This light may come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If this light stays on or comes on while driving, there is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB). Take the vehicle to a dealer as soon as possible. In addition to the parking brake, other safety functions that utilize the EPB may also be degraded. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS warning light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light stays on.
If the ABS warning light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but ABS is not functioning.
If both the ABS warning light and the brake system warning light are on, ABS is not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service.
See Brake System Warning Light 0 117.
This light is amber when the electric four-wheel drive (e4WD) system is limited, and will turn off when the system is working normally. If this light is red, there may be a malfunction. See your dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive 0 202.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light
If equipped, the Lane Keep Assist Light may display the following colors: . Blank: LKA is disabled.
Instruments and Controls 119
. White: Appears when the vehicle starts. A steady white light indicates that LKA is not ready to assist.
. Green: Appears when LKA is turned on and ready to assist. LKA will gently turn the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking.
. Amber: Appears when LKA is active. The light flashes amber as a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert to indicate that the lane marking has been unintentionally crossed. If the system detects you are steering intentionally (to pass or change lanes), the LDW alert may not display. If equipped, the amber light also appears when the Blind Zone Steering Assist detects a potential crash with a moving vehicle in the lane you are entering. See Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA) 0 269.
LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active in the direction of lane departure, or if LKA detects that you are accelerating, braking, or actively steering. See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 273.
120 Instruments and Controls Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Disabled Light
This indicator displays when you turn off Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) or Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB). This indicator will also display if AEB or FPB is unavailable due to malfunction, weather conditions, or if the windshield is not clean. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 262. See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 265.
Vehicle Ahead Indicator
If equipped, this indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected ahead and amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
Pedestrian Ahead Indicator
If equipped, this indicator will display amber when a nearby pedestrian is detected in front of the vehicle. See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 265.
Traction Off Light
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off. If Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is turned off, TCS is also turned off. To turn TCS and ESC off and on, see Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206.
If TCS is off, wheel slip during acceleration is not limited unless necessary to help protect the driveline from damage. Adjust driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)/ Electronic Stability Control Light
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS and potentially the ESC system are not fully operational and may not assist in maintaining control. Adjust driving accordingly. If the condition persists, see your dealer as soon as possible. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display.
The light flashes when the TCS and/or the ESC system is actively working.
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206.
The light may also flash when ABS is active. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 203.
Trailer Sway Control Light
If equipped, this light will flash when Trailer Sway Control is active. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 308.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light
This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on to show that the light is working. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem. This light comes on when the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is turned off. If ESC is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off. To turn ESC off and on, see Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206. If ESC and TCS are off, the systems do not assist in controlling the vehicle. Adjust driving accordingly.
Instruments and Controls 121 Driver Mode Control Light
This light comes on when Off-Road mode is selected.
This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode is selected.
This light comes on when My mode is selected.
122 Instruments and Controls
See Four-Wheel Steering 0 209.
Air Suspension Light
If equipped, this light comes on when Wide Open Watts mode is selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Four-Wheel Steering Light
This light comes on when the air suspension is raised to maximum ground clearance height.
This light will flash green to indicate that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.
This light is amber when Rear-Wheel Steering is off.
This light is amber when Four-Wheel Steering is active.
This light comes on when the air suspension is raised to increased ground clearance height.
It will flash green to indicate that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.
This light comes on when the air suspension is lowered for easy entry and exit from the vehicle.
This light comes on when the air suspension is lowered to Low Rider Mode.
This light comes on when the air suspension is in Service Mode or Alignment Mode. See Air Suspension 0 209.
Tire Pressure Light
A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 350.
When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady
If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on every time the vehicle is started. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352.
Security Light
Instruments and Controls 123
If the light stays on and the vehicle does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation 0 34.
Vehicle Ready Light
The vehicle ready light comes on whenever the vehicle is ready to be driven.
High-Beam On Light
If equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the vehicle is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.
When the Light Is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated.
The security light should come on briefly as the vehicle is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.
This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer 0 143.
124 Instruments and Controls IntelliBeam Light
Cruise Control Light
Curve Speed Control Light
If equipped, this light comes on when the IntelliBeam system is enabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 142.
Lamps On Reminder
This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use, except when only the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) are active. See Exterior Lamp Controls 0 142.
The cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active. Adaptive Cruise Control Light
This light is white when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is on and ready, and turns green when the ACC is set and active.
If equipped, this light may illuminate green when ACC is actively controlling the vehicle speed and detects a sharp curve on the road ahead.
ACC automatically slows the vehicle down while navigating the curve and may increase speed out of the curve, but will not exceed the set speed.
See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
Super Cruise Light
This light comes on to show the status of Super Cruise. See Super Cruise 0 227.
Driver Attention Assist Light
If equipped, this light displays amber when: . Drowsiness assistance is not available . Driver Attention Assist has been disabled See Driver Attention Assist 0 271.
Door Ajar Light
This light comes on when a door is open or not securely latched. Before driving, check that all doors are properly closed.
Information Displays
Charging
Important Information about Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging
. Charging an EV and increased charging rates can stress a building's electrical system more than a typical household appliance.
. Before plugging the charge cord into an electrical outlet for the first time, have a qualified electrician inspect and verify the electrical system (electrical outlet, wiring, junctions, and protection devices) for heavy-duty service at a 12 amp continuous load.
. Check electrical outlets often, as they may wear out with normal use or become damaged over time, making them unsuitable for EV charging.
. Check the electrical outlet/plug while charging. If the electrical outlet/plug appears hot, discontinue using it immediately and have the electrical outlet serviced by a qualified electrician.
. When charging outdoors, use an electrical outlet that is weatherproof.
Instruments and Controls 125
. Mount the charging cord to reduce strain on the electrical outlet/plug.
. Do not place the charge cord in a position where there is risk of it being submerged in water.
{ Danger
Improper use of portable electric vehicle charge cords may cause a fire, electrical shock, or burns, and may result in damage to property, serious injury, or death.
. Do not use extension cords, multi-outlet power strips, splitters, grounding adapters, surge protectors, or similar devices.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is worn or damaged, or will not hold the plug firmly in place.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is not properly grounded.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is on a circuit with other electrical loads.
126 Instruments and Controls
Charging App
The Charging app provides access to features which help you to review and manage charging preferences.
To launch the Charging app from the infotainment home screen, touch the Charging icon. There are four selections to choose from: Next Charge, Charge Assist, Schedule, and Settings. When you launch Charging for the first time, the Next Charge screen will display.
Next Charge
To view the current charging status on the
infotainment screen, touch C.
On the Next Charge screen, you can review information for the next charging session and specify if you want to Charge Now or Charge Later.
Charge Now
Charge Now is the default charging mode for your vehicle. The vehicle begins charging immediately when it is plugged in and authenticated at the charging location. With Charge Now selected, the Charging screen displays: . Text indicating that the vehicle will
charge immediately when plugged in . The estimated time at which the vehicle
will reach the desired charge level . Target Charge Level Gauge:
The percentage at which the vehicle will stop charging. The gauge also displays an estimate of the vehicle's range upon completing the charging session.
{ Warning
Do not charge your vehicle's battery above an 80% charge if you are going to drive down long, steep grades such as mountain passes. This provides room in the battery for regenerative braking to supplement your conventional brakes during the descent. This is especially important when towing a trailer, which puts additional stress on your vehicle's braking system.
See Hill and Mountain Roads 0 189 for important information about driving on grades.
The default charge level is 80% when plugged in to protect battery life. To set a different charge level, drag the circular marker on the Target Charge Level Gauge to the preferred value. To lower the desired charge level, drag the Charge Level marker counterclockwise, and to increase it drag the marker clockwise. The charge level can also
be changed by tapping « and ª inside
the gauge on the screen. The range estimate updates once the desired charge level is set.
To optimize battery health, the minimum allowable charge level is determined by the vehicle. Charge Later
Instead of charging immediately to a desired charge level, you may choose to delay the charge to the vehicle and have it completed by your desired departure time. This may be a more economical choice and a more efficient use of energy when charging at home. To use this mode, touch Charge Later on the Next Charge screen. With Charge Later selected, the Charging screen displays: . Text indicating that your vehicle will
delay charging to be ready by the time specified
. The ability to set the desired time at which the vehicle will finish charging and be ready for departure
. Target Charge Level Gauge: Ability to set the percentage at which the vehicle will stop charging. The gauge also displays an estimate of the vehicle's range upon completing the charging session.
. Preconditioning: Ability to heat or cool the cabin to your desired temperature using energy from the charger. Energy from the battery is not used to condition the cabin, ensuring the vehicle gets the maximum range from the charging session. Preconditioning happens at the end of the charge, and right before the departure time.
To set the time at which the vehicle will complete the charge and be ready for departure:
Drag each value up or down within the time selector until the preferred time is selected. If the desired charge level cannot be reached by the selected time, a message will display that one of the two preferences must be adjusted.
To adjust desired charge level in Charge Later mode, see "Charge Now" earlier in this section.
Instruments and Controls 127
Setting the Preconditioning preference: Touch the switch to turn on Preconditioning. The Preconditioning temperature can be adjusted by touching Preconditioning on this screen, or in Settings. Active Charging
During an active charging session, the Charging screen displays and continuously updates the following items: . The current charging status . The range the vehicle is capable of driving
at the current charge level . Range accumulation per hour of charging . The estimated time at which the vehicle
will reach the desired charge level . Target Charge Level Gauge: The current
charge level value represented as a percentage and a colored section of the circular gauge.
128 Instruments and Controls
To update the desired charge level for the active charging session, drag the marker on the Target Charge Level Gauge.
Touching the Stop Charge button at any time ends the active charging session. For information on beginning a charging session, see Plug-In Charging 0 276.
For Level 1 chargers, you can also select the appropriate charge cord limit for your location. This determines how much current will flow from an electrical outlet to the vehicle battery. It also ensures proper charge time estimates.
When the charge cord limit is changed to the highest setting on a 120-volt circuit a notification is displayed.
If no Home Charge Location is set, the Level 1 cord limit will revert to the lowest setting every time the vehicle is shifted out of (P) Park.
Range and charge time estimates fluctuate depending on several factors such as charge cord level/limit, battery temperature, and outside temperature. To learn more about the vehicle battery see Plug-In Charging 0 276.
The peek-in charging screen can be used to monitor your vehicle's charge status when the vehicle is off, see Instrument Cluster (Work Truck) 0 109 or Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 111. If equipped, to monitor the charging status remotely, download the myChevrolet app on your mobile device. Fast Charging If equipped, the vehicle will immediately begin charging when plugged into a fast charging station. While Fast Charging, the vehicle will bypass any schedule or departure time selection. See Plug-In Charging 0 276. Charge Assist
To find a charge station using the
infotainment screen, touch D.
The choices available for Charge Assist include Nearby, Favorites, Routes, or Accounts. You can filter the list of shown
charge stations by touching J above
the list.
Nearby
This screen displays nearby stations. When a station name is selected, details of the selected charge station display on the screen.
With Station Info selected, the screen displays:
. Name of the charge station . Number of ports available . Estimated charge percentage remaining
upon arrival
. Charge station address . Favorites button . Navigation button
The Connector screen displays the connector types and availability. From here you can select a connector to see pricing details and charging speed. You can start a charging session by touching the Start Charging button.
The Station Photos screen displays photos of the selected charge station.
Favorites
Displays a list of your favorited stations. You can favorite stations from the Station Details screen.
Routes
Allows you to access routes planned and saved on the myChevrolet app. To activate a route, touch the navigation icon to start route guidance.
Accounts
Allows you to view charge provider accounts that you have linked in the myChevrolet app, and pre-pay for charging. You can also choose to be notified when you are approaching one of your providers' stations.
Schedule
Touch E to schedule a custom charging
plan for each day of the week. When the vehicle is plugged in at the Home Charge Location, the Schedule feature will automatically charge to the desired charge level and precondition the cabin by the time set in the Schedule. This feature acts as a more customizable Charge Later setting than the one on the Next Charge screen.
Creating a Schedule
To create a schedule, touch Create Schedule. If there is no Home Charge Location set, you will be prompted to create one. The Charging Schedule screen displays: . Days of the week . A value selector for setting the desired
charge level . A time selector for setting the time the
vehicle will reach the desired charge level . Preconditioning: Allows the vehicle to
heat or cool the cabin to the desired temperature by using energy from the charger.
. An z allowing you to close the Charging
Schedule dialog . Save & Close button: Applies any changes
made and exits the screen.
Instruments and Controls 129
Days can be assigned to the schedule. Days of the week are represented in toggles containing their first letter. Touching each day illuminates the graphic, confirming that day is assigned that to the schedule. Touching a second time unassigns days from this schedule, dimming the toggle once again. Select all days you wish to adhere to the settings in this schedule. If there are multiple charge schedules, days must be unassigned from their current schedule before they can be assigned to a new one. Once completed with the charging schedule, touch the Save & Close button to finish creating the schedule. On days that are not assigned a schedule, the vehicle will begin charging to 80% as soon as it is plugged in, unless otherwise specified on the Next Charge screen.
130 Instruments and Controls
Home Charge Schedule can be turned ON or OFF. To enable or disable all charging schedules, touch the toggle switch next to Home Charge Schedule on the Schedule screen. Modifying and Deleting Charge Schedules
To modify a schedule, touch the card on the Schedule screen. This will open a screen. Make the desired changes and then touch the Save & Close button when finished. To delete the schedule, touch the Delete Schedule button and confirm your decision when prompted. PowerBase Controls The PowerBase Controls screen displays and allows you to set preferences for sharing your vehicle's high voltage battery power through various connections.
With PowerBase Controls selected, the screen displays:
. Persistent Power: Allows you to enable transfer of your vehicle's high voltage battery power to a device, your home, or another vehicle when your vehicle is off. You can set the battery level that will be reserved for driving or a timer that will automatically turn off Persistent Power.
. Charge Port: Allows you to enable transfer of your vehicle's high voltage battery power to a device, your home, or another vehicle when your vehicle is on.
. Outlets: Allows you to enable PowerBase outlets on your vehicle and shows the active load for both halves of the outlets circuit.
Charge Settings
To view and change the Charge Settings,
touch F.
Use this screen to set vehicle charging preferences. Touching any item will display options for specifying their behavior. The Settings screen displays: Home Charge Location With a Home Charge Location set, the vehicle can determine whether it is plugged in at home and will charge according to any existing schedules. The Home Charge Location can be changed or deleted at this screen. The wireless service and GPS satellite technologies must be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the
battery is disconnected, or if the vehicle has been off for an extended period. If GPS is unavailable, a message displays on the infotainment screen. GPS functionality may resume after the next time you drive the vehicle.
Notifications
This section contains on/off preferences for multiple notifications triggered during the charging session.
Charge Status Feedback : When on, your vehicle will chirp to accompany changes in the charging status.
Charge Cord Unplugged Alert : When on and your vehicle is locked, the horn will sound and the headlamps will flash if the charge cord becomes unplugged.
Charge Power Loss Alert : When on, your vehicle will chirp for an extended period if charging power is cut off.
Fast Charge Prep
If equipped, adjusts the battery to the optimal temperature for quicker Fast Charging. This should be done before charging at a Fast Charger.
Depending on the outside and battery temperature, Fast Charge Prep could take longer to reach the optimal temperature.
When using Google Maps, the Fast Charge Prep feature begins automatically when a Fast Charge station is added to your route
via the A on the infotainment screen.
Preconditioning Temperature
Allows you to set the preferred cabin temperature. During a planned charging session at the Home Charge Location, the vehicle cabin is warmed or cooled to this temperature if set to ON in either the Charge Later screen, or in an active Schedule.
Preferred Charge Times
Allows you to enable preferred charge time windows for the Home Charge Location during both weekday and weekend planned charging sessions. It does so whether the vehicle is set to Charge Later or observing a scheduled charge. This allows for charging at a lower cost by prioritizing charging during the electrical provider's off-peak period. The vehicle will use these times to reach the desired charge level by the scheduled time. If the vehicle cannot reach the desired
Instruments and Controls 131
charge level within these times, it will charge as needed outside of this time window.
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck)
The DIC is displayed in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems.
y or z : Use to scroll to the previous or
next selection.
V : Press to open a menu or select a menu
item. Press and hold to reset certain displays.
132 Instruments and Controls
DIC Information Display Options
Select which info display to view on the DIC by selecting Add to Driver Display in the Vehicle Status on the infotainment display. See Vehicle Status 0 134.
DIC Information Displays
The following is the list of all possible DIC information displays and their locations. Some of the information displays may not be available for your particular vehicle.
Auto Lane Change : Displays the status of a driver-requested lane change when Super Cruise is active. See Super Cruise 0 227.
Audio Now Playing : Displays the actively playing audio.
Navigation : Displays a variety of navigation information.
Phone : Displays a variety of call information.
Trip Information : The Trip 1 or 2 display shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the current trip, touch and hold the touchscreen display when trip odometer is displayed on the vehicle status screen.
The Average Efficiency shows the approximate average kWh per 100 kilometers (kWh/100 km), kilometers per kilowatt hour kWh (km/kWh), or miles per kilowatt hour kWh(mi/kWh). This number is calculated based on the number of kWh/100 km, km/kWh, or mi/kWh recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number only reflects the approximate average electrical energy economy that the vehicle has at that moment, and changes as driving conditions change.
Current Trip : Displays distance driven, average efficiency, and time elapsed since vehicle startup. It resets when you turn your vehicle off.
Time/Date : Displays current date and time information.
Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 351 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352.
If equipped, Tire Temperature is located near the tire pressure graphic. Tire Temperature shows overall temperature as either Cold, Cool, Normal, Warm, or Hot. Normal is typical for normal driving while Warm is typical for spirited driving. Unknown displays when tire temperature information is unavailable.
Trailer Brake : On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected.
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed as a bar graph. Dotted lines may appear in the OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected.
Energy Usage : Shows energy usage of the Driving, Remote Start, Climate and Conditioning vehicle systems as percentages of overall vehicle energy use.
Energy Efficiency : Shows a graph showing the energy efficiency that has been used by the vehicle over a recently driven distance.
Off : Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas.
Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel)
The DIC is displayed in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems.
DIC information is broken down into two main zones:
Left Zone : Displays on the instrument cluster to the left of the speedometer.
Right Zone : Displays on the instrument cluster to the right of the speedometer.
y or z : Use to scroll to the previous or
next selection.
V : Press to open a menu or select a menu
item. Press and hold to reset certain displays.
DIC Information Display Options
Select which info display to view on the DIC by selecting Add to Driver Display in the Vehicle Status on the infotainment display. See Vehicle Status 0 134.
DIC Information Displays
The following is the list of all possible DIC information displays and their locations. Some of the information displays may not be available for your particular vehicle.
Left Zone
Trip Information : The Trip 1 or 2 display shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset. To reset the current trip, touch and hold the touchscreen display when trip odometer is displayed on the vehicle status screen.
The Average Efficiency shows the approximate average kWh per 100 kilometers (kWh/100 km), kilometers
Instruments and Controls 133
per kilowatt hour kWh (km/kWh), or miles per kilowatt hour kWh(mi/kWh). This number is calculated based on the number of kWh/100 km, km/kWh, or mi/kWh recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number only reflects the approximate average electrical energy economy that the vehicle has at that moment, and changes as driving conditions change.
Current Trip : Displays distance driven, average efficiency, and time elapsed since vehicle startup. It resets when you turn your vehicle off.
Time/Date : Displays current date and time information.
Tire Pressure : Shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 351 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352.
If equipped, Tire Temperature is located below the tire pressure graphic. Tire Temperature shows overall temperature as either Cold, Cool, Normal, Warm, or Hot. Normal is typical for normal driving while
134 Instruments and Controls
Warm is typical for spirited driving. Unknown displays when tire temperature information is unavailable.
Trailer Brake : On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected.
TRAILER OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer any time a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed as a bar graph. Dotted lines may appear in the OUTPUT display if a trailer is not connected.
Trailer Tire Pressure : If equipped, shows the approximate pressures of all trailer tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Trailering App 0 309.
Trailer Tire Temperature is located below the tire pressure. Trailer Tire Temperature shows each trailer tire temperature in either degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
Energy Usage : Shows energy usage of the Driving, Remote Start, Climate and Conditioning vehicle systems as percentages of overall vehicle energy use.
Energy Efficiency : Shows a graph showing the energy efficiency that has been used by the vehicle over a recently driven distance.
G-Force : Displays inertial forces being exerted on the vehicle in the lateral (side to side) and vertical (acceleration and braking) direction as numerical values and graphical depictions.
Launch Coach : If equipped, while in Wide Open Watts mode, displays instructional messages and dynamic gauges reflecting brake and throttle pedal positions. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Off : Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas.
Right Zone
Auto Lane Change : Displays the status of a driver-requested lane change when Super Cruise is active. See Super Cruise 0 227.
Performance Timer : If equipped, while in Wide Open Watts mode, displays the current and best times achieved during maximum acceleration.
To reset the best time or dismiss the timer from the screen, highlight the selection on
the performance timer menu and press V.
The current timer resets when you turn your vehicle off. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Audio Now Playing : Displays the actively playing audio.
Navigation : Displays a variety of navigation information.
Phone : Displays a variety of call information.
Off : Allows for no information to be displayed in the cluster info display areas.
Vehicle Status
The following are all possible vehicle status features.
To access the vehicle status menu touch A
from the list of home page icons displayed on the left side of the infotainment display. Vehicle status content is shown on cards that are grouped together in option tabs that are displayed on the infotainment display.
Touching a card on the infotainment display opens up a dialog box for that card. To select a desired option within a dialog box, touch the option and follow any message or alerts that may display. Some options may be unavailable while driving.
Touch Add to Driver Display to send the desired card to the Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument cluster. Touch Remove from Display to remove the selected card from the instrument cluster. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133.
Options
The following is the list of all possible cards and their locations. Some of the cards may not be available for your particular vehicle.
Overview
Displays an interactive 3-D rendered image of your vehicle that shows performance and health information.
Tire Pressure
Displays the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kPa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value
for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System 0 351 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352.
If equipped, Tire Temperature is located below the tire pressure graphic. Tire Temperature shows overall temperature as either Cold, Cool, Normal, Warm, or Hot. Normal is typical for normal driving while Warm is typical for spirited driving. Unknown displays when tire temperature information is unavailable.
When selected, the following options may be chosen in the dialog: Relearn Tire Pressure, and Add to Driver Display.
Energy Info
Energy Usage : Displays how energy is being used for the current drive since the last time the vehicle was started. Percentages of the Driving, Remote Climate, and Climate and Prep vehicle systems as overall vehicle energy use are shown. When selected, distance driven, total energy, energy usage bar diagram, and selectable categories are displayed. Select a category to learn more about how your vehicle uses energy from the battery.
When selected, Add to Driver Display may be chosen in the dialog.
Instruments and Controls 135
Energy Efficiency : Displays a graph showing the energy efficiency that has been used by the vehicle over a recently driven distance. When selected, regenerated range, and instant efficiency is shown along with average efficiency in the dialog.
When selected, Add to Driver Display may be chosen in the dialog.
Trip
Trip Information : Trip 1 or 2 displays the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset.
If equipped, Average Efficiency shows the approximate average kilometers per kilowatt hour kWh (km/kWh) or miles per kilowatt hour kWh (mi/kWh). This number is calculated based on the number of km/kWh or mi/kWh recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. This number only reflects the approximate average electrical energy economy that the vehicle has at that moment, and changes as driving conditions change.
To reset these values, touch reset on the touchscreen display when the Trip Information dialog is selected.
136 Instruments and Controls
When selected, the following options may be chosen in the dialog: Reset Trip 1, Reset Trip 2, and Add to Driver Display.
Current Trip : Displays distance driven, average efficiency, and time elapsed since vehicle startup. It resets when you turn your vehicle off.
When selected, Add to Driver Display may be chosen in the dialog.
Head-Up Display (HUD)
If equipped with HUD, certain vehicle information is projected through a lens on top of the instrument panel onto the windshield.
{ Warning
If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view.
Caution
If you try to use the HUD image as a parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as a parking aid.
The HUD information can be displayed in various languages. The speedometer reading and other numerical values can be displayed in either English or metric units.
The language selection is changed through the radio and the units of measurement are changed through the infotainment screen. See Settings 0 169.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the HUD may display the following vehicle information, messages, or alerts: . Speed . Audio . Phone . Navigation . Driver Assistance Features . Vehicle Messages
Some vehicle messages or alerts displayed in the HUD may be cleared by using the steering wheel controls.
HUD Controls
If equipped, this feature under HUD Controls on the infotainment screen allows you to adjust brightness, height, and rotation. This feature may only be available in P (Park).
HUD Image
Press the icons above and below to adjust the HUD image.
To adjust the HUD image:
1. Adjust the driver seat.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. On the infotainment screen navigate to Home > Controls > HUD.
4. Use the icons or tap the bar to adjust the HUD as desired.
The HUD image will automatically dim and brighten to compensate for outside lighting. Adjust as needed.
The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on the angle and position of sunlight on the HUD image. This is normal.
Polarized sunglasses can make the HUD image harder to see.
HUD Options
Options can be turned on or off from the HEAD-UP DISPLAY screen. See Settings 0 169.
If equipped, the following can be turned on or off using the infotainment screen: . Speed Sign . Navigation . Recent Calls/Audio Lists
HUD Views
There are three views in the HUD. Some vehicle information and vehicle messages or alerts are available in all views.
Instruments and Controls 137
Speed View : If equipped and active, displays the speedometer reading in English or metric units and posted speed limit.
English Shown, Metric Similar Active Safety View : Displays the speed view, pedestrian advisory, trailer sway, and a driver assistance graphic on the left. Driver assistance graphics show your vehicle, vehicle ahead, gap setting, and lane status information.
English Shown, Metric Similar
English Shown, Metric Similar
138 Instruments and Controls
Navigation View : Displays the speed view and indicators for vehicle ahead, Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keep Assist, trailer sway, and pedestrian advisory. Turn-by-turn navigation information is shown during active route. The compass heading is displayed when navigation routing is not active.
Navigation turn-by-turn alerts shown in the instrument cluster may also be displayed in any HUD view.
Care of the HUD
Clean the inside of the windshield to remove any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image.
Clean the HUD lens with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it.
HUD Troubleshooting
If you cannot see the HUD image when the vehicle is on, ensure that: . Nothing is covering the HUD lens. . The HUD brightness setting is not too
dim or too bright. . The HUD is adjusted to the proper height
and rotation.
. You are not wearing polarized sunglasses. . The windshield and HUD lens are clean.
If you continue to experience problems with the HUD, contact your dealer.
The windshield is part of the HUD system. See Windshield Replacement 0 334.
Vehicle Messages
Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another.
The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and
cleared by pressing V. The messages that
require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed.
All messages should be taken seriously; clearing the message does not correct the problem.
If a SERVICE message appears, see your dealer.
Follow the instructions given in the messages. The system displays messages regarding the following topics:
. Service Messages . Fluid Levels . Vehicle Security . Brakes . Ride Control Systems . Advanced Driver Assistance Systems . Cruise Control . Lighting and Bulb Replacement . Wiper/Washer Systems . Doors and Windows . Seat Belts . Airbag Systems . Engine and Transmission . Tire Pressure . Battery . Steering
Propulsion Power Messages
REDUCED ACCELERATION DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the vehicle's propulsion power is reduced. A reduction in propulsion power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no observed reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
Under certain conditions, the performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, or displays repeatedly, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
This message can be displayed when the high voltage battery charge level is low. This is normal behavior as the vehicle is limiting power due to reduced battery capability.
Under certain operating conditions propulsion will be disabled. Try restarting after the vehicle has been off for two minutes.
PROPULSION POWER REDUCED DUE TO TEMPERATURE
This message displays when the vehicle is on, the battery temperature is low, and when the vehicle's performance is limited. The duration of the limited vehicle performance depends, in part, on the high voltage battery charge level. If the high voltage battery charge level is relatively high, as the vehicle is driven, the battery temperature will increase, and the vehicle will return to normal operation. If the high
voltage battery charge level is relatively low the vehicle will not return to normal operation until charged.
Keep the vehicle plugged in, even when fully charged, to keep the high voltage battery temperature ready for the next drive. This is important when outside temperatures are extremely hot or cold.
Vehicle Speed Messages
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/H (MPH)
This message shows that the vehicle speed has been limited to the speed displayed. The limited speed is a protection for various propulsion and vehicle systems, such as lubrication, thermal, brakes, suspension, Teen Driver if equipped, or tires.
Universal Remote System
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Universal Remote System Programming
If equipped, the Universal Garage Door (Universal Remote) controls are located on the infotainment screen.
Instruments and Controls 139
This system can replace up to eight remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. These instructions refer to a garage door opener, but can be used for other devices.
Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming. Erase the programming when vehicle ownership is terminated. See "Erasing Universal Remotes."
To program a garage door opener, park outside directly in line with and facing the garage door opener receiver. Clear all people and objects away from the garage door.
Make sure the hand-held transmitter has a new battery for quick and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
140 Instruments and Controls
Programming the Universal Remote System
Programming involves time-sensitive actions and may time out, requiring the procedure to be repeated. Read these instructions completely before programming the Universal Remote system. It may help to have another person assist with the programming process.
1. On the infotainment home screen, navigate to the Universal Remote controls.
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the rear-view mirror. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener.
3. Select the "Add Remotes" option on the infotainment screen.
4. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the hand-held transmitter button until "Signal Found" appears on the infotainment screen.
5. Once the signal is found, test the Universal Remote System by pressing the Test button. If your garage door moves, then programming was successful. You
may need to press the Test button several times. Indicate the successful programming of a remote by pressing the It Worked button. After successfully programming a remote, there is no need to complete Steps 610.
6. If your garage door does not react during testing, press the It Didn't Work button and proceed to Step 7.
The following steps require the location and pressing of the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener receiver inside the garage. These steps may require a ladder and are time sensitive.
7. Locate the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener receiver in the garage. The name and color may vary by manufacturer but is usually located near the antenna wire.
8. Press and release the Learn or Smart button on the garage door opener receiver. Step 9 must be completed within 30 seconds of pressing this button.
9. Press the Test button on the infotainment screen. If your garage door moves, then programming was successful. You may need to press the
Test button several times. Indicate successful programming by pressing the It Worked button.
10. If programming is not successful, press It Didn't Work button and repeat Steps 8 9, or consult HomeLink by website or phone.
After your Universal Remote has been successfully programmed, you can change the name of the remote on the screen as desired.
Some garage door openers require a modification of Step 4. See "Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators."
For questions or programming help, visit www.homelink.com/gm for self-help videos or call 18003553515. For calls placed outside the U.S., Canada, or Puerto Rico, international rates will apply and may differ based on landline or mobile phone.
Erasing Universal Remotes
To erase a programmed Universal Remote, select the remote on the infotainment screen. Then select "Delete."
To erase ALL programmed Universal Remotes, select any remote on the infotainment screen. Then select "Delete All."
Radio Signals for Some Gate Operators
Some gate operators and radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming.
If programming did not work, replace Step 4 under "Programming the Universal Remote System," with the following:
Press and release the hand-held transmitter button every two seconds until the signal has been found by the Universal Remote System. Proceed to Step 5 under "Programming the Universal Remote System" to complete programming.
Universal Remote System Operation
Using the Universal Remote System
Press the desired Universal Remote button on the infotainment screen.
Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button
To reprogram any of the system buttons:
1. Select the universal remote to be reprogrammed.
2. Select "Delete."
3. Select "Add Remote." Follow the instructions in Universal Remote System Programming 0 139.
Instruments and Controls 141
142 Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . 143 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . 143 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . 143 Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . 144 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . 145 Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Lighting Features Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Battery Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . 148
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls
The exterior lamp controls, also known as headlights, are in the Controls App on the infotainment home screen. Select Controls > Lights > Headlights.
To operate, select the following options:
Off : Turns off the exterior lamps.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Auto : Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, roof marker lamps (if equipped), license plate lamps or Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), depending on outside light conditions.
Parking : Turns on the parking lamps.
On : Turns on the exterior lamps.
IntelliBeam System
If equipped, this system turns the high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions.
The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present.
This light \ appears on the instrument
cluster when the IntelliBeam system is enabled.
Turning the IntelliBeam On and Off
To enable and disable the IntelliBeam system on the infotainment home screen,
select Control App > Lights > \ Auto High
Beams when the headlights are set in the Auto position.
Driving with IntelliBeam
The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph).
The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on.
There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield that automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.
The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:
. The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.
. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.
. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.
. The vehicle speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).
The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect another vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:
. The other vehicle's lamps are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.
. The other vehicle's lamps are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.
. The other vehicle's lamps cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions.
. The vehicle windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.
. The vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.
. The vehicle is being driven on winding or hilly roads.
The automatic high-beam headlamps may need to be disabled if any of the above conditions exist.
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder
A warning chime sounds if the driver door is opened while the vehicle is off and the exterior lamps are on.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push the turn signal lever away from you and release, to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release.
This indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on.
Lighting 143
Flash-to-Pass
To flash the high beams, pull the turn signal lever toward you and release.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional DRL are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL come on when all of the following conditions are met: . The vehicle is on. . The exterior lamp control is in AUTO. . The light sensor determines it is daytime.
The taillamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not turn on when this feature is activated.
The DRL turn off when the headlamps are
turned to O or the vehicle is off.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the DRL can only be turned off when the vehicle is parked.
144 Lighting Automatic Headlamp System
When the exterior lamp control is set to Auto and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically.
There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system comes on immediately. If it is light outside when the vehicle leaves the garage, there is a slight delay before the automatic headlamp system changes to the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). During that delay, the instrument cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel Illumination Control 0 145.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to DRL.
The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is set to On or the vehicle is off.
Lamps On with Wipers
If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the vehicle on and the exterior lamp control is set to Auto, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Set the exterior lamp control to On or Off to disable this feature.
Hazard Warning Flashers
| : Press this button on the overhead
console to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. The turn signals do not work while the hazard warning flashers are on. The hazard warning flashers turn on automatically if the airbags deploy.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is complete. If the lever is moved momentarily to the lane change position, the arrow will flash three times. It will flash six times if Tow/ Haul mode is active. The lever returns to its starting position when it is released. If after signaling a turn or lane change, the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal LED may be burned out.
See your dealer for service. If a LED is not burned out, check the fuse. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left) 0 341 or Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right) 0 343.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
The exterior cargo lamps provide more light in the cargo area or on the sides of the vehicle, if needed.
The exterior cargo lamps controls are in the Controls App on the infotainment home screen. To turn the exterior lamps on or off, select Controls > Lights > Exterior Cargo Lamps when the vehicle is in P (Park), R (Reverse), or N (Neutral).
Activating the exterior cargo lamps may also activate the lamps inside the pickup box, in the tailgate handle, the hitch, cargo switch indicator, and/or the cargo mirror lamps, if equipped.
Become familiar with and follow all state and local laws that apply to cargo lamp operation.
Lighting 145
Interior Lighting
Instrument Panel Illumination Control
Work Truck
146 Lighting
Uplevel Shown, Base Level Similar This feature adjusts the brightness of all illuminated controls.
D : Move the thumbwheel up or down to
brighten or dim the lights. The thumbwheel is functional at night, or when the headlamps or parking lamps are ON.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps automatically come when
any door is opened, K on the remote key is
pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.
The dome lamps controls are in the Controls App on the infotainment home screen. Select Controls > Lights > Dome Lights.
+ Dome Light : Select to manually turn
the dome lamps on or off.
Reading Lamps
There are reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear seats. These lamps
come on when any door is opened, K on
the remote key is pressed, or when the vehicle is turned off.
Front Reading Lamps The front reading lamps are in the overhead console. Press the lamp lens to turn the front reading lamps on or off.
Rear Reading Lamps
The rear reading lamps are above and behind the rear seats.
Press the lamp lens to turn the rear reading lamps on or off.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The interior lamps turn on when pressing K
on the remote key or opening any doors, and the dome lamp control is in the door position.
Some exterior lamps also turn on when
pressing K on the remote key or opening
any doors. Low-beam lamps will only turn on briefly at night, or in areas with limited lighting.
All lamps will eventually turn off after some time.
Entry lighting can be disabled manually by
closing all doors, pressing Q on the remote
key, or starting the vehicle.
This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Lighting.
Approach Detection
If equipped, the entry lighting feature will automatically turn on when the remote key is detected within approximately 2 m (6 ft) of the vehicle.
If the vehicle has remained parked for an extended period of time with no remote key use or keyless access operation, approach detection will be disabled. To reactivate, press any button on the remote key or open and close all vehicle doors to re-enable the entry lighting feature on approach.
Exit Lighting
Some exterior lamps and interior lamps turn on when the driver door is opened after the vehicle is turned off.
The exterior and interior lamps remain on for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off.
The interior lights turn on when the vehicle is turned off.
The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off.
This feature can be changed. On the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Lighting.
Battery Load Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that estimates the battery temperature and state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the 12-volt battery.
When the battery state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to quickly increase the charge. When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging. As this adjustment occurs, you may see the voltage move up or down on the voltmeter gauge or voltage display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped. This is normal. If a problem occurs, an alert will be displayed.
Lighting 147
If the electrical loads are too high, the battery can be discharged when the vehicle is stationary. A high electrical load occurs when several features are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, motor cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery by balancing the electrical system output and the vehicle's electrical needs. In some cases, it can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories.
These actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the driver. If so, a DIC battery voltage and charging message displays. It is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133.
148 Lighting
Battery Power Protection
This feature helps prevent the battery from being drained if the interior courtesy lamps or reading lamps are accidentally left on. If any of these lamps are left on, they automatically turn off after 10 minutes when the vehicle is turned off. The lamps will not come back on again until one of the following occurs:
. The vehicle is started. . The doors are closed and then re-opened.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the vehicle is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn
the exterior lamp control to the O position and then back to the ; or 2 position.
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the vehicle must be on.
Infotainment System
Introduction Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Radio AM-FM Radio (Work Truck Radio) . . . . . . 153 AM-FM Radio (Uplevel Radio) . . . . . . . . . . 154 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Audio Players Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices . . . . . 157 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Navigation Using the Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . 158 Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Global Positioning System (GPS) . . . . . . 160 Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Problems with Route Guidance . . . . . . . . 161
Voice Recognition Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Phone Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Apple CarPlay and Android Auto . . . . . . . 167
Settings Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Trademarks and License Agreements Trademarks and License Agreements . . . 173
Infotainment System 149
Introduction
Read the following pages to become familiar with the features.
{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment feature can cause a crash. You or others could be injured or killed. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Limit your glances at the vehicle displays and focus your attention on driving. Use voice commands whenever possible.
The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help avoid distraction by disabling some features when driving. These features may become disabled when they are unavailable. Many infotainment features are also available through the instrument cluster and steering wheel controls.
Before driving: . Become familiar with the operation,
center stack controls, steering wheel controls, and infotainment display.
150 Infotainment System
. Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.
. Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single control or by using a single voice command.
See Distracted Driving 0 184.
Overview
Infotainment System The infotainment system is controlled by using the infotainment display, controls on the center stack, steering wheel controls, and voice recognition, if available.
Base Truck
1. O (Power)
. Press to turn the power on.
. Press and hold to turn the power off.
. Press to mute/unmute the system when on.
. Turn to decrease or increase the volume.
Uplevel Truck
1. Volume . Turn to decrease or increase the volume.
2. O (Power)
. Press to turn the power on. . Press to mute/unmute the system
when on. . Press and hold to turn the
power off.
Infotainment Home Screen
The infotainment home screen is where vehicle application icons are accessed. Some applications are disabled when the vehicle is moving.
Swipe left or right across the display to access the pages of icons.
Managing Infotainment Home Screen Icons
1. Touch and hold any of the infotainment home screen icons to enter edit mode.
2. Continue holding the icon and drag it to the desired position.
3. Release your finger to drop the icon in the desired position.
Move an Icon to Another Page
1. Drag the icon to the edge of the display toward the desired page.
2. Continue dragging and dropping application icons as desired.
Move an Icon to the Application Tray
To move an icon to the application tray, drag the icon to the applications tray.
Steering Wheel Controls
If equipped, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.
g : Press to answer an incoming call or
start voice recognition. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 164 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 163.
e : Press show the audio sources list. y : Press the control up to answer an
incoming call.
c : Press the control down to decline an
incoming call or end a current call.
The favorites and volume switches are on the back of the steering wheel.
1. Favorite: When on a radio source, press to select the next or previous audio broadcast favorite. When listening to a media device, press to select the next or previous track.
2. Volume: Press to increase or decrease the volume.
Using the System
Audio
Touch the Audio icon to display the active audio source page. Examples of available sources may include AM, FM, SXM (if equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth.
Infotainment System 151
Phone
Touch the Phone icon to display the Phone main page. See Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 164 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 163.
Maps
If equipped, touch the Maps icon to display the navigation map. See Using the Navigation System 0 158.
Google Assistant
If equipped, touch the Google Assistant icon to open the Google Assistant app. See Voice Recognition 0 161.
Google Play
If equipped, touch to download some of your favorite apps in your vehicle. Downloading apps on Google Play requires you to sign into a Google Account and have internet connectivity in your vehicle. Some third-party apps require a separate account and, in some cases, a paid subscription for in-vehicle access.
Settings
Touch the Settings icon to display the Settings menu. See Settings 0 169.
152 Infotainment System
Application Tray
The application tray is on the upper portion of the display and shows 6 applications by default but can hold up to 8 applications.
Infotainment Display Features
Infotainment display features show on the display when available. When a feature is unavailable, it may be disabled. When a feature is touched, it may highlight.
Infotainment Gestures
Use the following finger gestures to control the infotainment system.
Touch/Tap
Touch and Hold
location. This can be done up, down, right, or left. This feature is only available when vehicle is parked and not in motion.
Nudge
Touch and hold can be used to start another gesture, or to move or delete an application.
Drag
Nudge is used to move items a short distance on a list or a map. To nudge, hold and move the selected item up or down to a new location.
Fling or Swipe
Touch/tap is used to select an icon or option, activate an application, or change the location inside a map.
Drag is used to move applications on the infotainment home screen, or to pan the map. To drag the item, it must be held and moved along the display to the new
Fling or swipe is used to scroll through a list, pan the map, or change page views. Do this by placing a finger on the display then moving it rapidly up and down or right and left. Spread
Spread is used to zoom in on a map, certain images, or a web page. Place finger and thumb together on the display, then move them apart.
Pinch
Pinch is used to zoom out on a map, certain images, or a web page. Place finger and thumb apart on the display, then move them together. Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Radio Displays For vehicles with high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays, use a microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that could scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to clean. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.
Infotainment System 153
Software Updates
Over-the-Air Software Updates
If equipped, see "Updates" under Settings 0 169 for details on software updates.
Radio
AM-FM Radio (Work Truck Radio)
Playing the Radio
From the infotainment home screen, touch the Audio icon to display the now playing screen for the active audio source. Touch the source button such as FM or AM to change your source.
Finding a Station
Seeking a Station
From the AM or FM screen, touch the back or forward buttons to search for the previous or next strong station.
Tune
Touch Y on the infotainment display to
enter the Tune screen. Enter a frequency using the keypad.
154 Infotainment System
Touch the H to save the station as a
favorite.
Entering a valid AM or FM frequency will automatically tune to the new station but not close the Tune screen.
Touch the Go button or frequency in the list to begin playing the station. The tune page will close and return to the now playing screen.
Storing Radio Station Favorites
Saved favorite stations will show at the bottom of the now playing screen.
AM or FM favorites can be stored by pressing and holding a favorite slot.
Audio Settings
Audio settings vary by region.
From the now playing screen, touch k and
the following may display.
Sound . Equalizer . Fade/Balance . Sound Mode (if equipped)
Bose AudioPilot
If equipped, adjusts the volume based on the noise inside the vehicle and vehicle speed.
Manage Radio Favorites
Displays a list of audio favorites that can be moved or deleted.
Radio Text (RDS)
When on, radio station call letters and messages from radio stations will be shown.
Radio Text Category
When on, category information about current radio content will be shown.
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS relies on receiving specific RDS information from radio stations and only works when the information is available. It is possible that a radio station could broadcast information that causes the radio to work improperly.
In addition, RDS features are region and country of sale specific. This means specific RDS content may not be available in your listening area or in the country you operate the vehicle.
To turn RDS features on or off, see "Audio Settings" previously in this section.
The following RDS features may be supported by radio broadcasters in your listening area:
RDS Features . Display radio station call letters . Display messages from radio stations . Provide radio station category information
(when available)
AM-FM Radio (Uplevel Radio)
Playing the Radio
From the infotainment home screen, touch the Audio icon to display the now playing screen for the active audio source. Touch the source button such as FM, AM, or SXM (if equipped) in the left corner to change your source.
Finding a Station
Seeking a Station
From the AM or FM screen, touch the back or forward buttons to search for the previous or next strong station.
Tune
Touch B on the infotainment display to
enter the Tune screen. Enter a frequency using the keypad.
Touch the H to save the station as a
favorite.
Entering a valid AM or FM frequency will automatically tune to the new station but not close the Tune screen.
Touch the Go button or frequency in the list to begin playing the station. The tune page will close and return to the now playing screen.
Storing Radio Station Favorites
Saved favorite stations will show at the left side of the now playing screen.
AM, FM, or SXM favorites can be stored by pressing and holding a favorite slot.
Audio Settings
Audio settings vary by region.
From the now playing screen, touch * and
the following may display.
Sound . Equalizer
. Fade/Balance . Sound Mode (if equipped)
Bose AudioPilot
If equipped, adjusts the volume based on the noise inside the vehicle and vehicle speed.
Manage Radio Favorites
Displays a list of audio favorites that can be moved or deleted.
Radio Text (RDS)
When on, radio station call letters and messages from radio stations will be shown.
Radio Text Category
When on, category information about current radio content will be shown.
Radio Data System (RDS)
RDS relies on receiving specific RDS information from radio stations and only works when the information is available. It is possible that a radio station could broadcast information that causes the radio to work improperly.
Infotainment System 155
In addition, RDS features are region and country of sale specific. This means specific RDS content may not be available in your listening area or in the country you operate the vehicle.
To turn RDS features on or off, see "Audio Settings" previously.
The following RDS features may be supported by radio broadcasters in your listening area:
RDS features . Display radio station call letters . Display messages from radio stations . Provide radio station category information
(when available)
Satellite Radio
SiriusXM Radio Service
If equipped, vehicles with a valid SiriusXM radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming.
SiriusXM radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, in digital-quality sound. In the U.S., see www.siriusxm.com or call 1-888-601-6296. In Canada, see www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
156 Infotainment System
When SiriusXM is active, the channel name, number, song title, and artist appear on the display.
SiriusXM with 360L
SiriusXM with 360L interface has enhanced in-vehicle listening experience for subscribers. The experience now offers more categories and system learned recommendations toward discovering more personalized content.
To use the full SiriusXM 360L program, including streaming content and listening recommendations, OnStar Connected Access is required and Terms and Conditions accepted. Connected vehicle services vary by model and require a complete working electrical system, cell reception, and GPS signal.
Reference the SiriusXM user guide for use and subscription information.
Playing SiriusXM Content
Touch r, j, r or [ on the now playing
screen to rewind, pause, play, or fast forward content.
Finding a Channel
From the SiriusXM now playing screen,
touch o CH or CHp to open the SXM tuner
channel list.
To directly tune to a channel, touch the Tune icon to enter a channel number using the keypad.
Browsing Content
Touch ( to view different browsing
content.
Browse will include Channels, Music, On Demand shows and episodes, Sports and News content.
SiriusXM Settings
From the SiriusXM now playing screen, touch the user settings icon in the upper right to display the SiriusXM settings
The settings include subscription information, help and support, and listener preferences.
Radio Reception
Unplug any electronic devices from the accessory power outlets if there is static interference.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than FM, especially at night. The longer range may also cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Storms and power lines may also interfere with radio reception. Try reducing the treble on the radio if static interference occurs.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
If equipped, SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or parking under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Some cellular services may interfere with SXM reception causing signal loss.
Mobile Devices
Making or receiving calls, charging, or just having a mobile device on may cause static interference. Unplug or turn off any mobile devices if this happens.
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band roof antenna may be used for radio, navigation, and other communication systems, depending on the equipped options. To ensure clear reception, keep the antenna clear of obstructions, such as snow and ice. Reception can be affected by an open sunroof or roof-mounted cargo.
Audio Players
Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices
Only use trusted media devices. Avoid untrusted mobile and USB media devices that may contain files that affect system operation or performance.
USB Port
The vehicle may be equipped with multiple USB ports. Music may be played from a connected USB device. Ports may also be used for charging.
Caution
To avoid vehicle damage, unplug all accessories and disconnect all accessory cables from the vehicle when not in use. Accessory cables left plugged into the vehicle, unconnected to a device, could be damaged or cause an electrical short if the unconnected end comes in contact with liquids or another power source such as the accessory power outlet.
USB Audio
To play music via USB:
1. On the audio now playing screen, touch source and select USB.
2. If there is no device connected, follow the screen prompts to connect the device.
3. Supported media content will appear on the display.
Bluetooth Audio
Music may be played from a connected Bluetooth mobile device.
Volume and song selection may be controlled by using the infotainment controls. If Bluetooth is selected and no
Infotainment System 157
volume is present, check the volume setting on the infotainment system or the connected mobile device.
To play music via Bluetooth:
1. On the audio now playing page, select source and select the desired Bluetooth mobile device.
2. If there is no mobile device connected, follow the screen prompts to pair the device.
3. Supported media content will appear on the display.
Manage Bluetooth Devices
Managing Bluetooth devices allows you to add, delete, or select another paired mobile device.
Only one Bluetooth mobile device can be active at a time.
Some mobile devices support sending Bluetooth music information to display on the radio. For more information about supported Bluetooth features, visit your brand website. See Online Account 0 398 for details.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
158 Infotainment System
Navigation
Using the Navigation System
The Navigation software is provided by Google Maps. The information provided in this section is a general overview and is subject to change. For the latest functional information, see g.co/mapsincar.
Accept the Terms and Conditions to use.
Internet Connectivity
Google Maps relies on a subscription data plan for full functionality, including availability of offline maps. With an applicable connected services plan, Google Maps can be used offline when driving through connectivity dead zones by auto-downloading offline maps prior to going offline.
Profiles
Sign in to a Google Account for personalized service. Information available in the Google Account will be shown.
To log into a profile, see Accounts under Settings 0 169.
Voice Assistant
If equipped, Google Maps can be controlled by voice commands, see Google Assistant under Voice Recognition 0 161.
Language and Units
To change the language and units, see Settings 0 169.
Mute Settings
During active route guidance, Google Maps can give audible voice directions, traffic alerts, or can be muted. In the Google Maps app, touch Settings, then Mute settings to access the options. Alternatively, audible voice directions and traffic alerts can be muted by tapping sound icon on the turn card during active navigation.
Compass
The Google Maps orientation can be changed between the direction currently traveling, pointing north, and route overview. Touch the compass to switch between these options.
To recenter the map to the current location, touch the location icon.
Super Cruise
If equipped, Super Cruise highlights routes in a specific outline. See Super Cruise 0 227.
Electric Vehicle (EV) Features with Google Maps
When vehicle data is shared with Google, some of the Maps features for EVs are as follows: . Estimated battery charge level at arrival . Estimated minimum charging time in
order to reach destination
If the vehicle needs to be charged to reach a destination, charging stations may automatically be added to a route.
Maps
Auto-Downloaded Maps
Google Maps downloads maps automatically for use when not connected to the Internet. Offline maps make map data available to vehicle features regardless of connectivity.
To turn on auto-download:
1. Open Google Maps.
2. Touch the Settings icon.
3. Touch Privacy center, then select Offline maps.
4. Select Auto-download offline maps. 5. Check the Internet connection and wait
for the download to finish. Downloading Offline Maps 1. Open Google Maps. 2. Touch Settings, then Offline maps. 3. Touch the Select your own map
square icon. 4. Adjust the map to cover the desired area
to download. 5. Touch Download.
Navigation Symbols
The following are the most common symbols that may appear in Google Maps.
This indicates the vehicle's current location and direction on the map.
The destination pin marks the location of the final destination. Touch the pin to view the destination address or to add it or remove it from the Favorites list. Hide the information by touching the pin one more time. It will automatically time out if no action is taken.
A second pin in the menu is the route overview. Touch this pin to show more details of the destination or to remove the destination.
Destination
Searching for a Destination
A destination can be searched using Google Assistant.
To search for a destination without Google Assistant:
1. Open Google Maps.
2. Touch the Search field.
3. Enter the destination.
Infotainment System 159
4. Touch the Navigation icon.
Alternate Routes
Alternate routes are displayed as separate lines. While in either Turn-by-Turn navigation or on the route overview, touch the suggested alternate route.
Adding a Stop on Route by Voice 1. While in Turn-by-Turn navigation, touch
the Search icon at the bottom. 2. Touch the Google Assistant mic icon and
say the destination to search by voice. 3. Select the desired search result from
the list. 4. Touch the Add stop icon.
Adding a Stop on Route by Category 1. While in Turn-by-Turn navigation, touch
the Search icon at the bottom. 2. Select a category. 3. Select the desired search result from
the list. 4. Touch the Add stop icon.
Adding a Home or Work Address
To edit a home or work address, an account must be logged in. See Accounts under Settings 0 169.
160 Infotainment System
1. Open Google Maps. 2. Touch Settings, then touch Edit home
or work. 3. Enter the address.
Search by Category
Destinations can be searched by category, such as restaurant or grocery store. 1. Open Google Maps. 2. Touch the search bar. 3. Touch Categories, then select a category. 4. Touch the desired location, then touch
the Navigation icon.
Avoid Tolls, Highways, or Ferries 1. Open Google Maps. 2. Touch the Settings icon. 3. Select Route options. 4. Select the desired options and then
touch X to close.
An Alternative Way for General Route Options 1. During active route guidance, touch
Route Overview. 2. Select Route options. 3. Select the desired option and then touch
X to close.
Traffic Layers
1. Open Google Maps.
2. Touch the Settings icon.
3. Toggle between Traffic on or off.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
The current position of the vehicle is determined by using satellite signals and various vehicle signals.
At times, other interference such as the satellite condition, road configuration, condition of the vehicle, and/or other circumstances can affect the navigation system's ability to determine the accurate position of the vehicle.
This system might not be available or interference can occur if any of the following are true: . Signals are obstructed by tall buildings,
trees, large trucks, or a tunnel. . Satellites are being repaired or improved.
For more information if the GPS is not functioning properly, see Problems with Route Guidance 0 161.
Vehicle Positioning
At times, the position of the vehicle on the map could be inaccurate due to one or more of the following reasons:
. The road system has changed.
. The vehicle is driving on slippery road surfaces such as sand, gravel, or snow.
. The vehicle is traveling on winding roads or long, straight roads.
. The vehicle is approaching a tall building or a large vehicle.
. The surface streets run parallel to a freeway.
. The vehicle has been transferred by a vehicle carrier or a ferry.
. The current position calibration is set incorrectly.
. The vehicle is traveling at high speed.
. The vehicle changes directions more than once, or the vehicle is turning on a turn table in a parking lot.
. The vehicle is entering and/or exiting a parking lot, garage, or a lot with a roof.
. The GPS signal is not received.
. A roof carrier is installed on the vehicle.
. Tire chains are installed on the vehicle.
. The tires are replaced or worn.
. The tire pressure for the tires is incorrect.
. This is the first navigation use after the map data is updated.
. The 12-volt battery has been disconnected for several days.
. The vehicle is driving in heavy traffic where driving is at low speeds, and the vehicle is stopped and started repeatedly.
Problems with Route Guidance
Inappropriate route guidance can occur under one or more of the following conditions:
. The turn was not made on the road indicated.
. Route guidance might not be available when using automatic rerouting for the next right or left turn.
. The route might not be changed when using automatic rerouting.
. There is no route guidance when turning at an intersection.
. Automatic rerouting might display a route returning to the set waypoint if heading for a destination without passing through a set waypoint.
. The route prohibits the entry of a vehicle due to a regulation by time or season or any other regulation which may be given.
. Some routes might not be searched.
. The route to the destination might not be shown if there are new roads, if roads have recently changed, or if certain roads are not listed in Maps.
To recalibrate the vehicle's position on the map, park with the vehicle running for two to five minutes, until the vehicle position updates. Make sure the vehicle is parked in a location that is safe and has a clear view of the sky and away from large obstructions.
Voice Recognition
If equipped, the vehicle's built in Google Assistant allows for hands-free use of media and messaging, navigation and climate control functionality in the vehicle. To
activate, quickly press and release g on the
steering wheel, touch Google Assistant on the infotainment home screen, or use the wake up words "Hey Google" or "OK Google." Google Assistant must be set as the default assistant for steering wheel and wake word activation to work.
Infotainment System 161
However, not all features within these areas are supported by voice commands and requires the user to have a valid data subscription plan or be able to connect to an external WiFi in order to use the Google Assistant features.
Using Voice Recognition
Voice recognition becomes available once the system is initialized. This begins when the vehicle is turned on. Initialization may take a few moments.
1. Quickly press and release g on the
steering wheel controls, touch Google Assistant on the infotainment home page, or use the wake up words "Hey Google" or "OK Google" to activate voice recognition. Google Assistant must be set
as the Default Assistant for the g and
the wake word options to work.
2. Clearly speak one of the commands described later in this section.
Canceling Google Assistant
. Press c on the steering wheel controls
to cancel the Google Assistant request.
162 Infotainment System
Helpful Hints for Speaking Commands
Voice recognition identifies commands that are naturally stated in sentence form, or direct commands that state the application and the task.
For best results: . Speak the command naturally, not too
fast, not too slow. . Use direct commands without a lot of
extra words. For example, "Call <name> at work," "Play" followed by the artist or song name, or "Play" followed by the radio station number.
Direct commands are more clearly understood by the system. An example of a direct command is "Call <number>."
If a cell phone number was saved with a name and a place, the direct command should include both. For example "Call <name> at work."
Voice Recognition for the Radio
When voice is started, the voice recognition commands for AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped), and media apps (if supported) are available.
"Play <AM frequency> AM" : Tune to the radio station frequency identified in the command (like "nine fifty").
"Play <FM frequency> FM" : Tune to the radio station frequency identified in the command (like "one oh one point one").
"Play channel <SXM channel number> on SiriusXM" : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station channel number identified in the command. This command may require an online connection.
"Play <SXM channel name> on Sirius XM" : Tune to the SiriusXM radio station channel name identified in the command. This command may require an online connection.
"Play <Media> on <Audio Source>" : Play media like a song or channel using a specified audio source such as Pandora or Spotify. This command may require an online connection.
Voice Recognition for the Phone
Make sure the phone is paired using Bluetooth to use the phone related voice commands.
"Call <contact name>" : Initiate a call to a stored contact. The command may include location if the contact has location numbers stored.
"Call < phone number>" : Initiate a call to a phone number of seven digits or 10 digits.
"Send a message to <contact name>" : Send a message to a stored contact.
Voice Recognition for Navigation
Navigation commands can be used to start, cancel route, or add way points/POI.
"Navigate to <destination address>" : Initiate navigation to the address in the command.
"Find a <Place of Interest>" : Find and initiate navigation to a POI in the command.
"Add <destination> on my way" : Adds a way-point to the current route.
"Take me home" : Starts navigation to Home location set in Google maps.
Onboard Vehicle Commands
These commands can be used to adjust vehicle temperature, control window defrosters, etc.
"Turn on the A/C" : Turns on the air conditioning.
"Set temperature to <desired number> degrees" : Set to a specific temperature inside your vehicle.
Phone Assistant Voice Recognition
While a mobile phone is connected via
Bluetooth, press and hold g on the steering
wheel controls until you hear a response from the phone's voice assistant , which will launch the Voice Assistant on the connected mobile phone (e.g., Google assistant, Siri, etc.).
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview)
The Bluetooth-capable system can interact with many mobile devices to: . Place and receive calls in a
hands-free mode. . Share the device's address book or
contact list with the vehicle. . Stream audio (music, podcasts). . Notify receipt of text messages.
To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:
. Become familiar with the features of the mobile device. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries.
. Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.
. Pair mobile device(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all mobile devices. See "Pairing" later in this section.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable mobile device with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while the vehicle is on . The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all mobile devices support all functions and not all mobile devices work with the Bluetooth system. See Online Account 0 398 for more information about compatible mobile devices.
Controls
Use the controls on the infotainment display and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system.
Infotainment System 163
Steering Wheel Controls
g : Press and release to answer incoming
calls on your connected Bluetooth mobile device. Press and hold for mobile device assistant.
c : Press to end a call, decline a call,
or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system when not on a call.
Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Using the System 0 151.
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth mobile device system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. The volume level while on a mobile device call can be adjusted by pressing the steering wheel controls or the volume controls for the infotainment system. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later calls. The volume cannot be lowered beyond a certain level.
164 Infotainment System
Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone)
Pairing
A Bluetooth-enabled mobile device must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the mobile device manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the device.
Pairing Information
. Select the phone icon on the infotainment home screen.
. If no mobile device has been paired, a message on the infotainment display will show the Manage Phones option. Select this option and the Phones screen will display. See "Pairing a Phone" later in this section.
. A Bluetooth mobile device with music capability can be paired to the vehicle as a phone and a music player at the same time.
. Up to 10 devices can be paired to the Bluetooth system.
. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.
. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the mobile device changes or the phone is deleted from the system.
. If a previously paired mobile device is not connecting to the Bluetooth system, try forgetting the mobile device on the vehicle's infotainment system and also forgetting the vehicle in the Bluetooth settings of the mobile device. Then repeat the pairing process.
. If multiple paired mobile devices are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired mobile device that is set to First to Connect. If there is no mobile device set to First to Connect, it will connect to the mobile device which was used last. To connect to a different paired mobile device, see "Connecting to a Different Phone" later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Make sure Bluetooth has been enabled on the phone before starting the pairing process.
2. Select the phone icon on the infotainment home screen.
3. If a phone has been previously added, select Settings > Connections > Phones to reach the device manager. From the
device manager, select "Add Phone." If a phone has been previously added, the "Add Phone" card will just be a "+" button.
4. Select Manage Phones to display the Phones screen.
5. Select Add Phone.
If a phone has been previously added or disconnected, the "Add Phone" card will just be a "+" card.
6. The code on both the phone and infotainment display need to be acknowledged for pairing to be successful.
7. Follow the instructions on the phone to confirm the six-digit code showing on the infotainment display and select Pair. The code on the phone and infotainment display need to be acknowledged for pairing to be successful.
8. If a previously paired mobile device is not connecting to the Bluetooth system, try forgetting the mobile device on the vehicle's infotainment system and also forgetting the vehicle in the Bluetooth settings of the mobile device.
9. If the vehicle name does not appear on your phone under the "other devices" or "available devices" menu, there are a few ways to start the pairing process over:
. Turn Bluetooth off then back on, on your phone.
. Go back to the beginning of the Phone menus on the infotainment display and restart the pairing process.
. Turn the phone off and then back on.
. Reset the phone, but this step should be done as a last effort.
10. If the phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, select Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted.
11. To pair additional phones, select Settings > Connections > Phones.
First to Connect Paired Phones
If multiple paired phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the paired phone that is set as First to Connect. To enable a paired phone as the First to Connect phone:
1. Make sure the phone is turned on.
2. Select the Settings icon on the infotainment home screen.
3. Select Connections.
4. Select Phone.
5. Select Options under the connected phone.
6. Select First to Connect from the phone's settings menu and set First to Connect to On.
Phones and mobile devices can be added, removed, connected, and disconnected. A sub-menu will display whenever a request is made to add or manage phones and mobile devices.
Accessing the Device List Screen
There are two ways to access the device list screen:
Using the Settings Icon
1. Select the Settings icon on the infotainment home screen or the Settings icon on the application tray near the left of the display.
2. Select Connections.
3. Select Phones.
Infotainment System 165
Using the Phone Icon
1. Select the Phone icon on the infotainment home screen or the Phone icon on the application tray near the left of the display.
2. Select * on the Phones screen.
3. Select Connected Phone.
Disconnecting a Connected Phone
To disconnect a phone: 1. Open the Device List Screen. See
"Accessing the Device List Screen" previously in this section.
2. Select Option on the phone card to show the phone's or mobile device's settings.
3. Select Disconnect.
Deleting a Paired Phone
To delete a paired phone:
1. Open the Device List Screen. See "Accessing the Device List Screen" previously in this section.
2. Select Option on the phone card to show the phone's or mobile device's settings.
3. Select Forget Phone.
166 Infotainment System
Connecting to a Different Phone
To connect to a different phone, the new phone must be in the vehicle and paired to the Bluetooth system.
To connect to a different phone:
1. Open the Device List Screen. See "Accessing the Device List Screen" previously in this section.
2. Select the new phone you want to connect to from the list of available phones. See "First to Connect Paired Phones" previously in this section.
Switching to Handset or Hands-Free Mode
To switch between handset or hands-free mode: . While the active call is hands-free, select
the Audio Output option, then select Phone to switch to the handset mode.
The mute icon will not be available or functional while Handset mode is active. . While the active call is on the handset, select the Audio Output option, then select Car Speakers to switch to the hands-free mode.
Making a Call Using Contacts
Calls can be made through the Bluetooth system using personal phone contact information for all phones that support the Phone Book feature. Become familiar with the phone settings and operation and that the phone is set to allow the sharing of contacts over Bluetooth with the vehicle. Verify the phone supports this feature and that the phone is set to allow the sharing of contacts over Bluetooth with the vehicle.
The Contacts menu accesses the phone book stored in the phone.
To make a call using the Contacts menu:
1. Select the Phone icon on the infotainment home screen or on the application tray near the left of the display.
2. Select Contacts.
3. There are two methods to search for contacts:
. Search bar Select the search icon on the top right of the Phones window and type the name or number of the contact on the
keyboard. Search results will be displayed corresponding to the user input. Select the name to call. . Scroll Select the list and scroll, or use the scrollbar on the left side of the Phones window. Select the name to call.
Making a Call Using the Recents Menu
The Recents menu accesses the recents call list from your phone.
To make a call using the Recents menu:
1. Select the Phone icon on the infotainment home screen or on the application tray near the left of the display.
2. Select Recents.
3. Select the name or number to call.
Making a Call Using the Keypad
To make a call by dialing the numbers:
1. Select the Phone icon on the infotainment home screen or on the application tray near the left of the display.
2. Select Keypad and enter a phone number.
3. Select the phone icon on the infotainment display to start dialing the number.
Searching Contacts Using the Keypad
To search for contacts using the keypad: 1. Select the Phone icon on the
infotainment home screen. 2. Select Keypad and enter partial phone
numbers or contact names using the digits on the keypad to search. Results appear on the right side of the display. Select one to place a call.
Accepting or Declining a Call
When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Accepting a Call
There are two ways to accept a call:
. Press g on the steering wheel controls.
. Select Answer on the infotainment display.
Declining a Call
There are two ways to decline a call:
. Press c on the steering wheel controls.
. Select Decline on the infotainment display.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
Accepting a Call
Press g to answer, then select Switch on
the infotainment display.
Declining a Call
Press c to decline, then select Decline on
the infotainment display.
Switching Between Calls (Call Waiting Calls Only)
To switch between calls, select Phone on the infotainment home screen to display Call View. While in Call View, select the call information of the call on hold to change calls.
Ending a Call . Press c on the steering wheel controls. . Select # on the infotainment display,
next to a call, to end only that call.
Infotainment System 167
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system. Use the Keypad to enter the number.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
If equipped, Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay capability may be available through a compatible smartphone. If the phone is paired and projections are available, Apple CarPlay icons will become illuminated on the infotainment home screen of the infotainment display.
To use Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay:
For Wired Phone Projection
1. For Android 9 smartphones and older, download the Android Auto app to your phone from the Google Play Store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay.
2. Connect your Android phone or Apple iPhone by using the factory-provided phone USB cable and plugging into a USB data port. For best performance, it is highly recommended to use the device's factory-provided USB cable, which should
168 Infotainment System
be replaced after significant wear to maintain connection quality. Aftermarket or third-party cables may not work.
3. When the phone is first connected, to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, accept the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
4. Follow the instructions on the phone.
The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the infotainment home screen will illuminate. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch the next time the USB is connected. If not, select the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the infotainment home screen to launch.
Select { on the center stack to return to
the infotainment home screen.
For Wireless Phone Projection
Verify your phone is wireless compatible by visiting the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay support page.
1. For Android 9 smartphones and older, download the Android Auto app to your phone from the phones Google Play Store. There is no app required for Apple CarPlay.
2. For first time connection, make sure Bluetooth and WiFi are turned on in phone settings. To connect the phone over Bluetooth, see Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 164 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 163.
3. When the phone is first connected, to activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, agree to the terms and conditions on both the infotainment system and the phone.
4. Follow the instructions on the phone.
The Android Auto and Apple CarPlay icons on the infotainment home screen will illuminate. Android Auto and/or Apple CarPlay may automatically launch upon wireless connection. If not, select the Android Auto or Apple CarPlay icon on the infotainment home screen to launch.
Wireless CarPlay and/or Wireless Android Auto may experience occasional service disruption due to outside Wi-Fi interference.
To disconnect the phones wireless projection for that paired device:
1. Select Settings from the infotainment home screen.
2. Select Connections.
3. Select Phones.
4. Select Options on the phone card.
5. Change the connection type to Bluetooth Calling and Media.
Select { on the center stack to return to
the infotainment home screen.
Features are subject to change. For further information on how to set up Android Auto and Apple CarPlay in the vehicle, visit your brand website. See Online Account 0 398 for details.
CarPlay will not support Fast Connect on iPhones with iOS version 13 or older.
Android Auto is provided by Google and is subject to Google's terms and privacy policy. Apple CarPlay is provided by Apple and is subject to Apple's terms and privacy policy. Data plan rates apply. For Android Auto support and to see if your phone is compatible, see https:/www.android.com/ auto/compatability. For Apple CarPlay support and to see if your phone is compatible, see www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ . Apple or Google may change or suspend availability at any time. Google, Android, Android Auto, Google Maps, and other marks are trademarks of Google LLC. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Select { on the center stack to exit Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. To enter back into Android Auto or Apple CarPlay, press and
hold { on the center stack.
Settings
To access the Settings menus: 1. Touch Settings on the infotainment
home screen. 2. Touch the desired category to display a
list of available options. 3. Touch to select the desired feature
setting. 4. Touch the options on the infotainment
display to disable or enable a feature.
5. Touch S to go back.
The Settings menu may contain the following:
Connections
The menu may contain the following:
Phones
Allows connecting to a different cell phone or mobile device source, disconnecting a cell phone or media device, or deleting a cell phone or media device.
Wi-Fi Networks
Shows connected and available Wi-Fi networks.
Wi-Fi Hotspot
Allows adjustment of different Wi-Fi features.
Vehicle-to-Phone Sharing
Allows GM apps to use vehicle data on the listed phones shown.
Trusted Device
Allows for setting a phone as your trusted device to establish a secure communication channel between your phone and vehicle that enables convenient features like instant profile unlocking and account sign in. When nearby, your trusted device is recognized automatically via a unique Bluetooth connection.
Vehicle
The menu may contain the following:
Teen Driver
See Teen Driver 0 171.
Infotainment System 169
Rear Seat Reminder
Allows for a chime and a message when the rear door has been opened before or during operation of the vehicle.
Buckle to Drive
This feature can prevent shifting out of Park when the driver's, and if applicable the front passenger's, seat belt is not buckled. See Buckle To Drive 0 53.
Climate and Air Quality
Allows adjustment of different climate settings.
Collision/Detection Systems
Allows adjustment of different driver assistance system settings.
Comfort and Convenience
Allows adjustment of different comfort and convenience settings.
Lighting
Allows adjustment of different lighting settings.
Power Door Locks
Allows adjustment of different door lock settings.
170 Infotainment System
Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start
Allows adjustment of different remote lock settings.
Ride Height
Allows adjustment of different ride height settings.
Power Assist Steps
Allows adjustment of different running board settings.
Seating Position
Allows adjustment of different seating position settings.
Suspension
Allows adjustment of different suspension settings.
Trailering
Allows adjustment of different trailering settings.
Apps and Notifications
Shows a list of installed apps and the permissions used.
Date / Time
Allows setting of the clock.
Display Allows adjustment of the infotainment display.
Sounds Allows adjustment of the infotainment system sounds.
Profiles and Accounts Modifies the infotainment system's profiles and provides access to the accounts assigned to the currently active profile.
Privacy The menu may contain the following: Location Services Touch to view the Location Services screen. App Permissions Touch to view the Permission manager screen. GM Privacy Statement Touch to view the GM Privacy Statement screen. Google Legal Touch to view the Google legal screen.
Storage
This menu shows the storage info on the infotainment system.
Security
This menu allows adjustment of the infotainment security settings.
System
The menu may contain the following:
Language
This will set the display language used on the infotainment display.
Keyboard and Speech
Touch to change keyboard and speech settings.
Quick Startup
This allows your infotainment system to quickly resume its last session.
While the vehicle is in park, press and hold the mute/end call button on the steering wheel for 15 seconds to reboot the infotainment system.
Units
Touch to change units settings.
Reset Options
Touch to change reset settings.
About
Touch to view the infotainment system software information.
Legal Information
Touch to view legal and license information.
Updates
This menu allows adjustment of the vehicle update settings.
Google
This menu allows adjustment of the Google settings.
Teen Driver
If equipped, this allows multiple keys to be registered for beginner drivers to encourage safe driving habits. When the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, it will automatically activate certain safety systems, allow setting of some features, and limit the use of others. The Report Card will record vehicle data about driving behavior that can be viewed later. When the vehicle
is started with a Teen Driver key, the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays a message that Teen Driver is active.
To access:
1. From the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Teen Driver.
2. Create a Personal Identification Number (PIN) by choosing a four-digit PIN. Re-enter the PIN to confirm. To change the PIN, touch Change PIN.
The PIN is required to: . Set up/Add or remove keys. . Change Teen Driver settings. . Change or clear the Teen Driver PIN. . Access or delete Report Card data.
Set up/Add keys to activate Teen Driver and assign restrictions to the key:
Any vehicle key can be registered, up to a maximum of eight keys. Label the Teen Driver key to tell it apart from the other keys.
For a pushbutton start system:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. The vehicle must be in P (Park).
3. From the Settings menu, touch Vehicle and then Teen Driver.
Infotainment System 171
4. Enter the PIN.
5. Place the remote key you wish to register in the transmitter pocket. The key does not need to be the one that started the vehicle.
6. From the Teen Driver menu, touch Setup Keys or Add/Remove Teen Driver Keys.
. If the remote key has not previously been registered, the option to add the key displays. Touch Add and a confirmation message displays. Teen Driver restrictions will be applied whenever this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.
. If the remote key has already been registered, the option to remove the key displays. If Remove is touched, the remote key is no longer registered. A confirmation message displays, and Teen Driver restrictions will not be applied if this remote key is used to operate the vehicle.
In vehicles with a pushbutton start system, if a Teen Driver and a non-Teen Driver key are both present at start up, the vehicle will recognize the non-Teen Driver key to start the vehicle. The Teen Driver settings will not be active.
172 Infotainment System
Manage Settings or Teen Driver Settings
Depending on the options of your vehicle, the following menu items may be displayed:
Buckle to Drive : When turned ON, Buckle to Drive prevents the driver from shifting out of P (Park) for a period of time after the brake pedal is pressed if the driver, or on some vehicles the detected passenger, has not buckled their seat belt. On some vehicles, Buckle to Drive is always ON when Teen Driver is active and is not configurable.
Audio Volume Limit : Allows a maximum audio volume to be set. Turn the audio volume limit on or off. Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume. On some infotainment systems, touch Set Audio Volume Limit to choose the maximum allowable audio volume level.
Set Audio Volume Limit : Use the arrows to choose the maximum allowable level for the audio volume.
Teen Driver Speed Limiter : Limits the maximum speed of the vehicle. When the speed limiter is turned on and the vehicle is started with a Teen Driver key, the DIC displays a message that the top speed is limited.
On certain vehicles, when the Speed Limiter is turned ON, the vehicle's maximum acceleration will be limited. The DIC will display a message that the acceleration is limited.
Teen Driver Speed Warning : Displays a warning in the DIC when exceeding a selectable speed. Turn the speed warning on or off and choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle. On some infotainment systems, touch Set Teen Driver Speed Warning to set the warning speed.
Set Teen Driver Speed Warning : Choose the desired speed warning level. The speed warning does not limit the speed of the vehicle.
When Teen Driver is Active:
. If equipped, the radio will mute when the driver seat belt, and in some vehicles the front passenger seat belt, is not buckled. The audio from any device paired to the vehicle will also be muted.
. An object placed on the front passenger seat, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, could cause the passenger sensing system to falsely sense an unbuckled
front passenger and mute the radio. If this happens, remove the object from the seat.
. Some safety systems, such as Automatic Emergency Braking, if equipped, cannot be turned off.
. The gap setting for Adaptive Cruise Control and alert timing for Forward Collision Alert, if equipped, cannot be changed.
. When trying to change a safety feature that is not configurable in Teen Driver, the feature may be grayed out or removed from the infotainment menu, or the DIC will display a message indicating that Teen Driver is active and the action is not available.
. Super Cruise or Ultra Cruise, if equipped, is not available.
. Do not tow a trailer if equipped with Automatic Emergency Braking.
Report Card
The vehicle owner must secure the driver's consent to record certain vehicle data when the vehicle is driven with a registered Teen Driver key. There is one Report Card per
vehicle. Data is only recorded when a registered Teen Driver key is used to operate the vehicle.
The Report Card data is collected from the time Teen Driver is activated or the last time the Report Card was reset. The following items may be recorded:
. Distance Driven the total distance driven.
. Maximum Speed the maximum vehicle speed detected.
. Overspeed Warnings the number of times the speed warning setting was exceeded.
. Wide Open Throttle the number of times the accelerator pedal was pressed nearly all the way down.
. Forward Collision Alerts (if equipped) the number of times the driver was notified when approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly and at potential risk for a crash.
. Forward Automatic Braking, also called Automatic Emergency Braking (if equipped) the number of times the vehicle detected that a forward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.
. Reverse Automatic Braking (if equipped) the number of times the vehicle detected that a rearward collision was imminent and applied the brakes.
. Traction Control the number of times the Traction Control System activated to reduce wheel spin or loss of traction.
. Stability Control the number of events which required the use of electronic stability control.
. Antilock Braking System Active The number of Antilock Brake System activations.
. Tailgating Alerts (if equipped) the number of times the driver was alerted for following a vehicle ahead too closely.
Report Card Data
Cumulative Data is saved for all trips until the Report Card is reset or until the maximum count is exceeded. If the maximum count is exceeded for a Report Card line item, that item will no longer be updated in the Report Card until it is reset. Each item will report a maximum of 1,000 counts. The distance driven will report a maximum of 64,374 km (40,000 mi).
To delete Report Card data, do one of the following:
Infotainment System 173
. From the Report Card display, touch Reset.
. Touch Clear PIN and All Teen Driver Keys from the Teen Driver menu. This will also unregister any Teen Driver keys and delete the PIN.
Forgotten PIN See your dealer to reset the PIN.
Trademarks and License Agreements
FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
"Made for iPhone," means that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPhone, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
174 Infotainment System
standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPhone may affect wireless performance. iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Trial length and service availability may vary by model, model year or trim. Service will automatically stop at the end of your trial subscription period unless you decide to continue service. If you do not wish to enjoy your trial, you can cancel by calling the number below. All SiriusXM services require a subscription, each sold separately by SiriusXM after the trial period. Service subject to the applicable SiriusXM Customer Agreement and Privacy Policy, visit www.siriusxm.com (USA) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) to see complete terms and how to cancel which includes calling 1-866-635-2349 (USA) or 1-888-539-7474 (Canada). Some services and features are subject to device capabilities and location availability. Content
varies by SiriusXM subscription package. All fees, content and features are subject to change.
SiriusXM with 360L: Some features, including streaming content and listening recommendations, require an active OnStar Connected Access plan and may vary by vehicle model. Content varies by SiriusXM subscription plan. GM connected vehicle services vary by vehicle model and require active service plan, working electrical system, cell reception and GPS signal. See onstar.com for details and limitations.
SiriusXM, Pandora, Stitcher and all related logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its respective subsidiaries.
SiriusXM satellite service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (and Puerto Rico with limited availability) and Canada.
In Canada: Some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of SiriusXM.
Explicit Language Notice: Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an "XL" after the channel name. Family-friendly packages are available by contacting SiriusXM:
. USA Customers -- See www.siriusxm.com or call 1-888-601-6296.
. Canada Customers -- See www.siriusxm.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content.
General Requirements:
1. A License Agreement from SiriusXM is required for any product that incorporates SiriusXM Technology and/or for use of any of the SiriusXM marks to be manufactured, distributed, or marketed in the SiriusXM Service Area.
2. For products to be distributed, marketed, and/or sold in Canada, a separate agreement is required with Sirius XM Canada Inc.
TouchSense Technology and TouchSense System 1000 Series Licensed from Immersion Corporation. TouchSense System 1000 is protected under one or more of the U.S. Patents at the following address www.immersion.com/patent-marking.html and other patents pending.
Bose
Bose AudioPilot and Bose Centerpoint surround are registered trademarks of Bose Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Java
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
MPEG4AVC (H.264)
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTPS:// WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD ("VC-1 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO
Infotainment System 175
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTPS:// WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
MPEG4Visual
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES.
MP3
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
WMV/WMA
This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and under a license from Microsoft Licensing, GP. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft Corporation and/or Microsoft Licensing, GP as applicable.
176 Climate Controls
Climate Controls
Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Air Vents Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter . . . . . 180 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
Base Climate Controls
1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls
2. Heated Seat Controls (If Equipped) 3. Air Delivery Mode Controls 4. ON/OFF (Power) 5. Heat 6. A/C (Air Conditioning) 7. Recirculation 8. Fan Control
9. Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped) or Heated Mirrors (If Equipped)
10. MAX Defrost
11. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
Uplevel Climate Controls
1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Settings
2. ON/OFF
3. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
4. Fan Control
5. MAX Defrost
6. Rear Window Defogger/Heated Outside Mirrors
Front Climate Control Display
1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Settings
2. Driver and Passenger Heated and Ventilated Seat Launch Buttons
3. A/C (Air Conditioning)/Heat Selection
Climate Controls 177
4. Recirculation
5. Fan Control
6. Air Delivery Mode Controls
7. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature)
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.
When AUTO is selected, all four functions operate automatically. Each function can also be manually set and the selected setting is displayed. Functions not manually set will continue to be automatically controlled, even if the AUTO indicator is not lit. When enabled, the climate controls will remain in auto mode through power cycles.
For automatic operation:
1. Touch AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the system time to stabilize. Adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort.
To improve efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather.
178 Climate Controls
Manual Operation
9 : Press up or down to increase or
decrease fan speed. Toggle all the way down to turn the fan off. When off is selected, a small amount of air may still come out of the outlets depending on the vehicle's speed. If any buttons are pressed, the climate control system will turn on and operate at the current setting.
Touch AUTO to return to automatic operation.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control : The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and passenger.
SYNC : Touch to link the passenger temperature setting to the driver setting.
Air Delivery Mode Control : Touch to change the direction of the airflow. Any
combination of z, Y, or [ can be
selected.
Changing the mode cancels the automatic operation and the system goes into manual mode. Touch AUTO to return to automatic operation.
z : Air is directed to the windshield,
outboard A/C outlets, and side window outlets.
Y : Air is directed to the A/C outlets.
[ : Air is directed to the floor outlets,
with some air directed to the windshield, outboard A/C outlets, and side window outlets.
0 5 MAX : Air is directed to the
windshield and the fan runs at a higher speed if not already above a medium fan speed. This mode overrides the previous mode selected and clears fog or frost from the windshield quickly. When the control is pressed again, the system returns to the previous mode setting and fan speed.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
@ : Touch to turn on recirculation. An
indicator light comes on. Air is recirculated to quickly cool the interior of the vehicle. It can also be used to help reduce outside air and odors that enter the vehicle.
Avoid using recirculation for long periods of time in cold or damp conditions. Using recirculation in cold or damp conditions can result in window fogging.
A/C : Press to turn the air conditioning on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is enabled. If the fan is turned off, the air conditioner will not run.
Heat : Press to turn the heater on or off. The air conditioning compressor is used to provide heat to the cabin and may run when heat is enabled.
Rear Window Defogger
1 REAR : If equipped, press to turn the
rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show that the rear window defogger is on.
The rear window defogger only works when the vehicle is on. The defogger turns off if the vehicle is turned off.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors, they turn on when the rear window defogger button is on and help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors 0 36.
Caution
Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects.
Remote Start Climate Control Operation : If equipped with remote start, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. If equipped with heated or ventilated seats or a heated steering wheel, these features may come on during a remote start. See Remote Vehicle Start 0 14, Heated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 48, and Heated Steering Wheel 0 99.
Sensors
The solar sensor, on top of the instrument panel near the windshield, monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort. Do not cover the sensor; otherwise the automatic climate control system may not work properly.
Climate Controls 179
Afterblow Feature
If equipped, under certain conditions, the fan may stay on or may turn on and off several times after you turn off and lock the vehicle. This is normal.
ECO Climate
When ECO Climate is on, airflow to unoccupied rear seats will be reduced for energy efficiency. To turn ECO Climate off or on, select Settings > Vehicle > Climate and Air Quality > ECO Climate.
Air Vents
Use the sliding knobs on the center and side air vents to change the direction of the airflow.
Air vents blow warm air on the side windows in cold weather. If Floor, Defog, or Defrost modes are selected, a small amount of air will come from the vents closest to the window.
To close the front A/C vents, move the sliding knobs to the full down position for vertical slats or away from you for horizontal slats.
To close the rear A/C vents, move the sliding knobs to the full inboard position.
180 Climate Controls
Operation Tips . Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from
air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block airflow. . Clear snow off the hood to improve visibility and help decrease moisture drawn into the vehicle. . Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more effectively. . Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect system performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. . Do not attach any devices to the air vent slats. Doing so restricts airflow and may cause damage to the air vents.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter reduces the dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389. To find out what type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 392.
1. Open the lower glove box door completely.
2. Push the dampener arm to the left until it releases the glove box.
3. Press the sides of the glove box door inward and rotate the door downward to remove.
4. Pull lever on left side of the filter door and slide left, then remove the door. Remove the old filter.
5. Install the new air filter. 6. Reinstall the filter door. 7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the
glove box. See your dealer if additional assistance is needed.
Service
All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation.
During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.
The air conditioning system requires periodic maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389.
Climate Controls 181
182 Driving and Operating
Driving and Operating
Driving Information Driving for Better Energy Efficiency . . . . 183 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Impaired Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . 195
Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Power Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electric Drive Unit Electric Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 One-Pedal Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Drive Systems Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Brakes Electric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 203 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Ride Control Systems Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Four-Wheel Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Cruise Control Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) . . . . 216 Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Advanced Driver Assistance Systems Advanced Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Surround Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Automatic Parking Assist (APA) . . . . . . . . 254 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . 257 Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . . . . . 260 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA) . . . . . 269 Traffic Sign Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Driver Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Surround Vision Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Charging When to Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Plug-In Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Delayed Charging Override . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Charging Status Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Charge Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Utility Interruption of Charging . . . . . . . . 291 Electrical Requirements for Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Trailer Towing General Towing Information . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Trailering App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 320 Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Driving Information
Driving for Better Energy Efficiency
Use the following tips to help maximize energy efficiency and driving range.
The Energy Usage card available on the Driver Information Center (DIC) estimates the influence of the main factors impacting vehicle range. It displays how energy is being used for the current drive as percentages of overall vehicle energy use. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133 and Vehicle Status 0 134.
Acceleration/Braking/Coasting
Avoid rapid accelerations and decelerations.
Driving range is maximized at 89 km/h (55 mph) and less.
Use cruise control when appropriate.
Using the steering wheel paddle during deceleration recovers more energy. See Regenerative Braking 0 205.
Driving and Operating 183
Terrain and Vehicle Speed
Plan ahead for decelerations and coast whenever possible. Do not rush to traffic signals. Do not shift to N (Neutral) to coast.
Higher speeds and grade changes use more energy and can significantly reduce driving range.
Climate Setting
Using the heat and air conditioning systems decreases the energy available for electric driving.
Optimal energy efficiency is achieved when the heat, air conditioning, and fan are turned off.
Use the heated seat features instead of climate control system. Heating the seat uses less energy than heating and cooling the interior.
Use remote start to heat or cool the interior when the vehicle is plugged in to maximize the driving range by using electricity from the electrical outlet.
In hot weather, avoid parking in direct sunlight or use sunshades inside the vehicle.
184 Driving and Operating
Keep the inside of the windows clean to reduce fogging. Turn off the front defroster and rear defogger when they are not needed.
Avoid driving with the windows open at highway speeds.
Use the battery gauge on the instrument cluster to view the effect of climate control settings on your estimated driving range. See Battery Gauge (High Voltage) 0 112.
Outside Temperature
In cold weather conditions, it is best to plug in the vehicle overnight, then remote start the vehicle.
Allow the vehicle to warm up for 20 minutes before driving.
If possible, use a level 2 (240 volt) high power charge station for best results. This allows the interior of the vehicle and high voltage battery to warm to the optimal temperature.
In colder temperatures, while these efficiency tips will help, the driving range will be lower due to higher energy usage including energy spent heating the cabin.
Vehicle Charging/Maintenance
Charging
Keep the vehicle plugged in, even when fully charged, to maintain the battery temperature ready for the next drive. This is important when outside temperatures are extremely hot or cold.
Maintenance
Always keep the tires properly inflated and aligned.
Avoid unnecessary use of electrical accessories. Power used for functions other than propelling the vehicle will reduce driving range.
Cargo Weight
The weight of excess cargo in the vehicle affects efficiency and driving range. Avoid carrying more than is needed.
Using a rooftop carrier will reduce efficiency due to additional weight and drag.
Distracted Driving
Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from
the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area.
To avoid distracted driving, keep your eyes on the road, keep your hands on the steering wheel, and focus your attention on driving.
. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.
. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.
. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.
. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.
. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.
. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a mobile phone.
{ Warning
Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving.
Your vehicle may be equipped with features that can help with hands-free use of the infotainment system, navigation system, and your mobile phone. For more information, see Introduction 0 149 in the Infotainment section, Voice Recognition 0 161, Bluetooth (Pairing and Using a Phone) 0 164 or Bluetooth (Overview) 0 163, and Steering Wheel Controls 0 151.
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means to always expect the unexpected. The first step in driving defensively is to wear a seat belt. See Seat Belts 0 52.
. Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they may do and be ready.
. Allow enough following distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
. Focus on the task of driving.
Impaired Driving
Death and injury associated with impaired driving is a global tragedy.
{ Warning
Drinking alcohol or taking drugs and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol or drugs. You can have a serious -- or even fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking or taking drugs.
Do not drive while under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or ride with a driver who has been drinking or is impaired by
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 185
Warning (Continued)
drugs. Find alternate transportation home; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will remain sober.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include: . Keep enough distance between you and
the vehicle in front of you. . Avoid needless heavy braking. . Keep pace with traffic.
186 Driving and Operating
If a brake fault occurs, the brakes may lose power assist. More effort will be required to stop the vehicle and it may take longer to stop.
If the vehicle loses propulsion power while driving, the brake boost system, which is powered by the 12-volt vehicle battery, will maintain the power assist for as long as the battery has sufficient voltage. Steer the vehicle out of the roadway and stop as soon as it is safe to do so. See Electric Brake Boost 0 203.
Steering
Caution
To avoid damage to the steering system, do not drive over curbs, parking barriers, or similar objects at speeds greater than 3 km/h (1 mph). Use care when driving over other objects such as lane dividers and speed bumps. Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Electric Power Steering
The vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering system, which reduces the amount of effort needed to steer the vehicle. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required.
If the power steering system overheats, there will be a temporary reduced level of steering assist until the system cools down. For example, the system can overheat if the steering wheel is held firmly for an extended amount of time at the end of its range of travel. The energy from the additional power assist becomes heat.
Normal operation of the power steering system will resume when the system cools down.
If the power steering system malfunctions, the power steering system will have no steering assist and greater steering effort may be required. See your dealer to resolve the problem.
Curve Tips
. Reduce speed before entering a curve. . Maintain a reasonable steady speed
through the curve.
. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
. There are some situations when steering around a hazard may be more effective than braking.
. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.
. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips: 1. Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement. 2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Loss of Control
Skidding
There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:
. Braking Skid -- wheels are not rolling. . Steering or Cornering Skid -- too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
. Acceleration Skid -- too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Antilock brakes help to avoid only the braking skid.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not exceeding those conditions. But skids are always possible.
If the vehicle starts to skid, follow these suggestions:
. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out, but if it skids again from oversteer, be ready to correct another skid if it occurs.
. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance may be longer and vehicle
Driving and Operating 187
control may be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface -- and slow down when you have any doubt. . Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
Off-Road Driving
{ Warning
This vehicle is neither rated nor equipped for full off-road use. Attempting to drive in off-road conditions may be unsafe and can result in vehicle damage or personal injury.
This vehicle may be used for light recreational driving away from paved roads. It should not be used in off-road conditions.
The electric four-wheel drive (e4WD) system on this vehicle is for on-road use and is not the same as a traditional 4x4 system. See Four-Wheel Drive 0 202.
188 Driving and Operating
This vehicle is equipped with all-season tires. Vehicles that are not equipped with all-terrain or On-Off Road (OOR) tires must not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface.
Preparing to Drive Away from Paved Roads
Charge the vehicle and check inflation pressure in all tires, including the spare, if equipped.
Select Off Road mode on the Driver Mode Control. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Driving Guidelines
Use only established trails, roads, and areas that are reserved for public off-road recreational driving. Obey all posted regulations. Do not damage shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses, or disturb wildlife.
Do not drive up or down off-road inclines in this vehicle. Do not drive through mud, loose sand, packed snow, or deep water. This vehicle is not equipped to handle these conditions.
After Driving Away from Paved Roads
Be sure to switch out of Off Road mode to return to normal driving. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Driving on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water.
{ Warning
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen when the road is wet and you are driving fast. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include: . Allow extra following distance. . Pass with caution. . Keep windshield wiping equipment in
good shape, and keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. . Ensure the tires are maintained and have proper tread depth. See Tires 0 345.
. Turn off any cruise control, if equipped. See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216 or Super Cruise 0 227.
. Turn off One-Pedal Driving mode. See One-Pedal Driving 0 201.
. Turn on the Traction Control System (TCS) and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ Warning
Do not charge your vehicle's battery above an 80% charge if you are going to drive down long, steep grades such as mountain passes. This provides room in the battery for regenerative braking to supplement your conventional brakes during the descent. This is especially important when towing a trailer, which puts additional stress on your vehicle's braking system.
If the battery becomes full, regenerative braking will be limited or unavailable. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down the vehicle and could
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
become too hot. Hot brakes may not be able to slow the vehicle enough to maintain speed and control. To help avoid the risk of a crash, limit the battery's charge and, if you experience brake fade or receive a brake warning, stop the vehicle and allow the brakes to cool.
See "Charge Now" under Charging 0 125 for information on setting charge limits.
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Be sure to:
. Use regenerative braking to help slow the vehicle or maintain speed by keeping the vehicle in gear and limiting the initial battery charge to 80% or less. See Regenerative Braking 0 205.
. When braking is necessary, use frequent, light taps of the brake pedal. This maximizes regenerative braking and minimizes the load on the vehicle brake system.
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
Driving and Operating 189
. Check all fluid levels, brakes, tires, and cooling system.
. Drive at speeds that keep the vehicle in its own lane. Do not swing wide or cross the center line.
. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (e.g., stalled car, crash).
. Pay attention to special road signs (e.g., falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Caution
To avoid damage to the wheels and brake components, always clear snow and ice from inside the wheels and underneath the vehicle before driving.
Snow or ice between the tires and the road creates less traction or grip, so drive carefully. Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated.
190 Driving and Operating
For Slippery Road Driving:
. Turn off cruise control.
. If enabled, turn off One-Pedal Driving. See One-Pedal Driving 0 201.
. If turned off, turn on the Traction Control System (TCS) and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 206.
. Select the Snow/Ice driver mode. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
. Accelerate gently. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick.
. Allow greater following distance and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice.
. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops, but the brakes should be applied sooner than when on dry pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) 0 203.
. Avoid using the Regen on Demand paddle. See Regenerative Braking 0 205.
Blizzard Conditions
If you become stranded or cannot continue driving due to winter storm conditions, stop the vehicle in a safe place and signal for help. If possible, use Roadside Assistance Program 0 399. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If you stay in your vehicle while waiting, signal for help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe by turning on the hazard warning flashers and tying a red cloth to an outside mirror.
To conserve battery energy while waiting for help, run the vehicle for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the vehicle off and partially close the window. Moving about to keep warm also helps. For additional tips to help conserve battery energy in cold weather, see Driving for Better Energy Efficiency 0 183.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See "Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out" later in this section.
The Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control can often help to free a stuck vehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206. If TCS/ESC cannot free the vehicle, see "Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out" following.
{ Warning
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle, see Tire Chains 0 361.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn the TCS off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent battery wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not
get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out using recovery hooks if equipped.
Recovery Hooks
If equipped, there are recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle. Use them if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow to pull the vehicle back to the road and continue driving.
{ Warning
Never pull on recovery hooks from the side. The hooks could break and you and others could be injured. When using recovery hooks, always pull the vehicle from the front.
Caution
Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Load Limits
It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle may show how much weight it was designed to carry: the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
Driving and Operating 191
{ Warning
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also reduce stopping performance, damage the tires, and shorten the life of the vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Label Example
192 Driving and Operating
A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires 0 345 and Tire Pressure 0 350.
There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/ Tire label. It may show the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See "Certification/Tire Label" later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing 0 295 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
If aftermarket accessories are installed on the vehicle, for example a rooftop carrier, be sure to add the weight of all installed accessories to the combined weight of luggage and cargo.
Driving and Operating 193
Example 1
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
Then subtract Accessory Weight, for example a rooftop cargo box = 15.8 kg (35 lb) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lb) × 2 = 136 kg (300 lb) 3. Remaining available capacity for Cargo Weight = 301.2 kg (665 lb)
Example 2
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
Then subtract Accessory Weight, for example a rooftop cargo box = 18.1 kg (40 lb) 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 68 kg (150 lb) × 5 = 340 kg (750 lb) 3. Remaining available capacity for Cargo Weight = 94.9 kg (210 lb)
Example 3
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 91 kg (200 lb) × 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)
3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lb)
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, accessories, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight.
194 Driving and Operating Certification/Tire Label
Label Example A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). The label may show the size of the vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of the vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, and cargo. The Certification/Tire label also may show the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To determine the actual loads on the front and rear axles, weigh the vehicle at a weigh station. Your dealer can help with this. Be sure to spread the load equally on both sides of the centerline.
The Certification/Tire label also contains important information about the Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
{ Warning
In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured.
Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change the weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help load the vehicle the right way.
{ Warning
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
. Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.
. When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
. Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to.
There is also important loading information for off-road driving in this manual. See "Loading the Vehicle for Off-Road Driving" under Off-Road Driving 0 187.
Add-On Equipment
When carrying removable items, a limit on how many people carried inside the vehicle may be necessary. Be sure to weigh the vehicle before buying and installing the new equipment.
Caution
Overloading the vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to carry a slide-in camper.
Caution
Adding a slide-in camper or similar equipment to the vehicle can damage it, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not install a slide-in camper or similar equipment on the vehicle.
Starting and Operating
New Vehicle Break-In
Caution
Avoid making hard stops for the first 322 km (200 mi). During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time you get new brake linings. Following break-in, vehicle speed and load can be gradually increased.
Driving and Operating 195
Power Modes
Powering On
This vehicle is equipped with Hands-Free Start, which automatically starts the vehicle when you enter with a remote key, press the brake, or close the driver door.
If a remote key was left in the vehicle after the last power cycle, closing the driver door will not turn on the vehicle. The brake pedal must be pressed to turn the vehicle on. Driver Information Center (DIC) messages will display explaining how to turn on the vehicle.
If the remote key is not in the vehicle or something is interfering with the remote key, a message displays in the DIC.
If the vehicle does not turn on due to a low remote key battery, the vehicle can still be driven. See Remote Key Operation 0 9.
196 Driving and Operating
A vehicle ready light displays on the instrument cluster when the vehicle is ready to be driven. This could take up to 15 seconds at extremely cold temperatures.
The instrument cluster also displays an active battery gauge when the vehicle is ready to be driven.
A chime will sound if the driver door is opened while the vehicle is on.
Powering Off
When the drive cycle has been completed and the vehicle is shifted to P (Park), the vehicle will turn off when a driver exit is detected. The vehicle can also be turned off
by pressing f on the infotainment display.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active until the driver door is opened.
If the vehicle has not been shifted out of P (Park), it will not turn off based on driver exit detection and will need to be turned off
through f or waiting for the automatic
shutdown timeout.
If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency:
1. Brake using firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop, shift to P (Park), and turn the vehicle off.
4. Set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
{ Warning
Turning off the vehicle while moving may disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the propulsion system off in an emergency.
If a drive mode is entered where f is
present while moving, the vehicle can be
shut off while driving. Press f and follow
the instructions displayed in the DIC to confirm that vehicle off mode is desired.
Climate control functions, such as defrost, heating, and air conditioning are only available while the vehicle is powered on. Turning the vehicle off will turn off all climate controls.
If a collision is detected an additional emergency vehicle off display will be shown and can be pressed to turn the vehicle off.
Keeping Vehicle On After Driver Exit
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the P (Park) button is not pressed with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the propulsion system is running. If you have left the propulsion system running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and press the P (Park) button.
Press g on the infotainment display to
keep the vehicle on after a driver exit is
detected. g can only be activated while
the vehicle is in P (Park). The vehicle will remain on for a set time displayed in a
notification upon activation. g can be
reselected to restart the time interval.
Before exiting the vehicle, press the P (Park) button and the Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
switch, then activate g. See Shifting Into
Park 0 197.
Using g will reduce the charge level of
the high voltage battery. Ensure your battery has sufficient charge before
activating g. See Battery Gauge (High
Voltage) 0 112.
g should only be used when the vehicle
is attended. A horn chirp will sound if the vehicle turns off during the set time interval.
Service Mode
This mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the service vehicle soon light as may be required for inspection or maintenance purposes.
To place the vehicle in Service Mode:
1. Ensure the vehicle is off, the driver door is open, and the brake pedal is not applied.
2. Press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds, keeping the accelerator pressed on the third time.
The instrument cluster and infotainment systems will operate normally, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The propulsion system will not be active in Service Mode. Press the brake pedal to turn
the vehicle on or press f on the
infotainment display to turn the vehicle off.
Caution
Placing the vehicle in Service Mode will use the 12-volt battery. Do not use Service Mode for an extended period, or the vehicle may not start.
Shifting Into Park
To shift into P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
Driving and Operating 197
2. Press the P (Park) switch at the end of the shift lever. See Electric Drive Unit 0 198.
3. The P indicator on the shift lever will turn red when the vehicle is in P (Park).
If the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) on a hill, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) may apply automatically. The driver may not be able to release the EPB using the EPB switch. It should automatically release when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle with the Propulsion System On
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P (Park) with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the propulsion system is on. If you have left the propulsion system on, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and press the P (Park) button. See Shifting Into Park 0 197.
198 Driving and Operating
If the vehicle must be left with the propulsion system on, be sure that the vehicle is in P (Park) with the EPB set, before leaving the vehicle. After pressing the P (Park) button, hold down the regular brake pedal. If you cannot see the P (Park) indicator in the instrument cluster, it means that the vehicle has not shifted to P (Park).
Shifting out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electric drive unit. To shift out of P (Park) the vehicle must be on, the brake pedal applied, and the charge cord unplugged.
Parking the vehicle in extreme cold for several days without the charge cord connected may cause the vehicle not to start. Plug the vehicle in to allow the high voltage battery to be warmed sufficiently.
To shift out of P (Park):
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Verify that the vehicle is unplugged and the vehicle ready light is on.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
The P indicator will turn white and the gear indicator on the shift lever will turn red when the vehicle is no longer in P (Park).
If the vehicle cannot shift from P (Park), a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may be displayed. Check that the vehicle is on, the vehicle ready light is on, and the brake pedal is applied when you are attempting to shift out of P (Park). If all of these are met but the vehicle will not shift out of P (Park), see your dealer for service.
If equipped, the Buckle to Drive feature may prevent shifting from P (Park). See Buckle To Drive 0 53.
Electric Drive Unit
The vehicle uses an electric drive unit. The shift pattern is displayed on the front of the shift lever. The selected gear position will illuminate red on the shift lever, while all others will be displayed in white. If the shift is not immediate, as in very cold conditions, the indicator on the shift switch may blink until it is fully engaged.
P:
If the vehicle is on, the vehicle can be shifted into P (Park).
If f is pressed while at a relatively high
speed, instructions will display on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to confirm that vehicle off mode is desired. Once confirmed, the vehicle will turn off and automatically shift to N (Neutral). When the vehicle is stopped, P (Park) can be selected.
{ Warning
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the P (Park) button is not pressed with the parking brake set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the propulsion system is running. If you have left the propulsion system running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and press the P (Park) button.
The vehicle will not shift into P (Park) if it is moving too fast. Stop the vehicle and shift into P (Park).
To shift in and out of P (Park), see Shifting Into Park 0 197 and Shifting out of Park 0 198.
Service Shift Lever Message
If the message SERVICE SHIFTER SEE OWNER'S MANUAL appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC), the shifter needs service. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible. If the vehicle is automatically
Driving and Operating 199
shifting into P (Park), check to see if the P (Park) button is stuck. To operate the vehicle, hold the shift lever in the desired gear, R (Reverse) or D (Drive), until vehicle speeds exceed 16 km/h (10 mph), then release the shift lever.
R : Use this gear to back up.
If the vehicle is shifted from either R (Reverse) to D (Drive) or D (Drive) to R (Reverse) while the speed is too high, the vehicle may shift to N (Neutral). Reduce the vehicle speed and try the shift again.
To shift into R (Reverse):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. From the center position, move the shift lever rearward toward you, and then up. R is illuminated in red.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
To shift out of R (Reverse):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift to the desired gear.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
200 Driving and Operating
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the electric drive unit. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 190.
N : In this position, the propulsion system is inactive. If the vehicle is moving and turned off, restart the propulsion system in N (Neutral) only.
Caution
The vehicle is not designed to stay in N (Neutral) for extended periods of time. It will automatically shift into P (Park).
To shift into N (Neutral):
1. Move the shift lever rearward toward the driver. . If the vehicle is in P (Park), apply the brake pedal while moving the shift lever rearward. . The N indicator will illuminate red.
2. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
To shift out of N (Neutral):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Hold the brake pedal down
3. Shift into the desired gear.
If the brake pedal is not applied, the vehicle may remain in N (Neutral).
Car Wash Mode
This vehicle includes a Car Wash Mode that allows the vehicle to remain in N (Neutral) for use in automatic car washes.
The vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle is disabled and needs to be towed, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 377.
Caution The vehicle is not designed to stay in N (Neutral) for extended periods of time. It will automatically shift into P (Park).
Car Wash Mode (Vehicle Off) Driver In Vehicle
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the vehicle off and occupied: 1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash. 2. Apply the brake pedal. 3. Shift to N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the vehicle and release the brake pedal.
5. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 24.
6. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
Car Wash Mode (Vehicle Off) Driver Out of Vehicle
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the vehicle off and unoccupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Open the door.
4. Shift to N (Neutral).
5. Turn off the vehicle and release the brake pedal.
6. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 25.
7. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
8. The vehicle may automatically shift into P (Park) upon reentry.
Car Wash Mode (Vehicle On) Driver In Vehicle
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the vehicle on and occupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Shift to N (Neutral).
4. Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
Car Wash Mode (Vehicle On) Driver Out of Vehicle
To place the vehicle in N (Neutral) with the vehicle on and unoccupied:
1. Drive to the entrance of the car wash.
2. Apply the brake pedal.
3. Open the door.
4. Shift to N (Neutral), then release the brake pedal.
5. The indicator should continue to show N. If it does not, repeat Steps 24.
6. Exit the vehicle and close the door. The vehicle is now ready for the car wash.
7. The vehicle may automatically shift into P (Park) upon reentry.
D : This position is for normal driving. If more power is needed for passing, press the accelerator pedal down.
To shift into D (Drive):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. From the center position, move the shift lever rearward toward you and then down. . If the vehicle is in P (Park), press the brake pedal while moving the shift lever. . D will illuminate red.
3. After releasing the shift lever, it will return to the center position.
To shift out of D (Drive):
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shift to the desired gear.
Caution
Spinning the tires excessively may damage the electric drive unit. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires.
When stopping on a steep hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
When shifting to P (Park) on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle then shift to P (Park).
Driving and Operating 201
One-Pedal Driving
One-Pedal Driving allows the use of the accelerator pedal to control the deceleration of the vehicle to a complete stop. Completely releasing the accelerator pedal will result in aggressive deceleration. Partially lifting off the accelerator pedal allows the deceleration of the vehicle to be adjusted as desired.
Use the brake pedal if emergency braking is required.
To view and configure One-Pedal Driving, from the infotainment display home screen, select Controls > Drive & Park > One-Pedal Driving.
Select Off to disable One-Pedal Driving for traditional two-pedal driving, similar to a gasoline vehicle.
Select Normal to enable One-Pedal Driving where a moderate level of braking is applied when the accelerator pedal is released while driving.
Select High to enable One-Pedal Driving where a strong level of braking is applied when the accelerator pedal is released while driving.
202 Driving and Operating
When enabled, One-Pedal Driving applies in D (Drive). The vehicle will remain in One-Pedal Driving mode, including through vehicle off and on power cycles, until manually disabled by the driver. Press the accelerator pedal to the desired speed. The brake lamps will come on during substantial deceleration and when the vehicle is stopped.
If One-Pedal Driving is turned off while stopped, the vehicle will stay stopped. Press the brake pedal or accelerator pedal to return to two-pedal driving.
For faster access, One-Pedal Driving can be toggled in the Drive Mode app.
Touch l to toggle One-Pedal Driving on or
off. When turned on, One-Pedal Driving returns to the previously selected level. To change the level, press the Settings link in the pop-up box to go to the full One-Pedal Driving selection.
When possible, One-Pedal Driving uses regenerative braking to slow the vehicle for energy efficiency. Friction brakes may be used in some cases when regenerative braking is reduced. Friction brakes will be
used to hold the vehicle after coming to a stop, and a noise may be noticed when the brakes apply.
When driving on slippery roads, it is recommended to turn off One-Pedal Driving for maximum vehicle stability. See Winter Driving 0 189.
One-Pedal Driving is a useful feature when towing a trailer, however, using the brake pedal may be required to slow down and hold the vehicle with large loads or steep hills. Trailer brake lights will be functional during substantial deceleration or when the vehicle is stopped. See Trailer Towing 0 295.
While using One-Pedal Driving, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) may apply in some circumstances. This can occur when:
. The driver exits the vehicle.
. The vehicle has remained stationary for five minutes.
To resume driving, press the accelerator pedal, and the EPB will automatically disengage.
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive
This vehicle is equipped with advanced electric four-wheel drive (e4WD). The e4WD system delivers power to all four wheels, and the system adjusts automatically to the driving conditions. The e4WD system continuously varies the drive power to the front and rear wheels to maximize driving efficiency and improve driving dynamics. Your vehicle has exceptional driving capability, but care must always be taken to adjust driving style to the traffic and road conditions.
Torque Vectoring
If equipped, the torque vectoring feature of e4WD enhances vehicle performance by focusing the vehicle torque to the optimal wheel(s).
The vehicle e4WD settings may be customized for the driver mode selected. See Driver Mode Control 0 207 for more information.
Brakes
Electric Brake Boost
Vehicles equipped with electric brake boost have hydraulic brake circuits that are electronically controlled when the brake pedal is applied during normal operation. The system performs routine tests and turns off within a few minutes after the vehicle is turned off. Noise may be heard during this time. If the brake pedal is pressed during the tests or when the electric brake boost system is off, a noticeable change in pedal force and travel may be felt. This is normal.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps prevent a braking skid and maintain steering while braking hard.
If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 0 119.
ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot on the brake pedal and does not always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle ahead, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly. Hearing and feeling ABS operate is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows steering and braking at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help even more than braking.
Driving and Operating 203 Electric Parking Brake
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB) can be applied when the vehicle is on or off. If there is not enough electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. To prevent draining the battery, avoid unnecessary repeated cycles of the EPB. The system has a red EPB status light and an amber service EPB warning light. See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 118 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light 0 118. There are also parking brake-related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages. Before leaving the vehicle, check the red EPB status light to ensure that the EPB is applied.
204 Driving and Operating
If a message displays on the DIC indicating the electric drive unit is unable to shift, the service EPB light is on, and the EPB light flashes at the same time, the system must be reset. Start the vehicle, apply the EPB, and then release it. The message and light should turn off. See Electric Parking Brake Light 0 118 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light 0 118.
EPB Apply
To apply the EPB:
1. Be sure the vehicle is at a complete stop.
2. Press the EPB switch.
The red EPB status light will flash and then stay on once the EPB is fully applied. If the red EPB status light flashes continuously, then the EPB is only partially applied or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will display. Release the EPB and try to apply it again. If the light does not come on, or keeps flashing, have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the red EPB light is flashing. See your dealer.
If the amber service EPB warning light is on, press the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red EPB status light remains on. If the amber service EPB warning light is on, see your dealer.
If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving, the vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is pressed. If the switch is pressed until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied.
The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system, or as required by other safety functions that utilize the EPB.
If the EPB fails to apply, block the rear wheels to prevent vehicle movement.
EPB Release
To release the EPB:
1. Turn the vehicle on.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Press the EPB switch.
The EPB is released when the red parking brake status light is off.
If the amber service EPB warning light is on, release the EPB by pressing and holding the EPB switch. Continue to hold the switch until the red parking brake status light is off. If either light stays on after release is attempted, see your dealer.
Caution
Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips 0 292.
Automatic EPB Release
The EPB automatically releases if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life.
Brake Assist
Brake Assist detects rapid brake pedal applications due to emergency braking situations and provides additional braking to activate the Antilock Brake System (ABS) if the brake pedal is not pushed hard enough to activate ABS normally. Minor noise, brake pedal pulsation, and/or pedal movement during this time may occur. Continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. Brake Assist disengages when the brake pedal is released.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
{ Warning
Do not rely on the HSA feature. HSA does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by this system. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
When the vehicle is stopped on a grade, Hill Start Assist (HSA) prevents the vehicle from rolling in an unintended direction during the transition from brake pedal release to accelerator pedal apply. The brakes release when the accelerator pedal is applied. If the accelerator pedal is not applied within a few minutes, the Electric Parking Brake will apply. The brakes may also release under other conditions. Do not rely on HSA to hold the vehicle.
HSA is available when the vehicle is facing uphill in a forward gear, or when facing downhill in R (Reverse). The vehicle must come to a complete stop on a grade for HSA to activate.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from the moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical energy. This energy is then stored back into the high voltage battery system, contributing to increased energy efficiency.
Regenerative power may be limited when the battery is near full charge or cold. See "Regenerative Power Limited" under Power Indicator Gauge 0 113. Regenerative braking supplements your vehicle's conventional brakes, especially when going downhill. See Hill and Mountain Roads 0 189.
{ Warning
Do not charge your vehicle's battery above an 80% charge if you are going to drive down long, steep grades such as mountain passes. This provides room in the battery for regenerative braking to supplement your conventional brakes
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 205
Warning (Continued)
during the descent. This is especially important when towing a trailer, which puts additional stress on your vehicle's braking system.
See "Charge Now" under Charging 0 125 for information on setting charge limits. See Hill and Mountain Roads 0 189 for important information about driving on grades.
The brake system uses regenerative braking, conventional hydraulic braking, or a combination of both as appropriate.
206 Driving and Operating Regen on Demand
If equipped, Regen on Demand allows increased deceleration by pressing and holding the steering wheel paddle. Regen on Demand works in D (Drive). The accelerator pedal can be used to manage deceleration while using Regen on Demand. See One-Pedal Driving 0 201. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop while the Regen on Demand paddle is held, the vehicle will not creep forward when the paddle is released. The accelerator pedal must be pressed to move the vehicle forward. If the vehicle is on a steep grade, the brake pedal must be used to hold the vehicle.
When available regenerative braking power is limited, the hydraulic brakes may be applied to make up the difference.
Cruise control will turn off and the brake lamps may come on when this feature is activated.
Avoid using Regen on Demand under slippery road conditions. Use the brake pedal as the primary braking device.
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control
System Operation
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These systems help limit wheel spin and assist the driver in maintaining control, especially on slippery road conditions.
TCS activates if it senses any of the drive wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, TCS applies the brakes to the spinning wheels and reduces vehicle power to limit wheel spin.
ESC activates when the vehicle senses a difference between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. ESC selectively applies braking pressure to one or more of the vehicle wheel brakes to assist the driver in keeping the vehicle on the intended path. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is also on automatically when the vehicle is started. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 308.
If cruise control is being used and traction control or ESC begins to limit wheel spin, cruise control will disengage. Cruise control may be turned back on when road conditions allow.
Both systems come on automatically when the vehicle is started and begins to move. The systems may be heard or felt while they are operating or while performing diagnostic checks. This is normal and does not mean there is a problem with the vehicle.
It is recommended to leave both systems on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 190 and "Turning the Systems Off and On" later in this section.
The indicator light for both systems is in the instrument cluster. This light: . Flashes when TCS is limiting wheel spin . Flashes when ESC is activated . Turns on and stay on when either system
is not working
See Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic Stability Control Light 0 120.
If either system fails to turn on or to activate, a message displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), and d comes on
and stays on to indicate that the system is inactive and is not assisting the driver in maintaining control. Adjust driving accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Turn the vehicle off and wait 15 seconds.
3. Start the vehicle.
4. Drive the vehicle.
If d comes on and stays on, see your
dealer as soon as possible.
Turning the Systems Off and On
Caution
Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle driveline could be damaged.
To turn Traction (TCS) on and off, in the controls app on the infotainment home screen, select Controls > DRIVE & PARK > Traction Control. To turn ESC on or off,
select T next to the Traction Control menu.
The following options appear: . Traction Control Off . Traction Control and ESC Off . Traction Control and ESC On
The traction off light i displays in the
instrument cluster when the traction control is turned off. When the traction control is
turned back on, the traction off light i
displayed in the instrument cluster will turn off. See Traction Off Light 0 120.
If TCS is actively limiting wheel spin when disabled, the system will not turn off until the wheels stop spinning.
Driving and Operating 207
To turn ESC off, select T next to the
Traction Control menu. Select the Traction Control and ESC Off option. The ESC off light
g will display in the instrument cluster. See
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light 0 121.
TCS cannot be on when ESC is off.
ESC will automatically turn on if the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h (35 mph) and cannot be turned off again until speed is reduced. Traction control will remain off.
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature and a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 0 308 or Hill Start Assist (HSA) 0 205.
Entering Teen Driver will automatically enable both TCS and ESC, and prevent these safety features from being turned off. See Teen Driver 0 171.
Adding accessories can affect the vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications 0 323.
Driver Mode Control
Driver Mode Control allows the driver to adjust the overall driving experience by selecting different modes. Driver Mode
208 Driving and Operating
Control has the following modes: Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, and a customizable mode: My mode. Driver mode availability and affected vehicle subsystems are dependent upon trim level, region, and optional features.
If the vehicle is in Tour mode, My mode, or Sport mode it will stay in that mode through future on/off cycles. If the vehicle is in Snow/Ice mode, it will return to Tour mode when the vehicle is restarted. When each mode is selected, a unique and persistent indicator is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Mode Activation
To activate each mode, open the Drive Mode App on the infotainment home screen. Activate each mode by selecting the mode icon.
Mode Descriptions
Normal Mode : Use for normal city and highway driving to provide a smooth ride. This setting provides balance between comfort and handling. There is no persistent indicator in the instrument cluster for this mode.
Off Road Mode : Use this mode for off-road recreational driving. Off Road mode should be used to improve driving at moderate speeds, on grass, gravel, dirt, unpaved roads, or snow-covered roads. The accelerator pedal is tuned for off road use. If equipped, this mode also modifies steering, suspension, active rear steer, e4WD, EVSE, ABS, ESC, and TCS Performance.
For more information on off-road driving, see Off-Road Driving 0 187.
Tow/Haul Mode : Use this mode when hauling heavy loads to provide increased performance and vehicle control. Tow/Haul mode adjusts the pedal map, steering, active rear steer, suspension, and TSC performance.
If equipped with a Work Truck, the Tow/ Haul mode may be operated through a
button on the center stack. Press _ to
activate Tow/Haul mode.
If the vehicle is turned off with Tow/Haul mode active and then restarted within four hours or less, Tow/Haul mode will remain active. Otherwise, the vehicle will start in Normal mode.
For more information on Tow/Haul mode, see Towing Equipment 0 299.
Wide Open Watts : Use this mode for short durations. It not intended for daily use. Wide Open Watts provides maximum propulsion. Engaging Wide Open Watts will not change the currently active drive mode but will provide additional propulsion torque for maximum acceleration.
Wide Open Watts will not function when the vehicle battery is low. Remaining in this mode will reduce the range of the vehicle.
Wide Open Watts adjusts the acceleration pedal map.
q My Mode : Use this mode to
personalize everyday driving. This mode allows the driver to configure the vehicle subsystem settings to their driving preferences. My mode remains active across on/off cycles.
Through the infotainment display, the following vehicle subsystems may be available for customization in this mode:
Acceleration Pedal : Relaxed, Normal, Sport
Steering Effort : Low, Normal, High
Suspension : Soft, Normal, Firm
Motor Sound : Off, Refined, Engaging
For a more detailed description of each selectable option, refer to "Drive Mode Customization."
Drive Mode Customization
The vehicle is equipped to modify the following settings based on vehicle content. Through the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Drive Mode Customization to personalize My mode. These settings will be retained over each on/off cycle, and do not have to be reset each time the vehicle is started.
Acceleration Pedal : Choose how responsive you want acceleration to feel. You can adjust the accelerator pedal to provide increased power.
Steering Effort : Choose how responsive you want the steering to feel. You can set the steering wheel to provide more feedback, which requires more steering effort.
Suspension : Choose how responsive you want the suspension to feel. You can make the suspension stiffer or more comfortable.
Motor Sound : Customize how your vehicle sounds when you are accelerating. Your electric motor remains quiet outside but the sound you hear inside changes as you drive faster or slower.
Four-Wheel Steering
This vehicle is equipped with four-wheel steering. This feature steers the vehicle with all four wheels, which reduces the vehicle turn diameter and improves maneuverability of the vehicle.
At slower speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in opposite directions. This helps the vehicle make tighter turns, such as during parking, cornering and turning into tight spaces. At higher speeds the front and rear wheels will turn in the same direction. This improves stability of the vehicle during lane changes and wide turns
When the vehicle is shut-off, the rear steering angle will automatically return to the forward position.
Four-wheel steering is not operational when Super Cruise is active. See Super Cruise 0 227.
Driving and Operating 209
Maximum vehicle speed may be limited if the four-wheel steering system becomes inoperable.
When towing a trailer the four-wheel steering provides enhanced stability allowing the trailer to follow the path of the tow vehicle more closely, especially during lane changes. See General Towing Information 0 292 for more information on towing a trailer.
Four-Wheel Steering Behavior at 0 MPH
The rear wheels may not steer to full travel when the vehicle is stationary. Additional travel may be achieved once the vehicle begins to move.
Care should be taken to ensure the vehicle path is clear of obstacles if the rear tires steer once the vehicle is moving.
Air Suspension
If equipped, the Air Suspension feature provides full time load leveling capability along with the benefit of adjusting ride height for increased convenience and capability.
210 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
To help avoid personal injury or death, make sure the area underneath the vehicle and inside the wheel wells is clear when lowering the vehicle.
{ Warning
To help avoid personal injury or death, always select the lowest ride height for the current driving conditions. Higher ride heights raise the vehicle's center of gravity, increasing the chance of a rollover during extreme maneuvers.
{ Warning
Heavy loads on the roof rack will make the vehicle's center of gravity higher, increasing the possibility of a rollover. To avoid losing control of the vehicle, always select the normal height setting and avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers when carrying cargo on the roof rack.
Changing Ride Height
Press either "Up" or "Down" Ride Height button to open the Ride Height menu. Select the desired ride height from the available options. After a brief pause, available selections finalize, and unavailable ride heights appear greyed out. Select the desired ride height option: 1. Entry/Exit 2. Normal 3. Increased 4. Maximum
Ride Height Descriptions
Entry/Exit
Entry/Exit height is the lowest height option. This ride height lowers the vehicle 50 mm (2 in) for easy entry and exit, and loading and unloading of cargo.
This ride height can be selected in the Ride Height menu at any vehicle speed, but will not lower until the vehicle slows to less than 12 km/h (7 mph).
The vehicle automatically raises to Normal height from Entry/Exit height when the vehicle speed exceeds 8 km/h (5 mph) after doors have been closed. If no door has been opened after lowering to Entry/Exit height, the vehicle will return to Normal height at 29 km/h (18 mph) to give the driver more flexibility when lowering to Entry/Exit height for passenger pick up and drop off.
The driver can enable Easy Exit Vehicle Height Mode to automatically lower to Entry/Exit Height when the vehicle is shifted to P (Park). From the infotainment screen select Settings > Vehicle > Ride Height > Easy Exit Vehicle Height. When the vehicle is higher than Normal height, is in Tow/Haul
mode, Off-Road mode, or senses a trailer is connected, Easy Exit Vehicle Height mode is disabled.
Aerodynamic
Aerodynamic height is 15 mm (0.5 in) lower than Normal height. The vehicle automatically lowers to Aerodynamic height when the vehicle speed exceeds 105 km/h (65 mph) to improve aerodynamics. This is not a selectable option on the Ride Height menu.
The vehicle will raise to Normal height when the vehicle speed slows to less than 48 km/h (30 mph).
Aerodynamic height is automatically disabled when a trailer is connected to the vehicle, Tow/Haul mode is active, or the vehicle is at Increased or Maximum height.
Normal
Normal height is the standard vehicle height used for everyday driving.
Increased
Increased height is 25 mm (1 in) higher than Normal height. This ride height raises the vehicle for off-road use. Increased height can be selected in the Ride Height Menu while the vehicle speed is less than 80 km/h
(50 mph). If the vehicle exceeds 80 km/h (50 mph), the vehicle will lower to Normal height.
Maximum
Maximum height is 50 mm (2 in) higher than Increased height. This ride height raises the vehicle for off-road use and maximum ground clearance. Maximum height can be selected in the Ride Height Menu while the vehicle speed is less than 48 km/h (30 mph). If the vehicle exceeds 48 km/h (30 mph) the vehicle will lower to Increased height. When the vehicle speeds up, the vehicle will lower to Increased height.
Low Rider
Caution
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, stay clear of obstacles such as speed bumps, curbs, and rough road/uneven terrain while in Low Rider height. Continue to use caution until vehicle returns to Normal ride height or higher.
Low Rider height is 80 mm (3 in) lower than Normal height for low speed driving or parking aesthetics.
Driving and Operating 211
Low Rider height must be initiated by the driver by holding the down ride height button for 3 to 10 seconds while vehicle speed is less than 40 km/h (25 mph).
Exiting Low Rider height can be done manually via the ride height buttons. If the vehicle speed exceeds 48 km/h (30 mph), the vehicle will automatically raise to Normal height.
Suspension Modes
The air suspension has two modes, Service mode and Alignment mode.
Service Mode
Service Mode will disable all air suspension operation including raising and lowering the vehicle and operation of the air compressor. This mode is useful when the vehicle is being towed on a flat bed or when any work under the vehicle is being performed.
To access Service mode from the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Suspension > Service Mode > On or Off.
212 Driving and Operating
Service Mode is recommended when the vehicle is put on a hoist or a floor jack is used to raise a corner. Service Mode automatically disables when the vehicle speed exceeds 32 km/h (20 mph).
Alignment Mode
Alignment Mode will optimize the vehicle height to provide the most accurate wheel alignment. This mode should be enabled once the vehicle is driven onto the alignment station.
To enable Alignment mode, ensure the vehicle is at Normal Height and shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
To access Alignment mode from the infotainment home screen, select Settings > Vehicle > Suspension > Alignment Mode > On or Off.
Alignment Mode automatically disables when the vehicle speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph).
Air Suspension Operation with Door(s) or Hood Open
The air suspension will temporarily suspend all height changes while the hood or any door is open.
System Over-Temperature
If the air suspension is under heavy use, the system may temporarily suspend all height changes to allow the compressor to cool down. When this occurs and a height change is requested, the message LEVELING SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE will display in the instrument cluster.
Air Suspension Service
If a SERVICE LEVELING SYSTEM message displays in the instrument cluster, see your authorized dealer immediately.
Cruise Control
If equipped, cruise control allows the vehicle to maintain a set speed of 40 km/h (25 mph) or more without active acceleration. Cruise control does not work at speeds below 40 km/h (25 mph).
{ Warning
Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. Do not use cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
Cruise control will disengage if: . The Traction Control System (TCS) or
StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system begins to limit wheel spin. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206. . TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off. . A collision alert occurs. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260. . The brakes are applied.
When road conditions allow cruise control to be safely used, cruise control can be turned back on.
5 : Press to turn cruise control on or off.
A white indicator light is displayed in the instrument cluster when cruise control is on. See Cruise Control Light 0 124.
+RES : If cruise control is already engaged, press the thumbwheel up to increase the set speed. If there is a set speed in memory, briefly press up to engage cruise control at the previous set speed.
-SET : If cruise control is already on, briefly press the thumbwheel down to set the cruise speed and engage cruise control. If cruise control is already engaged, press down to decrease the set speed.
* : Press to disengage cruise control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
If cruise control is on but is not engaged, the thumbwheel could be pressed to -SET or +RES and engage cruise control when not desired. Keep cruise control off when it is
not being used. Press 5 to turn off cruise
control.
To set the cruise speed:
1. Press 5.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruise speed.
3. Briefly press and release the thumbwheel down to -SET.
4. Gently remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
When cruise control has been set to the desired speed, the cruise control indicator light turns green, and a cruise control set speed message is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster or in the Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped. See Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 136.
Resuming a Set Speed
If cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brakes are applied or * is
pressed, cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
Driving and Operating 213
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, briefly press the thumbwheel up to +RES to engage cruise control at the previous set speed.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If cruise control is already engaged: . Press and hold the thumbwheel up to
+RES until the desired cruise speed is reached, then release it. . To increase the vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press the thumbwheel up to +RES and then release it. For each press, the vehicle speed increases by about 1 km/h (1 mph).
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Settings 0 169. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
If cruise control is already engaged:
. Press and hold the thumbwheel down to -SET until the desired lower cruise speed is reached, then release it.
214 Driving and Operating
. To decrease the vehicle speed in small increments, briefly press the thumbwheel down to -SET and then release it. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases by about 1 km/h (1 mph).
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
To pass another vehicle while cruise control is engaged, use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal, or shortly following the release to override cruise control, briefly pressing the thumbwheel down to -SET will result in the cruise speed being set to the current vehicle speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well cruise control works on a hill depends on the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hill. When driving up a steep hill, you may need to apply the accelerator pedal to maintain the cruise speed. When driving down a steep hill, you may need to apply the brake pedal to keep the vehicle speed down. If the brake pedal is applied, cruise control will disengage.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control: . Lightly apply the brake pedal.
. Press *. . Press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed is erased from
memory if 5 is pressed or if the vehicle is
turned off.
Speed Limiter
If equipped, Speed Limiter allows you to set a maximum speed limit. When Speed Limiter is active at a set speed, it prevents the vehicle from accelerating above the set speed even if you continue to accelerate.
Speed Limiter can be used at speeds of about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.
You can temporarily override the set speed. See "Overriding Speed Limiter" later in this section.
Speed Limiter does not limit the vehicle speed when driving down a hill. If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed when
driving down a hill, beeps will sound to alert you that the vehicle has exceeded the set speed.
{ Warning
Speed Limiter does not automatically apply the brakes in emergency braking situations. To avoid possible injury or death, always be prepared to brake in emergencies and pay careful attention to the road ahead while driving.
Speed Limiter will automatically be disabled if: . Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) is turned on, if equipped. . Super Cruise is turned on, if equipped.
Speed Limiter is controlled using the +RES
and -SET thumbwheel and the * button on
the steering wheel:
+RES : Move the thumbwheel up to resume Speed Limiter at the last set speed in memory, to increase the set speed (Manual mode), or to increase the offset (Auto mode).
-SET : Move the thumbwheel down to choose the set speed, to decrease the set speed (Manual mode), or to decrease the offset (Auto mode).
* : Press to disengage Speed Limiter while
keeping the last set speed in memory.
Automatic Speed Limiter
Automatic Speed Limiter uses an on-board camera and navigation data to identify speed limit road signs and propose a new set speed based on that data.
In Auto mode, you can adjust the set speed with an offset above or below the identified speed limit using the steering wheel controls. See "Turning Speed Limiter On and Off" later in this section.
{ Warning
In Auto mode, Speed Limiter may not prompt for set speed changes when encountering conditional speed limit signs, for example time frames or when construction workers are present. To avoid a crash, personal injury, or death, always pay attention to posted signs and follow applicable traffic laws.
Manual Speed Limiter
Speed Limiter can also be used in Manual mode. In Manual mode, all changes to the set speed are controlled by the driver.
Selecting the Speed Limiter Mode
To enable Speed Limiter, select a Speed Limiter mode. From the infotainment home screen touch Controls > Drive (Drive & Park) > Speed Limiter. The following options are available: . Off . Manual . Auto
When a Speed Limiter mode is selected, s
will be lit white in the instrument cluster.
Setting Speed Limiter
Press the thumbwheel down to -SET to activate Speed Limiter and use the current vehicle speed as the set speed. When Speed
Limiter is active, s will be lit green in the
instrument cluster.
Driving and Operating 215
Increasing the Set Speed
While Speed Limiter is active, move the thumbwheel up to +RES to increase the set speed (Manual mode), or to increase the offset from the area speed limit (Auto mode).
. Briefly move the thumbwheel up to +RES and release it. For each press, the set speed increases by 1 km/h (1 mph).
. Press and hold the thumbwheel up to +RES to increase the set speed by 5 km/h (5 mph). Release the thumbwheel when the desired set speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When using Speed Limiter in Auto mode, there is a predefined maximum allowed value of offset beyond which the set speed cannot be increased.
Decreasing the Set Speed
While Speed Limiter is active, move the thumbwheel down to -SET to decrease the set speed (Manual mode), or to decrease the offset from the area speed limit (Auto mode).
. Briefly move the thumbwheel down to -SET and release it. For each press, the set speed decreases by 1 km/h (1 mph).
216 Driving and Operating
. Press and hold the thumbwheel down to -SET to decrease the set speed by 5 km/h (5 mph). Release the thumbwheel when the desired set speed is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When using Speed Limiter in Auto mode, there is a predefined minimum allowed value of offset beyond which the set speed cannot be decreased.
Accept or Decline Automatic Set Speed Changes (Auto)
When Speed Limiter is in Auto mode, is active, and a new speed limit sign is detected, it will propose a new set speed based on the detected speed limit sign. The proposed new set speed will be displayed as a message in the instrument cluster.
. To accept the new set speed, briefly move the thumbwheel down to -SET and release it.
. To decline the new set speed, briefly move the thumbwheel up to +RES and release it.
If you do not accept or decline the new proposed set speed, there is no change to the set speed.
Conditions Affecting Automatic Speed Limiter (Auto)
. There are changes in brightness, such as entering and exiting tunnels, bridges, and overpasses.
. There are low sun angles.
. Ambient lighting is poor in the evening or early morning.
. There are multiple changes in brightness or there are shadows along the roadway.
. There are conditions associated with low visibility such as fog, rain, snow, or road spray.
. The on-board camera's view of the road is blocked by leaves, snow, or other debris.
If Automatic Speed Limiter becomes temporarily unavailable, change to Manual mode.
Resuming Speed Limiter
If Speed Limiter was active but then * was
pressed, Speed Limiter can be resumed using the previous set speed. Briefly move the thumbwheel up to +RES and release it to activate Speed Limiter using the previous set speed.
If Speed Limiter was turned off because cruise control, ACC, or Super Cruise was turned on, to use Speed Limiter again:
1. Turn off cruise control, ACC, or Super Cruise.
2. On the infotainment home screen, touch Controls > Drive (Drive & Park) > Speed Limiter.
3. Select Manual or Auto.
Overriding Speed Limiter
When Speed Limiter is active, the set speed can be temporarily overridden only when you fully apply the accelerator pedal. You can control vehicle acceleration again when the vehicle speed is below the set speed.
Turning Off Speed Limiter
To turn off Speed Limiter, from the infotainment home screen, touch Controls > Drive (Drive & Park) > Speed Limiter > Off.
Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced)
If equipped, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) allows the cruise control set speed and following gap to be selected. Read this entire section before using this system. The following gap is the following time (or
distance) between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path, moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC works like regular cruise control. ACC uses a camera and radar sensor(s) to detect other vehicles. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can apply acceleration or limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake
pedal or press *. If ACC is controlling the
vehicle speed when the Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system activates, ACC may disengage. See Traction Control/ Electronic Stability Control 0 206. When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, ACC can be turned back on.
Disabling the TCS or StabiliTrak/ESC system will disengage ACC and prevent ACC from being re-engaged while TCS or StabiliTrak/ ESC is disabled.
ACC can reduce the need for you to frequently brake and accelerate, especially when used on expressways, freeways, and interstate highways. When used on other
roads, you may need to take over the control of braking or acceleration more often.
{ Warning
ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop ahead, or enter your lane. Also see "Alerting the Driver" later in this section. Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
{ Warning
ACC will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects.
Do not use ACC when:
. On winding and hilly roads or when the sensors are blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the entire front of the vehicle clean. (Continued)
Driving and Operating 217
Warning (Continued)
. Visibility is poor due to rain, snow, fog, dirt, insect residue, or dust; when other foreign objects obscure the camera and/or radar; or when the vehicle in front or oncoming traffic causes additional environmental obstructions, such as road spray. ACC performance is limited under these conditions.
. On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.
218 Driving and Operating
5 : Press to turn the system on or off. The
indicator turns white on the instrument cluster when ACC is turned on.
+RES : If ACC is already activated, press the thumbwheel up briefly to resume the previous set speed or to increase the set speed. See "Increasing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed" later in this section.
SET : If ACC is already activated, briefly press the thumbwheel down to SET to set the ACC cruise speed or to decrease the set speed. See "Reducing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed" later in this section.
* : Press to disengage ACC without erasing
the selected set speed. Press and hold to switch between ACC and regular cruise control. See "Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control" later in this section.
[ : Press to cycle through the three
following gap settings for ACC: Far, Medium, or Near. See "Selecting the Follow Distance Gap" later in this section.
The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Settings 0 169. The increment value used depends on the units displayed.
Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control
To switch between ACC and regular cruise
control, press and hold *. A message is
briefly displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Vehicle Messages 0 138.
ACC Indicator
Regular Cruise Control Indicator
When ACC is the selected cruise control
mode and is activated, a green \ ACC
indicator light is displayed in the instrument cluster and the following gap is displayed. When regular cruise control is the selected cruise control mode and is activated, a green
J cruise control indicator light is displayed
in the instrument cluster, however the following gap is not displayed.
When the vehicle is turned on, the cruise control mode will be set to the last mode used before the vehicle was turned off.
{ Warning
Always check the cruise control indicator on the instrument cluster to determine which mode cruise control is in before using the feature. If ACC is not active, the vehicle will not automatically brake for other vehicles, which could cause a crash if the brakes are not applied manually. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.
Setting Adaptive Cruise Control
If ACC is on but not engaged, the thumbwheel could be pressed to -SET or +RES and engage ACC when not desired. Keep ACC off when it is not being used.
Press 5 to turn off ACC.
The set speed is the vehicle speed when another vehicle is not detected in your path.
ACC cannot be set below the minimum allowable cruise speed. For vehicles that are not equipped with Super Cruise, the minimum allowable ACC cruise speed is 25 km/h (15 mph). For vehicles equipped with Super Cruise, the minimum allowable ACC cruise speed is 5 km/h (3 mph).
To set the ACC cruise speed while moving:
1. Press 5.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed. 3. Briefly press the thumbwheel down to
SET and release it. 4. Gently remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. After the ACC cruise speed is set, ACC may immediately apply the brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead that is closer than the selected following gap. The ACC cruise speed can be set while the vehicle is stopped if ACC is on and the brake pedal is applied.
The ACC indicator light is displayed in the instrument cluster and the Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped. When ACC is on but not engaged, the ACC indicator light is lit white. When ACC is on and is engaged, the ACC indicator light is lit green.
Always pay attention to the speed limit, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed.
Resuming a Set Speed
If ACC is engaged at a set speed and then the brakes are applied, ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory.
To resume ACC, briefly press the thumbwheel up to +RES and release it.
. If the vehicle is moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the vehicle accelerates to resume the previous set speed.
. If the vehicle is stopped with the brake pedal applied, briefly press and release the thumbwheel up to +RES and then release the brake pedal. ACC will hold the vehicle until +RES or the accelerator pedal is pressed.
When ACC is active, the set speed value and the ACC indicator light are displayed green in the instrument cluster. The vehicle ahead indicator may repeatedly flash if a vehicle ahead was present and then moved. See "Approaching and Following a Vehicle" later in this section.
If ACC is active, ACC will accelerate the vehicle to the set speed under the following conditions:
Driving and Operating 219
. There is no vehicle ahead.
. The vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap.
. The vehicle speed is not being limited because of a sharp turn.
Increasing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:
. Use the accelerator pedal to reach the desired cruise speed. Briefly press and release the thumbwheel down to SET and then release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. While ACC is overridden, the ACC indicator light will turn blue in the instrument cluster and in the HUD, if equipped.
. Press and hold the thumbwheel up to +RES until the desired set speed is displayed, then release it.
. To increase the vehicle speed in smaller increments, briefly press and release the thumbwheel up to +RES. For each press, the vehicle speed increases by about 1 km/h (1 mph).
220 Driving and Operating
. To increase the vehicle speed in larger increments, press and hold the thumbwheel up to +RES, and then release it when the desired set speed is reached. While holding +RES, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) increment then continues to increase by 5 km/h (5 mph) increments until the thumbwheel is released.
The set speed can also be increased while the vehicle is stopped.
. If stopped and with the brake pedal applied, press the thumbwheel up to +RES until the desired set speed is displayed.
. If ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop and there is another vehicle directly ahead, pressing and holding the thumbwheel up to +RES will increase the set speed.
. Pressing +RES will automatically resume ACC when there is no longer a vehicle ahead or the vehicle ahead is pulling away and the brake pedal is not applied.
When the ACC system determines that there is no vehicle ahead, or the vehicle ahead is beyond the selected following gap, the vehicle will accelerate to resume the ACC set speed.
Reducing Speed While ACC Is at a Set Speed
If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:
. Apply the brake pedal to reduce the vehicle speed to the desired lower cruise speed. When the desired cruise speed is reached, remove your foot from the brake pedal and briefly press the thumbwheel down to SET. The vehicle will now cruise at the lower set speed.
. Press and hold the thumbwheel down to SET until the desired lower cruise speed is reached, then release it.
. To decrease the vehicle speed in smaller increments, briefly press and release the thumbwheel down to SET. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases by about 1 km/h or (1 mph).
. To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, press and hold the thumbwheel down to SET and then release it when the desired lower set speed is reached. While holding the thumbwheel down to SET, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) increment, then continues to decrease by 5 km/h (5 mph) increments until the thumbwheel is released.
The set speed can also be decreased while the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is at a stop with the brake pedal applied, press or hold the thumbwheel down to SET until the desired set speed is displayed, then release it.
Selecting the Follow Distance Gap
When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the vehicle speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected.
To adjust the following gap setting, press
[ on the steering wheel. Each press
cycles through the three following gap settings: Far, Medium, or Near.
When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster or HUD, if equipped. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed.
Driving and Operating 221
Far Gap Setting
Near Gap Setting
If equipped, and a trailer is electrically connected, the gap setting display will be as follows:
Medium Gap Setting with Trailer
Medium Gap Setting
Far Gap Setting with Trailer
Near Gap Setting with Trailer
Since each gap setting corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the longer the following distance will be between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap.
222 Driving and Operating
The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
Changing the gap setting automatically changes the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
Courtesy Gap
You can temporarily increase the follow distance gap between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you to allow more space for merging traffic.
. When your vehicle is moving, press and
hold [ on the steering wheel to
temporarily increase the gap distance.
When you release [, ACC may
accelerate to resume the ACC set speed while maintaining the normal gap distance setting.
. When your vehicle is stopped, press and
hold [ to prevent ACC from
automatically resuming the set speed, which can allow for merging traffic to merge between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you. When you are
ready to resume ACC, briefly press and release the thumbwheel up to +RES, or the apply the accelerator pedal.
Alerting the Driver
pulse five times. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
See Defensive Driving 0 185.
Approaching and Following a Vehicle
With Head-Up Display
Without Head-Up Display If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because your vehicle is approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly. When this condition occurs, the red collision alert symbol will flash on the windshield. Either eight beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will
The vehicle ahead indicator light is displayed in the instrument cluster and the HUD, if equipped. It only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle's path and is moving in the same direction. If the vehicle ahead indicator light does not appear in the instrument cluster, then ACC will not respond to, or brake for, vehicles ahead.
While ACC is active, ACC will automatically adjust your vehicle's speed to follow a detected vehicle ahead according to the selected following gap setting. ACC may decrease your vehicle's cruise speed when following a detected vehicle ahead that is traveling slower than your ACC set speed.
ACC may apply limited braking, if necessary. When ACC automatic braking is active, the brake lamps will turn on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal.
Passing a Vehicle While Using ACC
If the set speed is high enough, and the left turn signal is used to pass a vehicle ahead in the selected following gap, ACC may assist by gradually accelerating the vehicle prior to the lane change.
{ Warning
When using ACC to pass a vehicle or perform a lane change, the following distance to the vehicle being passed may be reduced. ACC may not apply sufficient acceleration or braking when passing a vehicle or performing a lane change. Always be ready to manually accelerate or brake to complete the pass or lane change.
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects
{ Warning
ACC may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a vehicle it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes.
Irregular Objects Affecting ACC
ACC may have difficulty detecting the following objects: . Vehicles with cargo extending from the
back end. . Non-standard shaped vehicles, such as
vehicle transport, vehicles with a side car fitted, or horse carriages. . Objects that are close to the front of your vehicle.
Driving and Operating 223
ACC Automatically Disengages
ACC may automatically disengage and the driver will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle if:
. The sensors are blocked.
. The Traction Control System (TCS) or StabiliTrak/ESC system has activated or has been disabled.
. If equipped with Air Suspension, the vehicle ride height is outside normal operating range. See Air Suspension 0 209.
. There is a fault in the system. . The radar falsely reports a blockage when
driving in a remote area with no other vehicles or roadside objects.
A DIC message may display to indicate that ACC is temporarily unavailable.
The ACC indicator light will turn white when ACC is disengaged.
In some cases, when ACC is temporarily unavailable, regular cruise control may be used. See "Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control" previously in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control mode.
224 Driving and Operating
Notification to Resume ACC
ACC will maintain a follow distance gap behind a detected vehicle, and will slow down your vehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.
If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead indicator will flash as a reminder to check traffic ahead before proceeding. In addition, the left and right sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times, or three beeps will sound. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems > Alert Type > Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier.
If equipped with Driver Attention System (DAS) located on top of the steering column, when the vehicle ahead drives away, and the DAS determines that the driver's attention is on the road ahead, ACC automatically resumes. For more information, see "Attention to the Road" in Super Cruise 0 227. If necessary, briefly press and release the thumbwheel up to +RES or apply the accelerator pedal to resume ACC. If stopped for more than two minutes, or if the driver door is opened and the driver seat belt is unbuckled, the ACC system
automatically applies the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle. The EPB light will turn on. To release the EPB, press the accelerator pedal. See Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
A DIC warning message may display indicating to shift to P (Park) before exiting the vehicle.
{ Warning
If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes.
{ Warning
Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn it off before leaving the vehicle.
ACC Override
If you apply the accelerator pedal while ACC is engaged, the ACC indicator light turns blue in the instrument cluster and the HUD, if equipped, indicating that ACC braking will not occur. ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is released.
{ Warning
The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you.
Curves in the Road
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary.
{ Warning
On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves.
ACC may operate differently when the vehicle approaches a sharp curve in the road ahead. If the ACC system detects that a curve is too sharp, ACC may temporarily reduce the vehicle speed while navigating the curve.
The curve speed control indicator light b
may illuminate green when ACC is actively controlling the vehicle speed and detects a sharp curve in the road ahead.
ACC may automatically increase the vehicle speed when exiting out of the curve, however ACC will not exceed the set speed.
When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens, the vehicle ahead indicator will not appear.
ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes. ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/ or braking that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to vehicles in different
Driving and Operating 225
lanes or stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service. Other Vehicle Lane Changes
ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. You may need to manually apply the brakes. Objects Not Directly in Front of Your Vehicle The ACC system may not be able to detect all objects in front of the vehicle if: . The vehicle or object ahead is not within
your lane. . The vehicle ahead is shifted, not centered,
or is shifted to one side of the lane. Driving in Narrow Lanes Vehicles in adjacent traffic lanes or roadside objects may be incorrectly detected when located along the roadway.
226 Driving and Operating
Do Not Use ACC on Hills
Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills. ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead. Towing with ACC If equipped when towing a trailer, ACC driving characteristics such as following gap, acceleration rates, and braking rates may be modified to provide a better towing experience. When ACC is used with vehicles equipped with an aftermarket trailer brake controller, disengage ACC before applying the manual trailer brake. ACC will not automatically disengage when the manual trailer brake is applied. ACC may be used when towing a trailer if the trailer is within the GM-approved allowable size and weight limits. See Trailer Towing 0 295.
When towing a trailer with ACC, it is important to properly set the Trailer Gain. See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" in Towing Equipment 0 299 for information about the Trailer Gain adjustment procedure.
Use Tow/Haul mode when driving down steep hills or mountain grades, or when hauling heavy loads. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Disengaging ACC
There are four ways to disengage ACC:
. Press *.
. Lightly apply the brake pedal. . Apply the Regen on Demand steering
wheel paddle, if equipped.
. Press 5.
Erasing Speed Memory
The ACC set speed is erased from memory if
5 is pressed or if the vehicle is turned off.
Auto Set Speed
If equipped, the Auto Set Speed feature uses detected road speed limits to assist with setting the vehicle speed while ACC is active.
You can enable or disable Auto Set Speed in Settings. To view available settings from the infotainment home screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Auto Set Speed will remain enabled or disabled until another selection is made, even if the vehicle is turned off and on.
When ACC is active and Auto Set Speed is enabled, the vehicle will:
. Use the road speed limit to maintain a set vehicle speed
. Prompt you to accept or decline speed limit changes, when detected
. Change the ACC set speed to match the new road speed limit, if accepted, when prompted
. Not make any changes to the set speed, if declined when prompted
. Change the ACC set speed to the new road speed limit if no action is taken after receiving the prompt
You can increase or decrease the ACC set speed at any time using the -SET or +RES thumbwheel, to a predefined limit. You can also use the accelerator pedal to override the set speed.
The change in the amount of increased or decreased speed, known as offset, is stored and applied for the next speed limit change. There is a predefined maximum allowed value of offset beyond which the set speed cannot be changed.
The offset will not be retained if ACC is disengaged, Auto Set Speed is disabled, or when the vehicle is turned off.
{ Warning
When using Auto Set Speed with ACC, the auto set speed may not always be updated when the speed limit changes. The system also does not set the vehicle speed to speed limits shown with supplementary traffic signs, for example in construction zones. Always be attentive to your surroundings and adhere to posted speed limit signs.
The system may not detect conditional speed limit signs, for example, during specific times or where workers are present.
Auto Set Speed is not available when regular cruise control is the selected cruise control mode.
Weather Conditions Affecting ACC
ACC system operation may be limited under snow, heavy rain, or road spray conditions.
Accessory Installations and Vehicle Modifications
. Do not install or place any object around the front camera windshield area that would obstruct the front camera view.
. Do not install objects on top of the vehicle that overhang and may obstruct the front camera, such as a canoe, kayak, or other items that can be transported on top of the vehicle.
. Do not modify the hood, headlamps, or fog lamps, as this may limit the camera's ability to detect an object.
Cleaning the Sensing System
The camera sensor on the windshield behind the rearview mirror, and the sensors on the front of the vehicle can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, mud, or other debris. These areas must be clean for ACC to operate properly. For proper cleaning instructions, see the section "Washing the Vehicle" in Exterior Care 0 379.
Driving and Operating 227
If driving conditions temporarily prevent normal and safe ACC operation, regular cruise control may be available. See "Switching Between ACC and Regular Cruise Control" previously in this section. Always consider driving conditions before using either cruise control system.
Super Cruise
If equipped, Super Cruise can steer to maintain lane position under certain conditions on Super Cruise-enabled roads.
Super Cruise can also steer to perform a lane change under certain conditions on Super Cruise-enabled roads.
A lane change can be initiated by the driver using the turn signal lever.
The Super Cruise system may initiate a lane change maneuver in following scenarios: . To pass slower traffic . When the current lane is ending ahead . To return to the initial lane . To provide space for vehicles merging
from an ending lane
See "Super Cruise Lane Change" later in this section and Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 145.
228 Driving and Operating
{ Warning
Super Cruise can only assist to maintain lane position, or steer to change lanes, when driving on compatible roads. You must supervise the driving task and monitor the road conditions. You may need to respond to traffic events by steering, braking, or accelerating. See Defensive Driving.
Super Cruise is:
. Not a self-driving system
. Not a crash avoidance or warning system
. Not a substitute for proper supervision of the driving task
Super Cruise uses the following to detect the current lane position and lane markings ahead on compatible roads under certain conditions: . Cameras . Global Positioning System (GPS) sensing . A high-precision map . GPS-enhancement data downloaded
through OnStar
Super Cruise works with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), which controls acceleration and braking while Super Cruise is enabled and operating. Review and understand both this section and the ACC section before using Super Cruise. See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
An active Connected Service plan that includes Super Cruise Services is required to use Super Cruise.
{ Warning
Super Cruise does not perform all aspects of driving, nor does it do everything a driver can do. Super Cruise only steers to maintain vehicle position in the current lane or, under some circumstances, to change lanes. Super Cruise can only be used with Adaptive Cruise Control.
Super Cruise does:
. Not prevent crashes or warn of possible crashes.
. Not steer to avoid stopped or slow-moving vehicles, cross-traffic, construction barriers or cones, motorcycles, children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects on the road. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Not steer in response to vehicles or objects next to your vehicle, including vehicles attempting to enter your lane.
. Not respond to traffic lights, stop signs, or other traffic control devices.
. Not respond to crossing traffic. . Not make turns. . Not steer to merge onto or to exit
highways.
. Not steer to avoid, or steer through construction zones.
. Not function on surface streets. . Not respond to oncoming traffic. . Not function in city driving conditions.
{ Warning
Some state and local laws may require hands to be kept on the steering wheel at all times. Only remove your hands from the steering wheel if Super Cruise is engaged, it is safe to do so, and it is permitted by state and local laws.
{ Warning
Failure to supervise the driving task and to respond appropriately, even while Super Cruise is operating, can cause a crash. Super Cruise may not respond as you would to all driving situations and may not maintain lane position under all conditions.
It is extremely important to pay attention to the operation of the vehicle, even while using Super Cruise. Do not use a hand-held device while driving, even with Super Cruise engaged. To prevent serious injury or death:
. Always remain properly seated in the driver seat with your seat belt fastened.
. Never remove your hands from the steering wheel when Super Cruise is not operating.
. Always make sure traffic conditions are safe before using Super Cruise.
. Always keep the entire vehicle and the sensors clean. Sensors are on the front, sides, and rear of the vehicle. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Always observe posted speed limits. Only use Super Cruise at or below the posted speed limit.
Super Cruise should not be used in complex or uncertain driving conditions, including:
. Not in construction zones.
. Not when approaching or exiting toll plazas.
. Not when approaching an intersection that is controlled with a traffic light, stop sign, or other traffic control device.
. Not when lane markings are not present or cannot be detected. For example, there is too much glare, weather conditions are poor, or lanes are poorly marked.
. Not on slippery or icy roads.
. Not in adverse weather conditions, including rain, sleet, fog, ice, or snow.
. Not on winding or hilly roads.
. Not for city driving.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 229
Warning (Continued) . Not during heavy or emergency
braking. . Not on surface streets. . Not on a road shoulder, service drive,
or under an elevated freeway. . Not when towing a trailer that does
not meet GM approved guidelines. . Not in a highway exit lane.
When Super Cruise is Available
Super Cruise Indicator Super Cruise is designed to operate only when: . ACC is on. See Adaptive Cruise Control
(Advanced) 0 216. . Teen Driver is not active. . The GPS detects the vehicle is on a
compatible road.
230 Driving and Operating
. Both the camera and the radar sensors are functioning and not covered, obstructed, or damaged.
. The Driver Attention System (DAS) detects the driver's head and eyes are directed toward the road ahead.
. The lane markings are clearly visible and able to be detected by the system.
. If equipped with Air Suspension, Super Cruise allowable ride height is selected.
Super Cruise may be unavailable if Super Cruise detects that the outside air temperature is very cold.
Poor Conditions
Poor Conditions
Using Super Cruise
{ Warning
Super Cruise may not begin steering immediately, even when Super Cruise is
available and Z has been pressed. To
prevent serious injury or death, only remove your hands from the steering wheel if the steering wheel light bar, the
Super Cruise light Z, and the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) light \ are green.
To engage:
. Press 5 to turn on ACC. Make sure the white \ indicator displays in the
instrument cluster. See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216. When Super
Cruise is available, the white Z will
display in the instrument cluster.
. Press Z.
. ACC will set the speed to the current vehicle speed or resume to the higher previously stored ACC set speed.
{ Warning
Always monitor the vehicle speed and make sure that you are following the speed limit, regardless of the Auto Set Speed status.
If Auto Set Speed is enabled and a speed limit sign is detected, ACC will set the speed to the road speed limit (+/- the selected offset). For Auto Set Speed customization, see Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
When engaged and not steering the vehicle, the steering wheel light bar flashes blue,
and Z will be blue. The driver is in control
of steering and Super Cruise is not steering the vehicle.
When the vehicle is positioned in the center of the lane, the steering wheel light bar and
Z display will turn green, indicating Super
Cruise is steering the vehicle.
When Super Cruise controls the steering, traffic and other conditions and laws permit, and it is safe to do so, your hands can be taken off the steering wheel.
Always pay attention to the road and the operation of the vehicle. Always monitor and be attentive of surrounding traffic, including vehicles that may cross the road in front of your vehicle.
Super Cruise steering can be overridden with manual steering at any time. When Super Cruise is engaged, always be prepared to take immediate action -- including steering, accelerating, and braking quickly, if necessary.
When Super Cruise is engaged, the Forward Collision system will alert and brake. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
Steering Manually and Changing Lanes
The vehicle can always be manually steered, even with Super Cruise engaged; for example, when manually changing lanes.
When the steering wheel is moved manually, the steering wheel light bar
flashes blue and Z on the instrument
cluster turns blue to indicate Super Cruise is not steering the vehicle.
When ready to allow Super Cruise to resume steering again, position the vehicle in the center of the lane, hold the steering
Driving and Operating 231
wheel until the steering wheel light bar turns green, and then release the steering wheel when it is safe to do so.
{ Warning
To help prevent crashes before making a lane change:
. Always check mirrors.
. Glance over your shoulder.
. Use the turn signals.
Super Cruise Lane Change
Super Cruise can steer to perform a single lane change under certain conditions when requested by the driver or initiated by the Super Cruise System.
On Demand Lane Changes
To request a lane change: 1. Verify the lane next to your vehicle is
clear and conditions are safe to make a lane change. 2. Use the turn signal lever to activate the turn signal in the direction of the desired lane change. 3. Return the turn signal lever to the neutral position after the lane change. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals 0 145.
232 Driving and Operating
4. To cancel a lane change, return the turn signal lever to the neutral position, move the lever in the opposite direction of the lane change, or steer manually at any time.
Automatic Lane Changes
If equipped, the Super Cruise System may initiate a single lane change when enabled through vehicle settings under following conditions:
. The Super Cruise System may initiate a lane change to the left to pass a slower moving vehicle ahead and a subsequent lane change to right to return to your original lane.
. The Super Cruise System may initiate an automatic lane change to left or right when the current lane is ending ahead.
. To cancel a Super Cruise automatic lane change, move the turn signal lever or steer manually at any time.
. Super Cruise may initiate an automatic lane change to left or right when a slower moving vehicle is detected in the adjacent ending lane to provide space for merging vehicle.
If Super Cruise detects that traffic is clear, Super Cruise will steer the vehicle to perform the lane change. A message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) during the lane change to provide more information on the status of the lane change.
Super Cruise Lane Change functionality is only available on Super Cruise capable Divided Roads.
Super Cruise Lane Change functionality is not available when a construction zone is detected.
Super Cruise Lane Change may be disabled when a trailer or other accessories (e.g. bike rack, cargo tray, etc.) are detected. Do not use Super Cruise Lane Change when towing a trailer.
The Super Cruise Lane Change feature can be customized to be Off, On Demand Lane Change, or On Demand Lane Change & Automatic Lane Change through the vehicle personalization menu. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Super Cruise Lane Change.
{ Warning
Super Cruise Lane Change may not detect a vehicle in an adjacent lane. Always supervise the driving task and monitor traffic conditions when using the Super Cruise Lane Change feature. Only request a lane change when traffic conditions are safe for a lane change, and always be ready to manually steer the vehicle. See "Steering Manually and Changing Lanes" listed previously in this section.
Super Cruise Navigation Route Follow Using In-Vehicle Google Maps
If equipped, when an active route is selected using in-vehicle Google Maps, on Super Cruise-enabled roads when Super Cruise is active, Super Cruise may take the following actions to follow the route:
. Initiate an automatic lane change to left or right.
. Select the direction of travel at a lane split.
. Maintain the current lane of travel when following a slower moving vehicle.
The driver must always remain prepared to take control of the vehicle to follow the route. In some scenarios Super Cruise may not perform the required lane change.
Super Cruise will not perform the required lane change if Automatic Lane Change is unavailable or disabled.
Take Over Alert
{ Warning
Super Cruise will not maintain the vehicle's speed while the steering wheel light bar is flashing red. If the steering wheel light bar flashes red, immediately resume manual steering to prevent serious injury or death. If you do not resume manual steering, the vehicle will begin to slow in the same lane and eventually come to a complete stop on the road.
Any time the steering wheel light bar flashes red, resume manual steering immediately.
To begin steering manually, hold the steering wheel firmly (with both hands) using the highlighted regions as shown in the picture below.
The instrument cluster light Z, will also
turn red and a message will display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). In addition, beeps will sound, or the Safety Alert Seat will vibrate. To view Collision and Detection options from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems. After you begin steering manually, then Super Cruise will disengage.
The red flashing steering wheel light bar could occur under any of the following conditions:
. Lane markings are poor or visibility is limited.
Driving and Operating 233
. The Driver Attention System (DAS) does not detect that the driver's head and eyes are directed toward the road.
. ACC is canceled.
. The vehicle is on a tight curve, or the lanes are too wide, or the vehicle goes into a curve too fast.
. The road speed limit of a Super Cruise capable non-divided road is below 72 km/h (45 mph).
. The compatible road ends.
. The vehicle is approaching an intersection controlled by a traffic light, stop sign, or other traffic control device.
. A Super Cruise system fault occurs.
. Super Cruise is unable to complete the lane change maneuver.
. Super Cruise detects that the outside air temperature is too cold for normal operation.
The steering wheel light bar may flash amber if the system anticipates certain conditions that may require the driver to take steering control. In the instrument
cluster, the Super Cruise indicator light Z
will also turn amber and a message will be displayed in the DIC.
234 Driving and Operating
Any time the steering wheel light bar flashes amber, resume manual steering to prevent further escalation.
Attention to the Road
{ Warning
Super Cruise is a driver assistance system and cannot accurately detect or predict all situations. Super Cruise is not a crash avoidance system. To prevent serious injury or death, you must supervise the driving task and monitor the road conditions. You may need to respond to traffic events by steering, braking, or accelerating. See Defensive Driving 0 185. Super Cruise also cannot determine whether you are awake, asleep, impaired, or properly focused on safe driving. The vehicle could crash into other vehicles, drive out of the lane, or drive off the road. Complete attention is always required while driving, even while using Super Cruise. Be prepared to take over steering or apply the brakes at any time.
{ Warning
To prevent serious injury or death, be alert and pay special attention when passing highway exits, entrances, and crossings with Super Cruise, and be ready to take control of the vehicle when necessary. Changes in lane markings around exits and entrances can momentarily cause Super Cruise to not detect the correct lane. If this occurs, Super Cruise may attempt steering inputs to bring the vehicle back into the correct lane and, in rare circumstances, could over-correct and cause the vehicle to momentarily cross into a lane next to your vehicle unless you manually steer to maintain your lane position.
The Driver Attention System (DAS) on the steering column continually monitors driver head and eye position to estimate driver attention to the road. The camera does not record or share pictures, audio, or video.
Sunglasses, hats, or other types of clothing that change the shape of the head may interfere with camera performance. To improve camera performance, raise or lower the steering wheel, or change the seat position.
Pay close attention to the road ahead to avoid these three increasing alerts:
First Alert Second Alert Third Alert
Driving and Operating 235
. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green, the system has detected that your head and eyes may not be directed toward the road.
. The flashing will stop when the system detects that your head and eyes appear to be directed toward the road.
. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green for too long, Super Cruise will alert the driver to take control of steering immediately by flashing the light bar red. Also, either beeps will sound or the Safety Alert Seat will vibrate. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle, then touch "Alert Type" or "Collision/Detection Systems."
. Take over steering, then Super Cruise may disengage or the steering wheel light bar will flash blue to indicate the need for a driver override. Do not take hands off the steering wheel until the steering wheel light bar is green.
. To re-engage Super Cruise after disengagement, press Z. See "Using Super Cruise" previously in this
section.
. If the steering wheel light bar flashes red for too long, a voice command will tell you to take control of the vehicle.
. Take control of the steering immediately; ACC and Super Cruise will disengage.
. A DIC message will indicate that Super Cruise is locked out. Super Cruise cannot be re-engaged until the next time you start the vehicle.
. Continued failure to take over steering will cause the vehicle to brake to a stop and OnStar will be called. The brake lamps and hazard warning flashers will come on.
. Take control of the vehicle and continue driving.
236 Driving and Operating
Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects; Cross-Traffic
{ Warning
Super Cruise is not a crash avoidance system and will not steer or brake to avoid a crash. Super Cruise does not steer to prevent a crash with stopped or slow-moving vehicles. You must supervise the driving task and may need to steer and brake to prevent a crash, especially in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly enters your lane. Always pay attention when using Super Cruise. Failure to do so could result in a crash involving serious injury or death.
Curves in the Road
{ Warning
The vehicle could drift out of your lane of travel. To prevent crashes, always be ready to manually steer. Super Cruise may not detect your lane on curves in the road. Super Cruise may not detect the markings that show your lane. You may not have time to react to a vehicle
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) in the lane next to your vehicle while on curves in the road. Super Cruise may hand control back to the driver more often driving around a sharp curve while towing a trailer. Super Cruise may operate differently in sharp curves. It may drift out of your lane of travel if the curve is too sharp.
When entering a curve, Super Cruise may not detect the lane markings and may not adjust the steering enough to stay in your lane of travel. When this happens, you will need to steer the vehicle.
Super Cruise may detect other lane markings that are not in your lane and may or may not steer appropriately to maintain your lane.
Super Cruise may occasionally provide an alert and/or steering that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to lane markings in different lanes, signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service.
Other Vehicles Entering Your Lane
Super Cruise may not detect a vehicle that enters your lane, or may not brake fast enough to avoid a crash. You must manually brake and steer the vehicle. Intersections; Vehicles Crossing the Road Ahead Super Cruise will not brake the vehicle when approaching an intersection that is controlled by a traffic light or stop sign. Super Cruise will not detect vehicles crossing the road ahead, including at intersections, and will not automatically steer or brake to prevent a collision. You must manually brake and steer the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Super Cruise may be used when towing a trailer when Trailer attached is within size and weight limits designated in the Trailer Towing section, see Trailer Towing 0 295.
When Super Cruise is used with vehicles equipped with aftermarket trailer brake controller, Super Cruise may not disengage when manual trailer brake is applied.
Do not use Super Cruise Lane Change when towing a trailer.
For additional information on towing a trailer, see Trailer Towing 0 295.
Super Cruise on Hills
Do not use Super Cruise while driving on steep hills.
Super Cruise on Non-Divided Roads
Super Cruise may be available on non-divided roads that are mapped, outside of urbanized areas and have a road speed limit above 72 km/h (45 mph).
Driving and Operating 237
Super Cruise Indicator Light Summary
The steering wheel light bar and instrument cluster light provide the following important information about Super Cruise operation:
238 Driving and Operating
Steering Wheel Light Bar
Instrument Cluster Light
Off
Off
Off
White
Solid Green
Solid Green
Flashing Blue
Solid Blue
Flashing Green
Solid Green
Flashing Amber Flashing Red
Solid Amber Solid Red
Super Cruise Description
Super Cruise is off. There is no automatic steering. Operate the vehicle manually.
Super Cruise is available and can be engaged.
Super Cruise is steering. Pay attention to the road and vehicle operation.
Super Cruise is not steering. Operate the vehicle manually. See "Steering Manually and Changing Lanes" previously in this section.
Super Cruise has detected you are not paying sufficiently close attention to the road. Pay attention to the road. See "Attention to the Road" previously in this section.
Take over steering. Super Cruise may disengage. See "Take Over Alert" previously in this section.
Take over steering immediately. Super Cruise will disengage. See "Take Over Alert" previously in this section.
Disengaging Super Cruise
There are two ways to disengage Super Cruise:
. Press Z while your hands are on the
steering wheel. The Super Cruise steering will disengage.
. Press the brake pedal or press the Regen on Demand paddle, if equipped, while your hands are on the steering wheel. Both Super Cruise steering and Adaptive Cruise Control will disengage.
Super Cruise Messages
If the Super Cruise indicator light does not
appear in the instrument cluster, press Z
to display a DIC message that provides a reason for the system's unavailability.
Immediately after a disengagement,
pressing the Z within 10 seconds will
display a DIC message with the reason for Super Cruise disengagement.
Driving and Operating 239
240 Driving and Operating
Subscription Required Press OnStar Button Unavailable Turn on Adaptive Cruise Control Unavailable Lane Ending Unavailable No Road Information
Unavailable Sensors Can't Find Lane Lines
Super Cruise Message Summary . The owner's required Connected Services subscription may have ended.
. Press the Blue OnStar button in your vehicle to speak with an OnStar representative, who can help determine the issue and what actions to take
Adaptive Cruise Control must be on before Super Cruise can be enabled.
. Set speed is not required before enabling Super Cruise.
. Adaptive Cruise Control is not required to be engaged before enabling Super Cruise.
Super Cruise is disabled because the driving lane is ending. . There is no map information available for that portion of the
road. Recent road reconstruction may turn off Super Cruise for that section of road until new map information is available.
. The vehicle is not on the correct type of road. A controlled access freeway or compatible divided or non-divided road is required for Super Cruise.
. There are lanes entering or exiting on both the left and right side of the road.
. Rain or snow is inhibiting the system's ability to see lane lines.
. Direct sunlight is on the front camera at dawn or dusk.
. There are missing or poor lane line markings on the road.
. There is sun glare on the road surface.
. There is heavy rain, puddles, or road spray.
Driving and Operating 241
Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)
Unavailable Sensor Can't See Face Clearly
. Cups, food, hands, or other objects are obscuring the Driver Attention System (DAS) camera's view of the driver's face.
. The steering column is pointed too high or low for the DAS to see the driver. Adjust the steering column or the seat if the message occurs frequently.
. Sun is shining into the DAS camera.
. Dawn or dusk sun glare is on the driver's face.
Unavailable Looking Away From Road for Too Long
The DAS system detects that the driver is not looking at the road.
Unavailable Driving Too Fast
The vehicle is traveling faster than 137 km/h (85 mph). The maximum Super Cruise speed in curves will vary based on how sharp the curve is. The vehicle will automatically decrease speed if needed.
Unavailable Driving in Exit Lane Unavailable GPS Signal Lost Unavailable You Have Taken Vehicle Control
The Super Cruise system has detected that the vehicle is in an exit lane. . There is poor reception in isolated areas.
. Reception is being blocked by buildings or other large structures. . The brake pedal is being pressed.
. The Adaptive Cruise Control has been canceled or turned off.
Unavailable Sensor Blocked
Clear snow, ice, dirt, or other contaminants from the front and rear areas of the vehicle. Super Cruise may be disabled due to inclement weather conditions affecting system performance.
Unavailable Over Weight Limit
Super Cruise has detected trailer is over allowable weight limit.
242 Driving and Operating
Unavailable Trailer Too Unstable
Unavailable Trailer Too Large
Unavailable Lane Too Narrow
Unavailable Sharp Curve
Super Cruise Unavailable
Super Cruise Locked Out See Owner's Manual
Unavailable Seat Belt Not Fastened Unavailable Teen Driver Mode Active Unavailable Snow Mode Unavailable Unsupported Intersection Unavailable Approaching Toll Booth Unavailable Ride Height Out of Range Drive With Care
Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)
Super Cruise has detected that trailer attached is causing unstable condition. Check trailer and/or load.
Trailer size (length/width) is larger than supported for Super Cruise operation.
Super Cruise has detected lane width ahead is too narrow for Super Cruise operation while towing a trailer.
Some curves are too sharp to be navigated by the Super Cruise system. Super Cruise will be available after the curve is traveled.
Super Cruise is unavailable for reasons not described in other messages.
The driver did not take control of the vehicle when prompted by the Super Cruise system. The Super Cruise system will be disabled until the vehicle is turned off and back on.
The driver seat belt is not fastened.
Teen Driver mode is active.
A snow plow is attached.
Super Cruise has detected an unsupported intersection.
Super Cruise has detected that there is a toll booth ahead.
The vehicle ride height is out of Super Cruise operational range.
Super Cruise has detected a construction zone.
Map Updates
Super Cruise map information must be periodically updated at least once every seven months to determine whether Super Cruise is available on certain roads. Turn on the vehicle's built-in Wi-Fi hotspot to receive automatic updates via OnStar, or see your dealer.
Disabling the vehicle's Wi-Fi, Share Hotspot Data, or Location Services will disable automatic map updates. Super Cruise will stop functioning after seven months or less, depending on the time of the last map update.
Data Download
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected through the OnStar system. This includes information about: the vehicle's operation; a crash involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features; and, in certain situations, the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
Location Services
This setting enables or disables sharing of vehicle location outside the vehicle for certain purposes. Even if the Location Services setting is disabled, vehicle location information will continue to be shared for emergency services and Super Cruise.
System Care
The camera on the steering column has a lens cover that may become dirty over time and affect camera performance. Clean the lens cover with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it. Never use abrasive cloths/cleaners or corrosive chemicals of any kind on the lens cover.
Super Cruise uses the front radar, front camera, and 360 degree cameras for its operation. Clean surfaces are required for Super Cruise operation. See Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216, "Surround Vision Camera" under Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 245, and Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 273 for care information.
Driving and Operating 243
Caution
The Super Cruise system is a highly sophisticated system and should only be serviced by technicians with the proper training, tools, and safety instructions, which your dealer has. Without proper training and tools the vehicle may become damaged.
Advanced Driver Assistance Systems
This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems.
{ Warning
Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
(Continued)
244 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
Under many conditions, these systems will not:
. Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.
. Work at all driving speeds.
. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.
. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.
. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt.
. Work if the detection sensor is covered up, such as with a sticker, magnet, or metal plate.
. Work if the area surrounding the detection sensor is damaged or not properly repaired.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Audible or Safety Alert Seat Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by chiming. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Comfort and Convenience. If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of chiming. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems. Cleaning Depending on vehicle options, keep these areas of the vehicle clean to ensure the best driver assistance feature performance. A Driver Information Center (DIC) message may display when a system is unavailable.
. Front and rear bumpers and the area below the bumpers
. Front grille and headlamps . Front camera lens in the front grille or
near the front emblem
. Front side and rear side panels . Outside of the windshield in front of the
rearview mirror
. Side camera lens on the bottom of the outside mirrors
. Rear side corner bumpers . Rear Vision Camera in the tailgate handle . Rear Camera Mirror and Cargo View
Camera in the Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Radio Frequency
This vehicle may be equipped with driver assistance systems that operate using radio frequency. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC), Surround Vision, Rear Park Assist (RPA), Front and Rear Park Assist (FRPA), and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) may help the driver park or avoid objects. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the infotainment display. The previous screen displays when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) after a short delay. To return to the previous screen sooner, press Home or Back on the infotainment system, shift into P (Park), or reach a vehicle speed of approximately 12 km/h (8 mph) while in D (Drive).
1. View Displayed by the Camera
Driving and Operating 245
1. View Displayed by the Camera 2. Corners of the Rear Bumper Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display. A warning triangle may appear on the infotainment display to show that Rear Park Assist (RPA) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object.
{ Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of
(Continued)
246 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
the cameras' field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Surround Vision System
The Surround Vision system can display various views surrounding the vehicle on the infotainment display. See below for camera view descriptions and more information.
{ Warning
The Surround Vision cameras have blind spots and will not display all objects near the corners of the vehicle. Folding outside mirrors that are out of position may not display surround view correctly. Always check around the vehicle when parking or backing.
1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
2. Area Not Shown
1. Views Displayed by the Surround Vision Cameras
2. Area Not Shown
{ Warning
The camera(s) do not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other object outside of the cameras' field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Shown distances may be different from actual distances. Do not drive or park the vehicle using only these camera(s). Always check behind and around the vehicle before driving. Failure to use proper care may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage.
Camera Views
Touch the camera view icons along the bottom of the infotainment display to access each view:
1. Front/Rear Standard View
Displays an image of the area in front or behind the vehicle. To select, touch Front/Rear Standard View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active.
When the hitch guidance is selected, Rear Standard View will remain visible across gear changes, otherwise the view will toggle between Front and Rear Standard View based on gear position.
The front view camera also displays when the Park Assist system detects an object within 30 cm (12 in).
To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Rear Standard View. The view will close after eight seconds and can be closed early by selecting X, Home, or Back.
2. Front/Rear Top-Down View
Displays a front or rear overhead view of the vehicle. To view, select Front/ Rear Top-Down View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active.
3. Front/Rear Side View
Displays a view that shows objects next to the front or rear sides of the vehicle. To select, touch Front/Rear Side View on the infotainment display when a camera view is active. Touch the button to toggle between front and rear camera views. Park Assist and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) overlays are not available when Front/Rear Side View is active.
4. Hitch View
Displays a zoomed-in view of the hitch area to assist with aligning the vehicle's hitch ball with the trailer coupler and monitoring the trailer connection. To view, select Hitch View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Hitch View. The view will close after
Driving and Operating 247
eight seconds and can be closed early by selecting X, Home, or Back. Shifting into P (Park) while in this view will automatically engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).
5. Surround View
Displays an image of the area surrounding the vehicle. Surround View is displayed alongside the currently selected view when below 12 km/h (8 mph). Surround View is disabled when above 12 km/h (8 mph).
6. Camera App Guidance Lines
The camera app supports three possible guidance modes: No Guidance, Vehicle Guidance, and Trailering Guidance. To change guidance mode, select the appropriate guidance icon. Depending on the guidance mode and view selected, different guidance lines may appear. A grayed-out icon indicates that guidance lines are not available. Certain views do not support guidance lines.
. Standard Guidance Lines are available in Front/Rear Standard Views, Front/Rear Top-Down Views, and Surround View when the
248 Driving and Operating
Vehicle Guidance mode is selected. Standard Guidance Lines show current and intended vehicle path.
. Hitch Guidance Line is available in Rear Standard View when the Trailering Guidance mode is selected. Hitch Guidance displays a single centered guidance line on the infotainment display to assist with aligning the vehicle's hitch with a trailer coupler. Align the Hitch Guidance Line with the trailer coupler by continuously steering the vehicle to keep the guidance line centered on the coupler when backing. Park Assist overlays will not display when the Hitch Guidance Line is active.
. Rear Trailer Guidance Lines are available in the Rear Trailer View when the Trailering Guidance mode is selected and the rear trailer camera calibration has been successfully completed. Rear Trailer Guidance Lines show the intended path (yellow) and the current path (blue) of the trailer. The current path guidance lines will converge with the intended path guidance lines.
7. Camera App Guidance Lines
8. Transparent Trailer View
Displays a view that allows the driver to virtually "see through" the trailer. The feature is available when a compatible trailer is connected, a valid profile is selected and the vehicle is not in R (Reverse). The feature requires user installation of an accessory trailer camera on the rear exterior surface of the trailer per the accessory trailer camera installation instructions. See your dealer for accessory trailer camera(s) and information. To view, select Transparent Trailer View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Transparent Trailer View. The view will close after eight seconds and can be closed early by selecting X, Home, or Back.
To calibrate the system, a minimum clearance of 61 cm (24 in) is required.
When the system is calibrated and trailer position is known, one of three views will be shown; Transparent Trailer View, Left Transparent Trailer View, or Right Transparent Trailer View. The Transparent Trailer View is shown when the position of the trailer is relatively straight behind the vehicle. The Left or Right Transparent Trailer view is shown when the position of the trailer is too far to the left or right. When the system is not calibrated or trailer position is not known, the Transparent Trailer Picture-in-Picture View will be shown.
9. Rear Trailer Views
. Rear Trailer View
Displays a view of the area behind the trailer when a trailer is connected. The feature requires user installation of an accessory trailer camera on the rear exterior surface of the trailer per the accessory trailer camera installation instructions. See your dealer for accessory trailer camera(s) and information. To view, select Rear Trailer View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this
view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Rear Trailer View. The view can be closed by selecting X, Home, or Back.
. Rear Side View with Available Articulation Functionality
Displays a rearward split view of the left and right sides of the vehicle and trailer, when a trailer is connected. The view will automatically pan to show more of the left or right side based on the position of the trailer when a compatible profile is configured and selected via the Trailering App. To view, select Rear Side View with Available Articulation Functionality on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Rear Side View with Available Articulation Functionality. The view can be closed by selecting X, Home, or Back.
. Picture-in-Picture Side View
Displays a rearward split view of the left and right sides of the vehicle and trailer with an overlay view of the area behind the trailer when a trailer is connected. The feature requires user installation of an accessory trailer camera on the rear exterior surface of the trailer per the accessory trailer camera installation instructions. See your dealer for accessory trailer camera(s) and information. To view, select Picture-in-Picture Side View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Picture-in-Picture Side View. The view can be closed by selecting X, Home, or Back.
10. Cargo Bed View
Use the plus and minus icons on the infotainment display to zoom in or out.
Displays a view of the truck bed and the area behind the vehicle to assist in cargo or hitch monitoring or
Driving and Operating 249
hitching to a fifth wheel or gooseneck trailer. To view, select Cargo Bed View on the infotainment display when the camera app is active. To access this view when in a forward gear above 12 km/h (8 mph), select CAMERA on the infotainment display and select Cargo Bed View. The view will close after eight seconds and can be closed early by selecting X, Home, or Back. When the Cargo Bed View is selected when not in D (Drive) the cargo bed lighting is turned on automatically. The feature can be enabled or disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.
Additional Views and Alerts
. Turn Signal Activated Views
Displays a rearward view of the left or right side of the vehicle and trailer when a trailer is connected. Views are provided based on turn signal activation with the right-side view being shown when the right turn signal is active and the left side view being shown when the left turn signal is active. The feature can be enabled or disabled. To view available
250 Driving and Operating
settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems. The view can be closed early by selecting X, Home, or Back.
A Trailer Length Indicator Overlay is available in the Turn Signal Activated Views when the trailer is relatively straight behind the vehicle and a compatible profile is configured and selected via the Trailering App. The overlay will not be visible when the position of the trailer is too far to the left or right. The overlay can be enabled or disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
. Jack-Knife Detection and Alert
The vehicle may be equipped with Jack-Knife Detection. The system will track the position of the trailer relative to the vehicle. As the front of the trailer approaches the rear of the vehicle, a warning or an alert will be displayed. A warning indicates to the driver to proceed with caution and an alert indicates that a collision is imminent. Based on vehicle equipment and user settings, the visual warning or alert may be accompanied by audible or safety alert
seat notifications. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.
. Trailer Angle Indicator
The vehicle may be equipped with a Trailer Angle Indicator. The Trailer Angle Indicator gives the driver a visual representation of the trailer's position relative to the vehicle. Available only in R (Reverse), Guidelines On, or Rear Trailering Views.
. When driving Off-Road the system will allow camera usage at higher speeds to improve safety and awareness. To activate place the vehicle drive mode in Off-Road. In this mode all Camera Views in the infotainment display will be available at higher speeds.
{ Warning
Use Hitch Guidance only to help back the vehicle to a trailer hitch or, when traveling above 12 km/h (8 mph), to briefly check the status of your trailer. Do not use for any other purpose, such as making lane change decisions. Before making a lane change, always check the
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
mirrors and glance over your shoulder. Improper use could result in serious injury to you or others.
HD Surround Vision with Trailer Camera Provisions
The system shows multiple views in the infotainment display using five cameras mounted around the vehicle and up to two additional accessory cameras that can be mounted on or in a trailer. This feature provides additional views to aid in trailering/towing. The front camera is in the grille under the front emblem, the side cameras are on the bottom of the outside mirrors, the rear camera is in the tailgate handle and the bed camera is mounted on the rear of the cab.
Additionally, up to two accessory cameras can be mounted to the rear and/or interior of the trailer. See your dealer for accessory trailer cameras. To access, touch CAMERA on the infotainment display or shift to R (Reverse). To return to the previous screen when not in R (Reverse), touch the Home or Back buttons on the infotainment display.
Certain trailer views require a compatible trailer profile be configured and selected. A compatible trailer is a box type trailer (cargo, camper, etc.) with a conventional hitch.
Available camera views: . Front/Rear Standard View . Front/Rear Top-Down View . Rear Bowl View . Front/Rear Side View . Hitch View . Rear Trailer View . Rear Side View with Available Articulation
Functionality . Picture-in-Picture Side View . Interior Trailer View . Transparent Trailer View . Surround View . Guidance Lines . Hitch Guidance
Troubleshooting
The Trailer Camera calibration may take longer than expected or not calibrate if: . The vehicle is driven too fast during
calibration. Maintain speeds below 50 km/h (31 mph).
. The vehicle is not driven straight during calibration. Steering should be maintained as straight as possible. Excessive Steering during calibration may extend calibration time.
. The calibration is attempted in low light. Calibration should be attempted when there is enough light.
. The calibration is attempted during adverse weather conditions. Calibration during conditions such as snow or heavy rain should be avoided.
. The road surface is not ideal for calibration. Calibration should be attempted on an alternate road surface.
. The accessory trailer cameras are swapped at the hitch connector. Ensure that the camera mounted to the rear of the trailer is connected to the rear trailer camera input.
. The accessory trailer camera is mounted, angled, or rotated outside of the defined mounting location (see camera installation instructions).
. The vehicle or accessory trailer camera is obstructed by dirt or debris. Check cameras and clean as needed.
Driving and Operating 251
. The accessory trailer camera is mounted such that obstructions are visible in the view (spare tire, bike/cargo racks, etc.). Calibration should be attempted with obstruction temporarily removed. Shadows resulting from driving toward the sun may be perceived as obstructions. Attempt to calibrate driving in an alternate direction if possible.
. The entered trailer profile dimensions are inaccurate. Measurements are expected to be made to the nearest centimeter or inch. Enter accurate measurements and reattempt calibration.
Distortion may be observed in a rear trailer camera view if:
. The accessory trailer camera is mounted, angled or rotated outside of the defined mounting location. See your dealer.
. The entered trailer profile dimensions are inaccurate. Measurements are expected to be made to the nearest centimeter or inch. Enter accurate measurements and reattempt calibration.
The Transparent Trailer image is not the right size:
. The size of the image overlaid on the face of the trailer may be too large or too small if the measurements input in the
252 Driving and Operating
Trailering App are not accurate. See Trailering App 0 309 for details on how to take measurements.
The preview may not be provided or the wrong preview may be provided if:
. The accessory cameras are not recognized. Ensure that the accessory camera(s) are connected and restart the vehicle.
. The accessory trailer cameras are swapped at the hitch connector. Ensure that the accessory camera(s) are connected to the correct input.
. The accessory trailer camera(s) are not installed according to the installation instructions.
A feature may be unavailable or not activating as expected if:
. The trailer is not compatible.
. The customization is disabled. Check the customization settings where applicable.
. The accessory trailer cameras are swapped at the hitch connector. Ensure that the accessory camera(s) are connected to the correct camera input.
. A trailer profile is not configured and selected.
. The entered trailer profile dimensions are inaccurate. Measurements are expected to be made to the nearest centimeter or inch. Enter accurate measurements and reattempt calibration.
. The trailer position is not known. Drive straight forward to learn trailer position.
. The rear vehicle camera is obstructed by dirt or debris. Check cameras and clean as needed.
. The accessory trailer cameras were plugged in when the vehicle was running. Prior to plugging in the trailer camera, the vehicle needs to be off with all doors closed for at least five minutes.
An unexpected view may display when:
. During the initial portions of the drive, Transparent Trailer Degraded may be displayed until truck or trailer articulation angle can be calculated. Once calculated, the expected transparent trailer view will be displayed.
Certain viewing features may experience degraded performance if:
. The entered trailer profile dimensions are inaccurate. Measurements are expected to be made to the nearest centimeter or inch. Enter accurate measurements and reattempt calibration.
. The rear vehicle camera is obstructed by dirt or debris. Check cameras and clean as needed.
For trailers with outboard wheels:
. Performance for Transparent Trailer and Jack Knife Detection are optimized when the entered value for trailer width reflects the width of the box of the trailer. If total width is entered:
. The inlayed camera view in Transparent Trailer View may appear wider than the trailer face.
. The rear vehicle camera is obstructed by dirt or debris. Check cameras and clean as needed.
. Jack Knife Detection alerts may activate prematurely.
. Performance for Transparent Trailer and Jack Knife Detection are optimized when the entered value for trailer width reflects the width of the box of the trailer. If total width is entered:
. The inlayed camera view in Transparent Trailer View may appear wider than the trailer face.
. Jack Knife Detection alerts may activate prematurely.
. Performance for Rear Trailer Guidance Lines and Trailer Length Indicator Overlays are optimized when the entered value for trailer width reflects the total width of the trailer including outboard wheels. If the trailer box width is entered:
. The Rear Trailer Guidance Lines will appear narrower than the actual path of the trailer.
. The Trailer Length Indicator Overlays will appear closer and possibly overlap with the trailer.
Park Assist
With Front and Rear Park Assist, as the vehicle moves at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors on the bumpers may detect objects up to 1.2 m (4 ft) in front and 1.8 m (6 ft) behind the vehicle within a zone
25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and below bumper level. These detection distances may be shorter during warmer or humid weather. Blocked sensors will not detect objects and can also cause false detections. Keep the sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush; and clean sensors after a car wash in freezing temperatures.
{ Warning
The Park Assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Park Assist, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing.
Driving and Operating 253
The instrument cluster may have a Park Assist display with bars that show "distance to object" and object location information for the Front and Rear Park Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red. When an object is first detected in the rear, one chime will be heard from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse two times. When an object is very close -- <0.4 m (1.5 ft) in the vehicle rear or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front -- a continuous chime will sound from the rear or front depending on object location, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Chimes for FPA are higher pitched than for RPA.
254 Driving and Operating
Turning the Features On or Off
Press X on the center stack to turn on or
off the Front and Rear Park Assist. The indicator light next to the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled. Front and Rear Park Assist can be turned Off or On. There is also a Park Assist Towbar that can be turned Off or On. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems > Park Assist. If Park Assist is turned off through vehicle personalization, the Park Assist button will be disabled. To turn Park Assist on again, select On in vehicle personalization. Setting Park Assist Towbar to On allows Park Assist to work properly with a trailer hitch. Some larger trailer hitches may not be compatible. Turn off Park Assist when towing a trailer.
Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
Enhanced Automatic Parking Assist (APA)
If equipped, under certain conditions APA with Braking can use sensors based on sonar technology along the vehicle's front, rear and sides to detect a parking spot, and automatically park or unpark the vehicle with some driver assistance. The vehicle will automatically maneuver into a detected spot moving at or near idle speed. It does this by automatically steering, braking, accelerating, and gear shifting. The driver must always be prepared to apply braking or additional acceleration, as needed. A display and audible beeps help to guide the parking maneuvers.
{ Warning
APA may not always detect objects in the parking space, objects that are not rigid (e.g. shrubs and chain-link fences), objects below the bumper, objects high off the ground (e.g. flatbed trucks), hanging objects, objects below ground level (e.g. large potholes), or moving objects (e.g. pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles). Always verify that the parking space is
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
appropriate for parking a vehicle. APA may not respond to changes in the parking space, such as movement of an adjacent vehicle, or a person or object entering the parking space. APA does not detect or avoid traffic that is behind or alongside of the vehicle. Always be prepared to stop the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
How to Activate Automatic Parking
To activate APA, press O on the
infotainment screen for the system to begin searching for a parking space while driving forward at no greater than 30 km/h (18 mph). APA searches for parking spaces, to the left or right of the vehicle, up to the sensors' ranges of 1.5 m (5 ft). To search for a parking space to the left, turn on the left turn signal or, if available, change the side selection in the infotainment display. To choose or change the parking mode, make a selection on the infotainment display.
APA cannot park in all empty parking spots. The parking spot must:
. Be sufficiently large to fit the vehicle comfortably.
. Have an adjacent vehicle, wall, or pillar for the system to align to.
surroundings and release the brakes to begin automatic parking. As the vehicle automatically steers, brakes, accelerates, and shifts gears into the parking spot, continue to check your surroundings. Be prepared to stop to avoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.
A progress bar displays the status of the parking maneuver. Once automatic parking is finished and the vehicle has come to a full stop, APA will beep and display a message indicating parking is complete.
Driving and Operating 255
to automatic parking, follow the displayed instructions and check surroundings as the vehicle unparks.
Once automatic unparking is finished and the vehicle has come to a full stop, FINAL POSITION - PRESS BRAKES will display. Press and hold the brakes. APA will beep and display TAKE CONTROL. The vehicle is now ready to exit the parking spot free of obstructions. Take control to drive away.
After completely passing an eligible parking spot, a beep sounds and a notification to stop the vehicle is displayed in the driver information center. Generally, APA selects the nearest empty parking spot behind the vehicle, but under some conditions may select a space that is further back. Slow down and bring the vehicle to a complete stop to begin.
Follow the displayed instructions. When the vehicle is ready to begin the maneuver, the steering wheel will vibrate briefly as a reminder to remove hands from the steering wheel. After the vibration stops, check your
Automatic Parking
How to Activate Automatic Unparking
To activate APA, press O on the
infotainment screen after turning the vehicle on and leaving it in P (Park). A screen will be displayed with unparking options. Similar
Automatic Unparking
How to Cancel Automatic Parking/Unparking
To cancel automatic parking or automatic
unparking at any time, press O or X on
the infotainment display. Be prepared to resume full control of the vehicle. APA holds the vehicle until the parking brake or brake
256 Driving and Operating
is applied, or the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). To start driving away, press the brakes and shift into D (Drive).
Certain vehicle conditions and driver interferences may also cancel automatic parking: . The driver manually steers the vehicle. . The maximum allowed speed is exceeded. . There is a failure with the APA system. . Electronic stability control or antilock
brakes are activated. . The parking brake is applied. . Driver unbuckles the seat belt and opens
the door.
System Limitations
Automatic Parking Assist has certain limitations. The system cannot: . Continue to operate if the maneuver
speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph). . Detect whether a parking space is legal or
restricted. . Detect pavement markings or lines. . Park the vehicle closely lined up with the
vehicle next to it, particularly if the spot is approached at an angle or if the parking space is angled. . Park exactly centered in a very large spot.
. Always detect short curbs.
. Operate while towing any trailer.
. Function the vehicle is raised or lowered by air suspension,if equipped.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
If the vehicle does not reverse into the expected parking space, the system could be maneuvering the vehicle into a previously detected space.
Remote Auto Parking
If equipped, the vehicle can complete the automatic parking maneuvers while the driver authorizes the maneuver via the myChevrolet app on a compatible mobile phone outside of the vehicle. The driver can also activate an automatic parallel or perpendicular unparking maneuver via the myChevrolet app. The driver must always be prepared to cancel the automatic maneuver if necessary.
Remote Auto Parking works the same way and has the same limitations as the standard APA feature described above. The main difference is that you must instead exit the vehicle and use the myChevrolet app.
{ Warning
When using the remote parking feature, stay within a short distance and visually monitor the vehicle until parking is complete. Do not leave the vehicle unsupervised during remote parking.
How to Activate Remote Auto Parking
To activate Remote Auto Parking, press O
on the infotainment screen for the system to begin searching for a parking space while driving forward at no greater than 30 km/h (18 mph). APA searches for parking spaces to the left or right of the vehicle up to the sensors' ranges of 1.5 m (5 ft). To choose or change the parking mode or side, make a selection in the infotainment display.
After completely passing an eligible parking spot, a beep sounds and a notification to stop the vehicle is displayed in the driver information center. Generally, Remote Auto Parking selects the nearest empty parking spot behind the vehicle, but under some conditions may select a space that is further back. Slow down and bring the vehicle to a complete stop to begin.
Follow the instructions in the vehicle's infotainment display. Select the option to supervise the maneuver remotely. When prompted, check all your belongings and exit the vehicle. Press and hold the authorization button on the myChevrolet app to allow the maneuver to complete. As the vehicle automatically steers, brakes, accelerates, and shifts gears into the parking spot, stay in close proximity of the vehicle, and check surroundings. Be prepared to release the authorization button, or cancel the maneuver, to avoid vehicles, pedestrians, or objects.
Once automatic parking is finished and the vehicle has come to a full stop, a message will be displayed indicating parking is complete.
How to Activate Remote Unparking
To activate the unparking maneuver remotely, launch Remote Auto Parking from the myChevrolet app. A screen will be displayed for unparking options. Similar to automatic parking, follow the displayed instructions, press and hold the authorization button, check surroundings as the vehicle unparks.
Once automatic unparking is finished and the vehicle has come to a full stop, a message will be displayed indicating unparking is complete. The vehicle is now positioned such that the path to exit the parking spot is free of obstructions. Enter the vehicle to start driving away.
How to Cancel Remote Automatic Parking or Automatic Unparking
To cancel automatic parking or automatic unparking at any time, press the cancel button on the myChevrolet app. Remote Auto Parking applies the parking brake and shifts into P (Park) to hold the vehicle.
Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
Backing Warning and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) have the Backing Warning System and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system. When in R (Reverse), Backing Warning alerts of rear objects at vehicle speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph), and RAB may automatically brake hard at speeds between 1-32 km/h (0.5-20 mph).
Driving and Operating 257
The Backing Warning System will chime once from the rear when an object is first detected, or pulse twice on both sides of the Safety Alert Seat. When the system detects a potential crash, chimes will be heard from the rear, or five pulses will be felt on both sides of the Safety Alert Seat. There may also be a brief, sharp application of the brakes.
{ Warning
The Backing Warning System only operates at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. In some situations, such as at higher backing speeds, there may not be enough time for the short, sharp application of the vehicle brake system to occur. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with the Backing Warning System, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before backing.
When the vehicle is in R (Reverse), if the system detects the vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a crash with a detected object
258 Driving and Operating
behind your vehicle in your path, it may automatically brake hard to a stop to help avoid or reduce the harm caused by a backing crash.
{ Warning
RAB may not avoid many types of backing crashes. Do not wait for the automatic braking to apply. This system is not designed to replace driver braking and only works in R (Reverse) when an object is detected directly behind the vehicle. It may not brake or stop in time to avoid a crash. It will not brake for objects when the vehicle is moving at very low speeds. It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with RAB, always check the area around the vehicle before and while backing.
Pressing the brake pedal after the vehicle comes to a stop will release RAB. If the brake pedal is not pressed soon after the
stop, the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) may be set. When it is safe, press the accelerator pedal firmly at any time to override RAB.
{ Warning
There may be instances where unexpected or undesired automatic braking occurs. If this happens, either press the brake pedal or firmly press the accelerator pedal to release the brakes from the RAB system. Before releasing the brakes, check the RVC and check the area around the vehicle to make sure it is safe to proceed.
Unexpected braking events are possible with a static installed accessory, such as a bike rack or hitch-mounted cargo carrier.
Rear Pedestrian Alert
Under certain conditions, this feature can provide alerts for a pedestrian within the system's range directly behind the vehicle. This feature only works in R (Reverse) below 12 km/h (8 mph), and detects pedestrians up to 8 m (26 ft) away during daytime driving. During nighttime driving, feature performance is very limited.
Rear Pedestrian Alert Indicator
When a pedestrian is detected within the system's range directly behind the vehicle, this symbol flashes amber on the infotainment display, along with two chimes from the rear and/or two pulses from both sides of the driver seat. When a pedestrian is detected close to the vehicle, the symbol flashes red on the infotainment display, along with seven chimes from the rear, or if equipped, seven pulses from both sides of the driver seat.
{ Warning
Rear Pedestrian Alert does not automatically brake the vehicle. It also does not provide an alert unless it detects a pedestrian, and it may not detect all pedestrians if:
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. The pedestrian is not directly behind the vehicle, fully visible to the Rear Vision Camera (RVC), or standing upright.
. The pedestrian is part of a group.
. The pedestrian is a child.
. Visibility is poor, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.
. The RVC is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
. The RVC, taillamps, or back-up lamps are not cleaned or in proper working condition.
. The vehicle is not in R (Reverse).
To help avoid death or injury, always check for pedestrians around the vehicle before backing up. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 185. Keep the RVC, taillamps, and back-up lamps clean and in good repair.
Rear Pedestrian Alert can be set to Off or Alert. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Alerts can be set to chimes or seat pulses. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) System
If equipped, Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow on the infotainment display to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. This system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three chimes sound from the left or right, or three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.
Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move farther back when a trailer is attached to the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 259
Rear Cross Traffic Braking (RCTB)
If equipped, RCTB displays a red warning triangle with a left or right pointing arrow on the infotainment screen to warn of traffic coming from the left or right. The system detects objects coming from up to 20 m (65 ft) from the left or right side of the vehicle. When an object is detected, three chimes sounds from the left or right, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle. RCTB will bring the vehicle to a full stop if a collision is imminent.
Driving With a Trailer
Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer. RCTA and RCTB are automatically disabled when a trailer is attached to the vehicle.
Turning the Features On or Off
The X button on the center stack is used
to turn on or off the Front and Rear Park Assist, and Backing Warning and Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) systems at the same time. The indicator light next to the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled.
260 Driving and Operating
RCTA can be turned on or off using the infotainment system. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Assistance Systems for Driving
If equipped, when driving the vehicle in a forward gear, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA), Lane Change Alert (LCA), Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB), Intersection Automatic Emergency Braking (I-AEB), and/or the Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage.
Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System
If equipped, the FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. When approaching a vehicle ahead too quickly, FCA provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly chimes or pulses the driver seat. FCA also lights an amber visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.
FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 8 km/h (5 mph).
{ Warning
FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. It also may not provide any warning at all. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving 0 185.
FCA can be disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. When a vehicle is detected, the vehicle ahead indicator will display green. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills, due to poor visibility; or if a vehicle ahead is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane.
{ Warning
FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair. Collision Alert
With Head-Up Display
Without Head-Up Display When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, the red FCA display will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched chimes will sound
from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Tailgating Alert
The vehicle ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely. Selecting the Alert Timing
The Collision Alert control is on the steering
wheel. Press [ to set the FCA timing to
Far, Medium, or Near. The first button press
Driving and Operating 261
shows the current setting on the Driver Information Center (DIC). Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timings may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions.
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), changing the FCA timing setting automatically changes the following gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).
Following Distance Indicator
If equipped, the following distance to a moving vehicle ahead in your path is indicated in following time in seconds on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133. The minimum following time is 0.5 seconds away.
262 Driving and Operating
If there is no vehicle detected ahead, or the vehicle ahead is out of sensor range, dashes will be displayed.
Unnecessary Alerts
FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service.
Cleaning the System
If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, this may correct the issue: . Clean the outside of the windshield in
front of the rearview mirror. . Clean the entire front of the vehicle. . Clean the headlamps.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
The AEB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. AEB also includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA). When the system detects a vehicle ahead in your path that is traveling in the same direction that you may be about to crash into, it can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This can
help avoid or lessen the severity of crashes when driving in a forward gear. Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard. Always wear a seat belt and ensure that all passengers are properly restrained. This automatic emergency braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected. This is shown by the FCA vehicle ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.
The system works when driving in a forward gear above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detect vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).
{ Warning
AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on AEB to brake the vehicle. AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles.
AEB may not:
. Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.
. Detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
. Detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, AEB may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB or firmly press the accelerator pedal.
{ Warning
AEB may automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)
IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage only when the brake pedal is released.
{ Warning
IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed.
AEB and IBA can be disabled. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.
{ Warning
Using AEB or IBA while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.
A system unavailable message may display if: . The front of the vehicle or windshield is
not clean. . Heavy rain or snow is interfering with
object detection. . There is a problem with the StabiliTrak/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
The AEB system does not need service.
Intersection Automatic Emergency Braking (I-AEB) System
If equipped, the I-AEB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with crossing vehicles.
The system works when driving in a forward gear above 15 km/h (9 mph) and less than 80 km/h (50 mph). It can detect oncoming vehicles up to approximately 60 m (197 ft).
Driving and Operating 263
{ Warning
I-AEB is an emergency crash preparation feature. Do not rely on I-AEB to brake or avoid crashes. I-AEB will not brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected intersecting vehicles. I-AEB may not:
. detect a crossing or oncoming vehicle on winding or hilly roads.
. detect all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.
. detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow.
. detect a vehicle ahead if it is partially blocked by pedestrians or other objects.
Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.
Vehicle Crossing the Path Ahead
When there is a crossing vehicle detected approaching from the right or the left side that may lead to a collision, I-AEB provides a
264 Driving and Operating
red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly chimes or pulses the Safety Alert Seat. See Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 0 243. I-AEB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle.
may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed.
rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed.
With Head-Up Display
With Head-Up Display
I-AEB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Crossing Traffic Alert
When your vehicle approaches an intersecting vehicle too rapidly and there is risk of a collision, a red warning graphic will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched chimes will sound, or the driver seat will pulse five times. The side of the seat that is pulsed and the location of the chimes will depend on the direction that the intersecting vehicle is detected from. When this collision alert occurs, the brake system
Without Head-Up Display
Turning Across Oncoming Traffic Alert
When your vehicle approaches another detected vehicle too rapidly, a red graphic will flash on the windshield. Also, eight rapid high-pitched chimes will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Collision Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more
Without Head-Up Display
Automatic Braking
If I-AEB detects it is about to crash into an intersecting vehicle, and the brakes have not been applied, I-AEB may automatically brake moderately or hard. This can help to avoid some crashes or lessen impact by reducing the speed of the vehicle. Always wear a seat belt, and check that all passengers are properly restrained. I-AEB can automatically brake between 15 km/h (9 mph) and
80 km/h (50 mph). Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds.
I-AEB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, I-AEB may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Release the EPB or firmly press the accelerator pedal to continue driving.
I-AEB may also apply the brakes automatically when there is an intersecting vehicle at risk of collision and the system determines that the driver is not braking with sufficient force.
Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed.
{ Warning
I-AEB may automatically brake or increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary or desired. Your vehicle could block the flow of traffic. I-AEB may respond to stationary or parked vehicles,
(Continued)
Warning (Continued)
signs, and other non-moving objects. To override AEB, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
{ Warning
Using I-AEB while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
If I-AEB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.
Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) System
If equipped, the FPB system may help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with pedestrians and bicyclists when driving in a forward gear. FPB displays an
amber indicator, ~, when a nearby
pedestrian or bicyclist is detected ahead. When approaching a detected pedestrian or
Driving and Operating 265
bicyclist too quickly, FPB provides a red flashing alert on the windshield and rapidly chimes or pulses the driver seat. FPB can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle. This system includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA), and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system may also respond to pedestrians or bicyclists. See Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) 0 262. Always wear a seat belt and ensure that all passengers are properly restrained.
The FPB system can detect and alert to pedestrians or bicyclists in a forward gear at speeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). During daytime driving, the system detects pedestrians or bicyclists up to a distance of approximately 40 m (131 ft). During nighttime driving, system performance is very limited.
{ Warning
FPB does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian or bicyclist. FPB may not detect pedestrians, including children, or bicyclists:
(Continued)
266 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
. When the pedestrian or bicyclist is not directly ahead, fully visible, or standing upright, or when part of a group.
. Due to poor visibility, including nighttime conditions, fog, rain, or snow.
. If the FPB sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.
. If the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition.
Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving 0 185. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FPB sensor clean and in good repair.
FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/ Detection Systems.
Detecting the Pedestrian or Bicyclist Ahead
FPB alerts and automatic braking will not occur unless the FPB system detects a pedestrian or bicyclist. When a nearby pedestrian or bicyclist is detected in front of the vehicle, the pedestrian ahead indicator will display amber. Front Pedestrian Alert
With Head-Up Display
Without Head-Up Display
When the vehicle approaches a pedestrian or bicyclist ahead too rapidly, the red FPB alert display will flash on the windshield. Eight rapid high-pitched chimes will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. When this Pedestrian Alert occurs, the brake system may prepare for driver braking to occur more rapidly which can cause a brief, mild deceleration. Continue to apply the brake pedal as needed. Cruise control may be disengaged when the Front Pedestrian Alert occurs.
Automatic Braking
If FPB detects it is about to crash into a pedestrian or bicyclist directly ahead, and the brakes have not been applied, FPB may automatically brake moderately or brake hard. This can help to avoid some very low speed pedestrian and bicyclist crashes or reduce pedestrian injury. FPB can
automatically brake to detected pedestrians or bicyclists between 8 km/h (5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph). Automatic braking levels may be reduced under certain conditions, such as higher speeds.
FPB may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try and avoid a potential collision with a pedestrian or bicyclist. If this happens, automatic braking may engage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop. Firmly press the accelerator pedal to release automatic braking and the EPB.
{ Warning
FPB may alert or automatically brake the vehicle suddenly in situations where it is unexpected and undesired. It could falsely alert or brake for objects similar in shape or size to pedestrians or bicyclists, including shadows. This is normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so.
Automatic Braking can be disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems..
{ Warning
Using the Front Pedestrian Braking system while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system to Alert or Off when towing a trailer.
Cleaning the System
If FPB does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the rearview mirror may correct the issue.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)
The SBZA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone, or blind spot areas. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change
Driving and Operating 267
lanes. Since this system is part of the Lane Change Alert (LCA) system, read the entire LCA section before using this feature.
Lane Change Alert (LCA)
If equipped, the LCA system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding lane change crashes that occur with moving vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas or with vehicles rapidly approaching these areas from behind. The LCA warning display will light up in the corresponding outside mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on.
Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) is included as part of the LCA system.
{ Warning
LCA does not alert the driver to vehicles outside of the system detection zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. It may not provide alerts when changing lanes under all driving conditions. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.
268 Driving and Operating
LCA Detection Zones
1. SBZA Detection Zone 2. LCA Detection Zone The LCA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning area starts at approximately the middle of the vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft). Drivers are also warned of vehicles rapidly approaching from up to 70 m (230 ft) behind the vehicle.
How the System Works The LCA symbol lights up in the side mirrors when the system detects a moving vehicle in the next lane over that is in the side
blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone from behind. A lit LCA symbol indicates it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the LCA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.
Left Side Mirror Display
Right Side Mirror Display
When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror LCA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is in a forward gear, the left or right side mirror display will light up if a moving vehicle is detected in the next lane over in that blind zone or rapidly approaching that zone. If the turn signal is activated in the same direction as a detected vehicle, this display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes.
LCA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings
> Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems. If LCA is disabled by the driver, the LCA mirror displays will not light up.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The LCA system requires some driving for the system to calibrate to maximum performance. This calibration may occur more quickly if the vehicle is driven on a straight highway road with traffic and roadside objects (e.g., guardrails, barriers). During a trip, the LCA system is not operational until the vehicle first reaches a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph).
LCA displays may not come on when passing a vehicle quickly or for a stopped vehicle. LCA may alert to objects attached to the vehicle, such as a bicycle, or object extending out to either side of the vehicle. Attached objects may also interfere with the detection of vehicles. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the next lane over, especially in wet conditions or when driving on sharp curves. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to
guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.
LCA may not operate when the LCA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care 0 379. If the Driver Information Center (DIC) still displays the system unavailable message after cleaning both sides of the vehicle toward the rear corners of the vehicle, see your dealer.
If the LCA displays do not light up when moving vehicles are in the side blind zone or rapidly approaching this zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer.
Driving with a Trailer
If equipped with Lane Change Alert (LCA), the LCA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed.
Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer.
Side Bicycle Detection
If equipped, the system may detect a bicyclist approaching from the side or rear of the vehicle.
If this occurs, a chime will sound in the direction of the detection, and the Safety Alert Seat will pulse if enabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Bicyclist Detection is available when the vehicle is in D (Drive), P (Park), and for a short time after the vehicle is turned off.
If the vehicle detects a bicyclist when it is off, a DIC message may display and alert to the direction of the detection. In some cases, an Unavailable message may display. This is normal and does not mean that the system is broken.
Detection Zones
When the vehicle is in P (Park) or is turned off, a bicyclist can be detected 11 m (36 ft) behind the vehicle or 10 m (33 ft) to the side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is in D (Drive), a bicyclist can be detected 3 m (10 ft) behind the vehicle or to the side of the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 269
Turning the Feature On or Off
Bicyclist Detection can be turned on or off through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Collision/Detection Systems.
Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA)
If equipped, the Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA) system can detect a potential crash with a moving vehicle in the lane you are entering. It provides a brief, urgent turn of the steering wheel to alert you to take action to avoid a collision.
BZSA works with Lane Keep Assist (LKA) and Lane Change Alert (LCA). BZSA operates when the vehicle is in a forward gear, and only when LKA and LCA are enabled and able to assist. See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 273. See Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 267.
BZSA will provide a steering correction when your vehicle is about to leave the current lane of travel, with the possibility of a collision with a vehicle in the adjacent lane. This steering correction happens closer to the center of the lane and has a stronger steering correction than LKA. Unlike LKA, the
270 Driving and Operating
steering correction with BSZA will happen even if your turn signal is on in the direction of lane departure.
In addition to the BZSA steering
intervention, the A will turn amber, six
beeps or six seat pulses will occur, if equipped with Safety Alert Seat, and
8 or | will flash on the outside
rear view mirror.
{ Warning
Do not rely on Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA) to prevent crashes. This system does not replace the need to pay attention and drive safely. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in vehicle damage, injury, or death.
. BZSA performance may be affected by weather and road conditions.
. BZSA does not provide steering assistance to avoid a vehicle that is in, or has entered, your lane of travel.
. BZSA will not prevent a towed trailer from crossing into the adjacent lane. Always monitor the trailer position while towing to ensure it is in the (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
same lane as your vehicle. BZSA is only designed to detect when your vehicle unintentionally crosses detected lane lines.
Traffic Sign Assistant
If equipped, Traffic Sign Assistant recognizes designated traffic signs via the front camera located behind the windshield in front of the interior rear view mirror, and displays the detected speed limit in the Driver Information Center (DIC). Traffic Sign Assistant requires an active OnStar subscription. Additionally, speed limit information from the navigation system map database may be used.
Caution
The system is intended to assist the driver within a defined speed range to discern certain traffic signs. Always pay attention to posted speed limit signs.
Do not ignore traffic signs which are not displayed by the system.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
The system does not discern any signs other than the conventional traffic signs that might give or end a speed limit. It may not detect some electronic speed signs.
Depending on the weather conditions or problems with traffic signs, a traffic sign may not be recognized or a sign different from the actual traffic sign may be displayed.
Do not let this special feature tempt you into taking risks when driving.
Always adapt vehicle speed to the road conditions.
Driver assistance systems do not relieve the driver from full responsibility for vehicle operation.
Traffic signs that are detected are: . Speed Limit . Constraint Signs
Display Indication
The currently detected speed limit is displayed in the DIC until the next speed limit or end of speed limit sign is detected. Depending on the vehicle, the current valid speed limit is permanently displayed on the DIC or in the upper left of the instrument cluster.
A () symbol in a frame indicates there is a sign detected which cannot be clearly identified by the system.
A (/) symbol in a frame indicates that the feature is turned off or has failed.
See Instrument Cluster (Work Truck) 0 109 or Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 111.
Alert Function
If equipped, a chime may sound when you have exceeded the indicated speed limit, or if a new speed limit is detected.
The alert function can be turned on or off. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Display > Instrument Cluster.
Each time the vehicle is started, the customization options will be turned on.
System Reset
The content of the traffic sign display can be cleared. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Display > Instrument Cluster.
Upon successful reset, a () symbol displays until the next traffic sign is detected or provided by the navigation system map data. In some cases, traffic sign memory is cleared automatically by the system.
Alert function will automatically be turned on when the system is reset.
Navigation System Traffic Sign Detection
The currently displayed sign can either originate from sign detection using the camera, or from the navigation system map data. If the currently displayed sign originates from map data and the map information changes, a new sign will be displayed. This may lead to detection of a new sign although no sign on the road may have been passed. If the map data is unavailable, Traffic Sign Assistant will turn off automatically.
Driving and Operating 271
Limitations
Traffic sign memory may not operate correctly if: . The area of the windshield, where the
front camera is located, is not clean or is affected by foreign objects, e.g., stickers, window tinting, etc.
. Traffic signs are completely or partially covered, are too low or high or difficult to discern.
. Traffic signs are incorrectly mounted or are damaged.
. Traffic signs do not comply with the approved traffic sign standards.
. The speed limit is displayed by certain types of electronic speed signs.
. There are adverse environmental conditions, e.g., heavy rain, snow, direct sunlight or shadows.
. The headlights are dirty or not correctly aligned when driving at night.
. The navigation map data is out of date. . The navigation map is unavailable.
Driver Attention Assist
If equipped, Driver Attention Assist alerts the driver to pay closer attention to the road ahead. Driver Attention Assist uses a
272 Driving and Operating
camera-based Driver Monitoring System. The Driver Monitoring System on the steering column continually monitors the driver's head movements and eye gaze location to determine if the driver is drowsy or fatigued. Depending on the level of the driver's distraction or drowsiness, Driver Attention Assist will provide visual warnings, chimes, and, if equipped, haptic movements to gently guide the driver to look back at the road.
Sunglasses, hats, or other types of clothing that change the shape of the head may interfere with camera performance. To improve camera performance, raise or lower the steering wheel, or change the seat position.
Driver Attention Assist does not record video or audio. It is only active while driving with the feature enabled.
How to Activate Driver Attention Assist
Driver Attention Assist turns on automatically every time the vehicle is started. The feature can be enabled or disabled through vehicle settings. To view available settings from the infotainment screen, touch Settings > Vehicle > Driver Attention Assist > Drowsiness Detection.
Drowsiness Alerts
Depending on the drowsiness level, Driver Attention Assist will display escalating alerts in the instrument cluster. These alerts progress as the drowsiness level increases. Each level is designated by a coffee cup and a Driver Information Center (DIC) message recommending that the driver consider taking a rest break. Depending on the driver's drowsiness level, the system will also send chimes or haptic alerts, if equipped with Safety Alert Seat. The higher alerts will be seen more frequently. Not all alerts may occur during a drowsy event.
When the maximum drowsiness alert occurs, the driver will be presented with the following options on the infotainment screen:
. Phone a Friend . Place an OnStar call . Navigate to Nearest Point of Interest (POI)
Select an option from the list and follow the instructions displayed on infotainment screen.
Cleaning the Camera
The camera lens cover on the steering column may become dirty over time. If this occurs, clean the lens cover with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it. Never use abrasive cloths, cleaners, or corrosive chemicals of any kind on the lens cover.
Limitations
Some factors can impact the performance of the Driver Attention Assist feature, causing it to not to function as intended. These include (but are not limited to):
. Damage to the Driver Monitoring System, camera, or lens.
. The camera being blocked by the steering wheel, hands, or objects.
If there is a problem with the system, a DIC message or icon in the instrument cluster may display.
Lane Keep Assist (LKA)
If equipped, LKA may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. This system uses a camera to detect lane markings. The LKA system can be ready to assist at speeds between approximately 60 km/h (37 mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph). On some vehicles, the system will instead operate above 50 km/h (31 mph). LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a detected lane marking. It may also provide a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert if the vehicle unintentionally crosses a detected lane marking.
The LKA system is not intended to keep the vehicle centered in the lane. LKA will not assist or alert if the turn signal is active, or if it detects that you are accelerating, braking, or actively steering. LKA can be overridden by turning the steering wheel. If the system detects you are steering intentionally across a lane marker, the LDW alert may not be given. Do not expect the LDW alert to occur when you are intentionally crossing the lane marker.
{ Warning
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. It may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give a Lane Departure Warning (LDW) alert, even if a lane marking is detected.
The LKA and LDW systems may not:
. Provide an alert or enough steering assist to avoid a lane departure or crash.
. Detect lane markings under poor weather or visibility conditions. This can occur if the windshield or headlamps are blocked by dirt, snow, or ice; if they are not in proper condition; or if the sun shines directly into the camera.
. Detect road edges.
. Detect lanes on winding or hilly roads.
If LKA only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only assist or provide an LDW alert when approaching the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marking. Even with LKA and LDW, you must steer the vehicle.
(Continued)
Driving and Operating 273
Warning (Continued)
Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield, headlamps, and camera sensors clean and in good repair. Do not use LKA in bad weather conditions or on roads with unclear lane markings, such as construction zones.
{ Warning
Using LKA on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Turn the system off.
{ Warning
LKA will not alert the driver if a towed trailer crosses into an adjacent lane of travel. Serious injury or property damage may occur if the trailer moves into another lane. Always monitor the trailer position while towing to make sure it is within the same lane as the tow vehicle.
274 Driving and Operating
How the System Works
LKA uses a camera sensor installed on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror to detect lane markings. It may provide brief steering assist if it detects an unintended lane departure. It may further provide an audible alert or the driver seat may pulse indicating that a lane marking has been crossed. The system does not provide an LDW when intentionally steering across a lane marker.
To turn LKA on and off, press A on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. If equipped, the indicator light on the button comes on when LKA is on and turns off when LKA is disabled. In some vehicles, you must press the button for more than three seconds to turn LKA off.
LKA is not available when Terrain Mode, Snow/Ice Mode, or Off-Road Mode is selected.
LKA may also not be available in extremely cold temperatures of less than approximately -30° f (-34° c).
See Driver Mode Control 0 207. See Four-Wheel Steering 0 209.
When attempting to enable LKA in any of the above conditions, LKA UNAVAILABLE will display.
When on, A is white, if equipped,
indicating that the system is not ready to
assist. A is green if LKA is ready to
assist. LKA may assist by gently turning the steering wheel if the vehicle approaches a
detected lane marking. A is amber when
assisting. It may also provide an LDW alert
by flashing A amber if the vehicle
crosses a detected lane marking. Additionally, there may be three chimes, or the driver seat may pulse three times, on the right or left, depending on the lane departure direction.
Take Steering
The LKA system does not continuously steer the vehicle. If LKA does not detect active driver steering, an alert and chime may be provided. Steer the vehicle to dismiss. LKA may become temporarily unavailable after repeated take steering alerts.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly
The system performance may be affected by:
. Close vehicles ahead.
. Sudden lighting changes, such as when driving through tunnels.
. Banked roads.
. Roads with poor lane markings, such as two-lane roads.
If the LKA system is not functioning properly when lane markings are clearly visible, cleaning the windshield may help.
A camera blocked message may display if the camera is blocked. Some driver assistance systems may have reduced performance or not work at all. An LKA or LDW unavailable message may display if the systems are temporarily unavailable. This message could be due to a blocked camera. The LKA system does not need service. Clean the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror.
LKA assistance and/or LDW alerts may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. Turn LKA off if these conditions continue.
Surround Vision Recorder
If equipped, this system records video from the surround vision cameras to a USB flash drive. Audio is not recorded. A USB flash drive with at least 64GB of storage, with a FAT32 file system, or MS-DOS (FAT) if formatting on a Mac, and USB 3.0 or greater is required.
Continuous use of the Surround Vision Recorder will degrade the USB flash drive and reduce its longevity. A replacement flash drive will eventually be needed.
Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port in the center console. Eject the USB flash drive using the button in the settings menu before removing the USB flash drive from the vehicle. To access settings, select Surround Vision Recorder on the infotainment home screen. Removing it without using the eject button could corrupt the video file and/or the USB flash drive.
Activate : After inserting a USB flash drive, tap Surround Vision Recorder on the infotainment home screen and follow the prompts. Once completed, recording will start automatically when the app is closed.
Recording continues until it is turned off in the settings screen, the app is reopened, or the vehicle is turned off.
Deactivate : Tap Surround Vision Recorder on the infotainment home screen. Toggle off Continuous Recording in settings.
Select from the following when the vehicle is in P (Park) and the video player is open:
Exit : Tap the infotainment home screen button to return to the home screen.
Video Timeline : Tap to view the video timeline. The video timeline displays video thumbnails from each drive that can be played back. Drag the timeline to the desired date/time to begin playback.
Rewind : Tap to return to the previous video.
Play/Pause : Tap to play or pause a recorded video.
Fast Forward : Tap to advance to the next video.
Camera Views : Tap the camera icon buttons on the vehicle image to switch between camera views. The default camera view shows the front of the vehicle.
In addition:
Driving and Operating 275
. The recorded video is stored on the USB flash drive in five-minute-long files.
. All files can be viewed on the playback app or when the USB flash drive is read by a personal computer (PC).
. Once the USB flash drive has recorded two hours of video, the oldest files will be overwritten.
Delete Data : Remove the USB flash drive from the vehicle and insert into a PC to manually delete the file.
Surround Vision Recorder may not work if:
. No USB flash drive is present. Make sure you have inserted a USB flash drive meeting the specifications above. If already inserted, remove it and insert again.
. The USB flash drive is not properly formatted. Format the USB flash drive on your PC as FAT32,or MS-DOS(FAT) on Mac, and try again.
. The USB flash drive or video files are corrupt. Remove the USB flash drive, format it on a computer, and try again.
276 Driving and Operating
. The USB flash drive does not have enough capacity. Make sure you have at least a 64GB USB flash drive with no previous data. If previous data exists, remove it from the USB flash drive.
. There is a system error. Follow the prompts on screen to resolve the error.
Charging
When to Charge
When the high voltage battery is low, the following charging messages may display on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
CHARGE VEHICLE SOON : The battery needs to be charged soon.
REDUCED ACCELERATION DRIVE WITH CARE : The accelerator pedal response is reduced and the remaining range value changes to LOW, charge the vehicle immediately. See Propulsion Power Messages 0 138.
OUT OF ENERGY, CHARGE VEHICLE NOW : The battery charge is fully depleted. The vehicle will slow to a stop. Brake and steering assist will continue operating. Once stopped, turn the vehicle off.
Plug-In Charging
Plug-in charge times vary based on the battery condition, charge level, and the outside temperature. See Charging 0 125 for charge mode selection.
Do not allow the vehicle to remain in temperature extremes for long periods without being driven or plugged in. When temperatures are below 0 °C (32 °F) and above 32 °C (90 °F), plug in the vehicle to maximize high voltage battery life.
In extreme temperature conditions, a full charge will take additional time.
Charging will slow down as the battery fills up. Charge the battery to 80% for daily driving, or when driving in mountainous terrain. The vehicle can be charged above 80% for long trips when not driving in mountainous terrain.
GM recommends the following:
. Unless your drive requires a full charge, charge the high voltage battery to 80% or less.
. Avoid allowing the high voltage battery to fall below 20% charged, if possible. See Battery - North America 0 330.
. If your route includes steep mountain terrain or if you are towing a trailer, it is important that your battery charge level is 80% or less to maximize regenerative braking performance.
It is normal to hear fans, pumps, and electrical devices clicking while the vehicle is turned off and charging.
The vehicle does not require indoor charging area ventilation before, during, or after charging.
The vehicle cannot be driven while the charge cord is plugged into the vehicle.
If the vehicle is turned on while plugged in, use the power button on the center stack to turn the vehicle off.
Caution
To avoid damage to the vehicle, make sure the charging cord plug is in good condition, is not worn or damaged, and is connected securely to the vehicle's charging port. If vehicle charging is intermittent, disconnect the cord and inspect for damage. An excessively worn or damaged AC or DC charging cord plug
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
may result in an intermittent connection and potential damage to the vehicle's charging port.
There are several infotainment screens that will display depending on the current charging status. See Charging 0 125.
Charging Override
A CHARGING OVERRIDE/INTERRUPTION OCCURRED message may display to indicate that a charging override or interruption has occurred due to one or more of the following events: . Override of the charge settings by the
owner. . Unintended interruption of AC power at
the vehicle's charge port. . Interruption of charging by the utility
company.
AC Charging
A loss of AC power alert may sound for a short time if AC power is lost for over one minute. This sound alert can be turned off. See Charging 0 125.
AC Charge Cord Vehicle Plug To Start AC Charging 1. Put the vehicle in P (Park).
2. The charge port door is on the rear drivers side of the vehicle. Push the rearward edge of the charge port door and release to open.
Driving and Operating 277
In cold weather conditions, ice may form around the charge port door. Remove ice from the area before attempting to open or close the charge port door. 3. Plug the charge cord into the electrical outlet. To verify the charge cord status, see Electrical Requirements for Battery Charging 0 291 and Charge Cord 0 284. For instructions to set cord limit settings for a charge session, see Charging 0 125.
4. Plug in the AC charge cord into the vehicle charge port . Make sure the AC vehicle plug is fully connected to the AC charge port. If it is not properly connected, the vehicle may not be charged.
278 Driving and Operating
5. Verify that the Headlight Charging Status Indicator (CSI) illuminates on the headlamps (if enabled), charge port light turns on, and an audible chirp occurs. See Charging Status Feedback 0 281.
To End AC Charging
1. Unlock the charge cord from the vehicle by pressing the button on the top of the charge cord plug. Unplug the charge cord from the vehicle.
2. Close the charge port door by pressing firmly in the center until it latches.
3. Unplug the charge cord from the electrical outlet.
4. Place the charge cord into the storage case.
DC Charging
DC Charging Station Hardware
The vehicle can be charged using DC charging equipment typically found at service stations and other public locations.
Check the charging station DC vehicle plug for compatibility with the DC charge port on this vehicle. This vehicle is compatible with a Combined Charging System 1 (CCS1) connector.
When recharging at a DC charge station, the charging cable connected to the vehicle must be less than 10 m (33 ft) in length to meet functionality and regulatory requirements.
{ Warning
Do not use the charging station if the handle has defects such as cracks, exposed wires, burnt or missing pins, or any other damage. A damaged handle may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle, the charging port or other property.
For maximum charging performance, and to prevent charging interruptions or damage to the high voltage battery and vehicle:
. Remove your hands from the charging handle once it has been plugged in. If not done, this can cause a charging interruption.
. Ensure that the charge cord plug clicks.
Follow the steps listed on the charging station to perform a DC vehicle charge.
If for any reason DC charging does not begin or is interrupted, check the DC charging station display for messages. Unplug the cord to restart the DC charging process.
To Start DC Charging
1. Put the vehicle in P (Park).
2. Press the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) switch. See Electric Parking Brake 0 203.
3. Push the rearward edge of the charge port door and release to open the door.
In cold weather conditions, ice may form around the charge port door. The charge port door may not open on the first attempt. Remove ice from the area and repeat attempting to open the charge port door.
4. Unlatch the DC charging dust cover and push it to the side.
5. Plug in the DC charge cord into the vehicle charge port. Make sure that the DC vehicle plug is fully connected to the DC charge port. If it is not properly connected, the vehicle may not be charged. Check the Driver Information Center (DIC) to make sure the vehicle plug is connected properly.
6. Follow the steps listed on the charging station to start charging.
7. When charging is active, the DC vehicle plug is locked to the DC charge port and cannot be disconnected.
Driving and Operating 279
8. Verify that the Headlight Charging Status Indicator (CSI) illuminates on the headlamps (if enabled), charge port light turns on, and an audible chirp occurs. See Charging Status Feedback 0 281.
Caution
Do not attempt to disconnect the DC vehicle plug while charging is active. This action may damage the vehicle or charging station hardware.
To Stop DC Charging -- Automatic
When the vehicle no longer needs power from the charging station, it stops charging and the DC vehicle plug unlocks from the DC charge port.
Energy can still be consumed from the charging station when the vehicle displays and indicators show that the battery is fully charged. This is to ensure the battery is in optimal temperature operating range to maximize vehicle range. See Charging 0 125.
280 Driving and Operating
To End DC Charging
When the vehicle is fully charged, charging automatically stops and the plug unlocks. You can also manually stop charging using the button on the DC vehicle plug, the controls at the charging station or by tapping "Stop" on the Charging page on your infotainment screen.
If the vehicle plug does not unlock from the vehicle charge port after a charge, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
1. Unplug the DC vehicle plug from the DC charge port on the vehicle and close the dust cover.
2. The charge port door automatically closes when the charge cord is unplugged.
3. Manually disengage the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) before driving the vehicle.
Emergency Manual Charge Cord Release
The charge cord is equipped with an emergency manual charge cord release in the event the cord cannot be released normally in DC charging.
1. Reach around the tire to find the emergency manual charge cord release.
2. Pull the emergency manual charge cord release handle. The DC charge cord will release.
To Stop AC or DC Charging
Controls on the charging station can be used to stop the charge process at any time.
To stop charging when inside the vehicle, use the Stop Charge button on the Charging screen. See "Active Charging" under Charging 0 125.
Delayed Charging Override
To temporarily override a delayed charge event, unplug the charge cord from the charge port and then plug it back in within five seconds. A single audible chirp will sound and charging will begin immediately.
To cancel a temporary override, unplug the charge cord, wait for 10 seconds, and then plug the charge cord back in. A double audible chirp will sound and charging will be delayed.
See Charging 0 125 for advanced charge scheduling options.
Charging Status Feedback
This vehicle is equipped with a charge status light and a headlamp Charge Status Indicator (CSI).
Driving and Operating 281
When the charge cord is plugged in, a color appears to indicate the charging status.
The headlamp CSI bar is located on the headlamps. As charging occurs, the blue light bars on the headlamps fill towards the center of the vehicle.
282 Driving and Operating
Refer to the table for charging status feedback:
Charge Status Light Color Solid Blue Pulsing Blue
Headlamp Charge Status Indicator
Sound
None
None
Single light bar flashing
Two audible chirps
Blinking Green (the longer the blink, the higher the state of charge)
Solid Green Pulsing Red
Solid light bars represent the available state of charge. The remaining light bars build in a swipe pattern towards the center of the vehicle.
All light bars are solid
Off
One audible chirp
None None
None (upon plug-in)
None
None
Description Initial connection is successful. Charging is delayed by charging screen or by a total utility interruption. Charging will begin later. See Utility Interruption of Charging 0 291. Utility Override ("Demand Response"). Vehicle is actively charging.
Charging is complete. Error Check the charge cord connection. There may be no power supplied to the vehicle. Check the charge cord connection.
Charge Status Light Color None (after blue and green lights up)
None Flashing Green (the longer the blink, the higher the state of charge)
Pulsing Green
Driving and Operating 283
Headlamp Charge Status Indicator
None
None
Sound
None
Three audible chirps when the
driver door is opened
None
Four audible chirps
None
One audible chirp
Description
Check the charge cord connection. If the connection is good, this may indicate a power failure or a total utility interruption, and charging will begin later. It may also occur if a high voltage charging system fault is detected. See Utility Interruption of Charging 0 291 or Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure) 0 117.
The charge port door is open.
The currently set departure time cannot be met. May be due to charging power level or charge schedule setting factors. Refer to the charging screen for actual charge completion time. See Charging 0 125.
The vehicle is actively discharging through the vehicle to vehicle cord.
284 Driving and Operating
Charge Status Light Color None
Headlamp Charge Status Indicator
Sound
None
Four audible chirps
Charge Cord
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When storing the charge cord in the vehicle, ensure the charge cord bag is secured. Depending on the storage location, tether the charge cord bag to vehicle.
Description
When using Persistent Power, the vehicle is approaching the Range Reserve Limit or the Timer (if enabled) to end the session.
This symbol indicates risk of electrical shock.
The vehicle comes with a portable charge cord used to charge the high voltage battery. When used correctly, the charge cord provides a safe connection between a standard electrical outlet and your vehicle's on-board charger.
1. 120-volt and 240-volt Connectors 2. Charge Cord Control Box and Charge
Cord Status Indicator 3. Charge Cord Vehicle Plug
Important Information about Portable Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging
{ Danger
Improper use of portable electric vehicle charge cords may cause a fire, electrical shock, or burns, and may result in damage to property, serious injury, or death.
. Do not use extension cords, multi-outlet power strips, splitters, grounding adapters, surge protectors, or similar devices.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is worn or damaged, or will not hold the plug firmly in place.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is not properly grounded.
. Do not use an electrical outlet that is on a circuit with other electrical loads.
{ Warning
When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
. Read all the safety warnings and instructions before using this product. Failure to follow the warnings and the instructions may result in electric shock, fire, and/or serious injury.
. Never leave children unattended near the vehicle while the vehicle is charging and never allow children to play with the charge cord.
. If the plug provided does not fit the electrical outlet, do not modify the plug. Arrange for a qualified electrician to inspect the electrical outlet.
. Do not put fingers into the electric vehicle connector.
{ Warning
. To reduce the risk of fire, installations shall comply with the requirements of National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 (USA), Canadian Electrical Code CSA (Continued)
Driving and Operating 285
Warning (Continued)
22.1 and IEC 60364 Electrical installations in buildings, depending on the region in which the unit is being installed. The installer shall comply with any additional local requirements mandated by the country and/or municipality.
. Do not use this product if the flexible power cord or the electric vehicle cable is frayed, has broken insulation, or shows any other signs of damage.
. For Canada only: Not for use in commercial garages.
. Do not use this product if the enclosure or the vehicle plug is broken, cracked, open, or shows any other indication of damage.
. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate electrical outlet that is properly installed in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. Do not modify the plug provided with the product. If the plug does not fit the electrical outlet, have a proper electrical outlet installed by a qualified electrician. If ground is missing, the (Continued)
286 Driving and Operating
Warning (Continued)
charge cord indicators will indicate an electrical system fault and the vehicle may not charge.
{ Warning
Use of charge cord adaptors may cause electrical overheating, resulting in vehicle damage or personal injury. Do not use adaptors with the charge cord.
. Charging an EV can stress a building's electrical system more than a typical household appliance.
. Before plugging the charge cord into any electrical outlet, have a qualified electrician inspect and verify the electrical system (electrical outlet, wiring, junctions, and protection devices) is suitable for a heavy-duty service.
. Electrical outlets may wear out with normal usage or may be damaged over time, making them unsuitable for EV charging.
. Check the electrical outlet/plug while charging and discontinue use if the electrical outlet/plug appears hot, then have the electrical outlet serviced by a qualified electrician.
. When charging outdoors, plug into an electrical outlet that is weatherproof.
. Do not attempt to use the charge cord with non-utility supplied electrical power sources such as backup generating equipment.
. If the charge cord overheats, remove from direct sunlight.
. Disconnect the charge cord from the vehicle before disconnecting the attachment plug from the wall.
. When charging your vehicle, ensure all components are connected properly, there is no damage, and the outlet has power.
. Do not use the charge cord in severe weather conditions.
Installing and Operating the Portable Charge Cord
The charge cord must be on a dedicated individual branch circuit. A dedicated circuit ensures that there is enough power available without overloading the system.
If a dedicated circuit is not used, the circuit breaker could trip or open. If a dedicated circuit is not available, contact a qualified electrician. See "Grounding Instructions" later on in this section. The charge cord must operate at a temperature between -40 °C (-40 °F) and 55 °C (131 °F). 1. Snap the desired connectors into the
control box before making any other connections.
Ensure the connectors are fully inserted into the control box or the charge cord will not work properly.
2. Mount the charge cord to reduce strain on the electrical outlet/plug. Mount the control box in a suitable location to prevent physical stress on the electrical outlets and charge cord components.
Mount the control box directly to the wall or stud near a suitable electrical outlet. The retention eyelets on the control box are optimized for use with #10 drywall screws.
3. Handle electrical cables with care. Do not sharply bend, pull, or crush cables.
4. Connect the attachment plug to the electrical outlet. Refer to the "Charge Cord Status Indicator" section to ensure the charge cord is working properly.
5. Insert the vehicle plug into the vehicle charge port to initiate charging.
6. To disconnect the charge cord, press and hold the latch release button on the vehicle plug. Once disconnected from the vehicle, the charge cord can be unplugged from the wall.
Driving and Operating 287
Avoid the following actions:
. Placing the control box and charge cord in a location where it may be submerged in water (or other liquid substances) or subject to physical abuse.
. Coiling or storing the charge cord in a location it may be crushed or forced into space to form a circle smaller than 178 mm (7 in).
. Restricting the cable rotation or applying excessive pulling force while wrapping.
. Wrapping the cable around the housing of the control box.
Charge Cord Status Indicator
After plugging in the charge cord, it will perform a quick self test.
Verify the charge cord status on the charge cord control box. The charge cord uses a combination of red and green indicators to display the status of the charge cord.
288 Driving and Operating
Green
On Blinking Blinking
Blinking
Blinking
Red
Blinking
Three blinks
One blink
Reason
Action
The charge cord has no power.
Verify all components are connected properly, there is no damage, and the outlet has power. If the error continues, contact your dealer.
The charge cord is ready to use.
Plug the charge cord into the vehicle charge port to begin charging.
Vehicle is actively charging.
No action needed.
An error has occurred and the charge cord is rebooting.
Wait for the charge cord to return to a solid green. If it reboots two or three more times, unplug the charge cord from the vehicle. If the error continues, contact your dealer.
Due to internal overheating from the If unplugging and plugging back in does not work, move
charge cord control box, charging is the charge cord away from direct sunlight and/or hot
at a reduced rate.
surfaces such as asphalt paving.
Due to overheating on the AC plug or Disconnect from the electrical outlet. If the error
electrical outlet, charging is at a
persists, have a qualified electrician inspect and repair
reduced rate.
the issue.
Driving and Operating 289
Green
Red One blink
Two blinks On
Reason The charger is troubleshooting after an error and requires a reboot.
There is a Ground Fault Circuit Interruption (GFCI) fault. There is a cordset internal fault.
Action
Try the following actions to restore the full charging rate:
- Verify all components are connected properly. Ensure the connectors are fully inserted into the control box or the charge cord will not work properly.
- Unplug and plug in the connector.
- If the charge cord is in a warm environment, try charging in a cooler area.
- Try a different outlet or connector, if available. If the error continues, contact your dealer.
After 15 minutes, it will auto-reset. Try a different connector, if available. If the error continues, contact your dealer.
Immediately disconnect from the electrical outlet and the vehicle. Contact your dealer for a replacement.
If the charge cord status indicator is not lit, ensure the electrical outlet has power.
Charge Cord Auto-Restart
Your charge cord set is equipped with the auto-restart feature. When charging your vehicle, if there is an error detected, the auto-restart feature works to eliminate the error and resume charging.
If the error is caused by a Ground Fault Circuit Interruption (GFCI) fault, the charger attempts to restart for a 15 minute interval. After the fourth attempt to restart, the charger shuts down and the red indicator stays on. Unplug and plug the charge cord
290 Driving and Operating
back in to reset the charging. If this error continues, stop charging your vehicle. See your dealer for service.
Charge Level Selection
{ Warning
Using a charge level that exceeds the electrical circuit or electrical outlet capacity may start a fire or damage the electrical circuit. Use the lowest charge level until a qualified electrician inspects the electrical circuit capacity. Use the lowest charge level if the electrical circuit or electrical outlet capacity is not known.
Charge level selection can be made using the Settings tab in the Charging app on the infotainment display. For instructions to set cord limit settings for a charge session, see Charging 0 125.
Troubleshooting
Disconnect the charge cord from the vehicle and confirm that the attachment plug is not too hot to grasp before removing.
If it is not hot, manually reboot the charge cord by unplugging and plugging the attachment plug back into the electrical outlet. If the same fault reoccurs, test the charge cord with a different electrical outlet.
The charge cord monitors temperature at several locations and may reduce charging power or interrupt charging if temperatures become too high. The charge cord status indicators illuminate and identify this fault. In hot climates, move the charge cord away from direct sunlight and/or hot surfaces such as asphalt pavement for approximately 30 minutes.
If there are signs of melting or scorching, do not touch the charge cord or attachment plug. Have a qualified electrician inspect and repair the issue.
If there are no signs of damage, check how firm the fit of the plug is. If the plug easily pulls away from the electrical outlet, test the plug on a known good electrical outlet. If the fault condition returns, have your charge cord inspected by your dealership. If the fault does not return, stop using the suspected circuit and have a qualified electrician inspect and repair the issue.
Grounding Instructions
{ Warning
Improper connection of the charge cord ground may cause electrical shock. Check with a qualified electrician if there is doubt as to whether the charge circuit is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the product. If it will not fit the electrical outlet, have a proper electrical outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
The charge circuit must be grounded. If the charge circuit should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for the electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord that has an equipment grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
User Maintenance
Do not attempt to perform maintenance on the charge cord, see your dealer for service. Clean the charge cord and control box with a dry cloth and do not use any cleaning products.
Moving and Storage
When moving the charge cord equipment, use care to prevent damage to the equipment. Do no twist, pull, or drag the charge cord. Do not lift or carry the equipment by the charge cord only.
Keep the charge cord mounted and plugged into the electrical outlet for daily use. If the charge cord will not be used for a long period, unplug it and store in a clean, temperature controlled location between -40 °C (-40 °F) and 85 °C (185 °F).
FCC Information
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Charge Cord Specifications
515P Cordset : 120 volts, 12 amps
1450P Cordset : 240 volts, 32 amps
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Utility Interruption of Charging
This vehicle responds to requests through the utility company to limit or completely block electrical power grid use. This feature is inactive during DC charging. A utility interruption will lengthen the vehicle charge time.
When electrical grid power is completely blocked, the vehicle will not charge until the utility interruption has expired. The vehicle should be left plugged in so that the vehicle will automatically resume charging.
Changing the charge mode to Charge Now or performing a delayed charging override will not disable a utility interruption.
A message will display on the instrument cluster indicating that a utility interruption has occurred.
Charging Station Troubleshooting
If the vehicle does not charge after being plugged in to a residential 240-volt charging station:
1. Verify that the charge mode is set to Charge Now.
Driving and Operating 291
2. Verify that the charging station circuit breaker is not tripped.
3. Plug the portable charge cord into the wall outlet, verify that the indicator light on the charge cord is solid green, and connect it to the vehicle. See "Charge Cord Status Indicators" in Charge Cord 0 284.
4. If the vehicle charges with the portable charge cord and a different 240-volt charging station, such as a public station, there may be a problem with the charging station. Contact the charging station manufacturer for service.
Electrical Requirements for Battery Charging
The vehicle is designed for compatibility with most standard vehicle charging equipment in the region of sale. Check for charger compatibility before purchasing a charger.
The portable charge cord defaults to 120 volts and 8 amps. Have the outlet inspected before changing to 12 amps on the Charging screens. If 12 amps is selected, a pop-up will show on the infotainment display to confirm the change to 12 amps. See the "Active Charging" section under Charging 0 125.
292 Driving and Operating
Caution
Do not use portable or stationary backup generating equipment to charge the vehicle. This may cause damage to the vehicle's charging system. Only charge the vehicle from utility supplied power.
Trailer Towing
General Towing Information
Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle to tow a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer.
To tow a disabled vehicle, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 377. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing 0 379.
Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips
{ Warning
You can lose control when towing a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load, the vehicle may not stop as expected. You and others could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering affects handling, acceleration, braking, and durability. Successful and safe trailering requires proper use of the correct equipment.
The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before towing a trailer.
When towing a trailer:
. Become familiar with, and follow all state and local laws that apply to trailer towing. These requirements vary from state to state.
. State laws may require the use of extended side view mirrors. If your visibility is limited or restricted while towing, install extended side view mirrors on your vehicle, even if not required.
. Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 mi) of vehicle use to prevent damage to vehicle.
. Do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle during the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing.
. Tow in D (Drive). Tow/Haul Mode is recommended for heavier trailers. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
. One-Pedal Driving can be a useful feature when towing. See One-Pedal Driving 0 201.
The following advanced driver assistance features should be turned off when towing a trailer, and may turn off automatically when a trailer is detected:
. Park Assist
. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)
. Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
. Rear Cross Traffic Braking (RCTB)
. Lane Change Alert (LCA)
. Super Cruise and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), unless equipped with trailering functionality, see Adaptive Cruise Control (Advanced) 0 216.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) and Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) should be set to Alert unless equipped with Super Cruise.
Do not use Automatic Parking Assist (APA) while towing a trailer.
Towing a trailer requires experience. The combination of the vehicle and trailer is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Become familiar with handling and braking of the combination by driving on a level road surface before driving on public roads.
The trailer structure, the tires, and the brakes must be all be rated to carry the intended cargo. Inadequate trailer equipment can cause the combination to operate in an unexpected or unsafe manner. Before driving, inspect all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. See Towing Equipment 0 299. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then manually apply the trailer brake controller to check the trailer brakes work. During the trip, occasionally check that the cargo and trailer are secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are working.
Towing with a Stability Control System
When towing, the stability control system might be heard. The system reacts to vehicle movement caused by the trailer, which mainly occurs during cornering. This is normal when towing heavier trailers.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving without a trailer to help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.
Driving and Operating 293
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination of the vehicle and trailer will not accelerate as quickly and is much longer than the vehicle alone. It is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Pass on level roadways. Avoid passing on hills if possible.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move that hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Caution
Turn more slowly and make wider arcs when towing a trailer to prevent damage to your vehicle. Making very sharp turns could cause the trailer to contact the vehicle.
Make wider turns than normal when towing, so the trailer does not go over soft shoulders, over curbs, or strike road signs,
294 Driving and Operating
trees, or other objects. Always signal turns well in advance. Do not steer or brake suddenly.
Driving on Grades
Reduce speed before starting down a long or steep downhill grade. Use regenerative braking to help slow the vehicle or maintain speed by keeping the vehicle in gear and limiting the initial battery charge to 80% or less. Avoid using Regen on Demand. See Hill and Mountain Roads 0 189.
Viewing Systems
If equipped, the viewing systems on the vehicle can improve visibility while hitching, backing up, and driving with a trailer. See Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 0 243.
Parking on Hills
{ Warning
To prevent serious injury or death, always park your vehicle and trailer on a level surface when possible.
When parking your vehicle and trailer on a hill:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park). Turn the wheels toward the curb if facing downhill or toward traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the electric parking brake and shift into P (Park).
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. . Start the vehicle. . Shift into the desired gear. . Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Launching and Retrieving a Boat
Backing the Trailer into the Water
{ Warning
. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle before backing onto the sloped part of the ramp. Lower the driver and passenger side windows before backing onto the ramp. This will provide a means of escape in the unlikely event the vehicle slides into the water.
. If the boat launch surface is slippery, have the driver remain in the vehicle with the brake pedal applied while the boat is being launched. The boat launch can be especially slippery at low tide when part of the ramp was previously submerged at high tide. Do not back onto the ramp to launch the boat if you are not sure the vehicle can maintain traction.
. Do not move the vehicle if someone is in the path of the trailer. Some parts of the trailer might be underwater and not visible to people who are assisting in launching the boat.
Disconnect the trailer wiring before backing the trailer into the water to prevent damage to the electrical circuits. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after removing the trailer from the water. If the trailer has electric brakes that can function when the trailer is submerged, it might help to leave the electrical trailer connector attached to maintain trailer brake functionality while on the boat ramp.
To back the trailer into the water:
1. Slowly back down the boat ramp until the boat is floating, but no further than necessary.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park).
3. Have someone place chocks under the front wheels of the vehicle.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal to allow the chocks to absorb the load of the trailer.
5. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park).
6. Release the brake pedal.
Pulling the Trailer from the Water
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the vehicle and shift into D (Drive).
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Let up on the brake pedal.
5. Drive slowly until the tires are clear of the chocks.
6. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
7. Slowly pull the trailer from the water.
Caution
If the vehicle tires begin to spin and the vehicle begins to slide toward the water, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and apply the brake pedal. Seek help to have the vehicle towed up the ramp.
Maintenance when Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when used to tow trailers. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389. It is especially important to check the cooling system and brake system before and during each trip.
Check periodically that all nuts and bolts on the trailer hitch are tight.
Driving and Operating 295
Trailer Towing
Caution
Towing a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To tow a trailer correctly, follow the directions in this section and see your dealer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, and durability. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
The following information has many time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. Read this section carefully before pulling a trailer.
296 Driving and Operating
Trailer Weight
{ Warning
Never exceed the towing capacity for your vehicle.
Safe trailering requires monitoring the weight, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how frequently the vehicle is used to tow a trailer.
Trailer Weight Ratings
When towing a trailer, the combined weight of the vehicle, vehicle contents, trailer, and trailer contents must be below all of the maximum weight ratings for the vehicle, including: . Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) . Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . Maximum Trailer Weight Rating . Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating . Gross Axle Weight Rating-Rear (GAWR-RR)
See "Weight-Distributing Hitch and Adjustment" under Towing Equipment 0 299 to determine if equalizer bars are required to obtain the maximum trailer weight rating.
See "Trailer Brakes" under Towing Equipment 0 299 to determine if brakes are required based on your trailer's weight.
The only way to be sure the weight is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip, getting individual weights for each of these items.
A trailering information label on the center pillar (B-pillar) shows tow rating information for the vehicle.
{ Warning
You and others could be seriously injured or killed if the trailer is too heavy or the trailer brakes are inadequate for the load. The vehicle may be damaged, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Only tow a trailer if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer.
Gross Combined Weight (GCW) Alert
If equipped, the GCW Alert can display a message, in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Vehicle-Trailer May Be Over GCW Rating : This message indicates that the estimated combined weight of the vehicle and trailer is high enough that the combined weight should be confirmed on a scale to make sure the GCWR is not exceeded.
Vehicle-Trailer Is Over GCW Rating : This message indicates that the estimated combined weight of the vehicle and trailer is high enough that it is likely that the vehicle's GCWR has been exceeded. The combined weight of the vehicle and trailer should be confirmed on a scale and reduced if necessary.
See "Gross Combined Weight Rating". The vehicle does not actually measure the loaded weight of your vehicle or trailer. It uses vehicle data to estimate these weights after you begin a trip.
The alert will not activate unless:
. The feature is turned on in the Trailering application, see Trailering App 0 309; and
. The vehicle-trailer combination is driven with enough acceleration events for the software algorithm to estimate the combined vehicle and trailer weight; and:
. The estimated weight is high enough to trigger the alert.
If you see the alert message, stop the vehicle when it is safe and check whether the vehicle and trailer are overloaded using a scale. See "Maximum Trailer Weight" below.
{ Warning
Always determine the actual weights of the loaded vehicle and trailer using a vehicle scale before beginning a trip. Never use the GCW Alert to determine whether the vehicle and trailer are properly loaded or overloaded. Do not drive with an overloaded vehicle or trailer. Death, serious injury, or property damage could occur.
GCWR is only one of the maximum weight ratings applicable to your vehicle and trailer. The GCW Alert does not estimate whether the vehicle alone exceeds the GVWR, the rear-axle weight exceeds GAWR-RR, the trailer exceeds the maximum trailer weight
rating or the trailer tongue weight exceeds the maximum trailer tongue weight rating. Always verify that the weight of the vehicle, vehicle contents, trailer, trailer contents and trailer tongue are below all of these maximum weight ratings. See "Maximum Trailer Weight" section below.
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
GCWR is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and accessories. Do not exceed the GCWR for your vehicle. The GCWR for the vehicle is on the Trailering Information Label.
To check that the weight of the vehicle and trailer are within the GCWR for the vehicle, follow these steps:
1. Start with the "curb weight" from the Trailering Information Label.
2. Add the weight of the trailer loaded with cargo and ready for the trip.
3. Add the weight of all passengers.
4. Add the weight of all cargo in the vehicle.
5. Add the weight of hitch hardware such as a draw bar, ball, load equalizer bars, or sway bars.
Driving and Operating 297
6. Add the weight of any accessories or aftermarket equipment added to the vehicle.
The resulting weight cannot exceed the GCWR value on the Trailering Information Label. The GCWR can also be confirmed by weighing the vehicle and trailer on a public scale. The vehicle and trailer should be loaded for the trip with passengers and cargo.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) For information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 191. When calculating the GVWR
298 Driving and Operating
with a trailer attached, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the weight the vehicle is carrying.
Maximum Trailer Weight
The maximum trailer weight rating is calculated assuming the tow vehicle has a driver, a front seat passenger, and all required trailering equipment. This value represents the heaviest trailer the vehicle can tow, but it may be necessary to reduce the trailer weight to stay within the GCWR, GVWR, maximum trailer tongue load, or GAWR-RR for the vehicle.
Use the Trailering Information Label to determine how much the trailer can weigh.
Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating
Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating is the allowable trailer tongue weight that the vehicle can support using a conventional trailer hitch. It may be necessary to reduce the overall trailer weight to stay within the maximum trailer tongue weight rating while still maintaining the correct trailer load balance.
The maximum trailer tongue weight rating is shown on the Trailering Information Label.
The trailer tongue weight contributes to the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW). GVW includes the curb weight of your vehicle, any passengers, cargo, equipment and the trailer tongue weight. Vehicle options, passengers, cargo, and equipment reduce the maximum allowable tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which also reduces the maximum allowable trailer weight. See "Trailer Load Balance" later in this section.
Trailer Load Balance The correct trailer load balance must be maintained to ensure trailer stability. Incorrect load balance is a leading cause of trailer sway.
The trailer tongue weight (1) should be 10 15% of the total loaded trailer weight (2). Some specific trailer types, such as boat trailers, fall outside of this range. Always refer to the trailer owner's manual for the recommended trailer tongue weight for each trailer. Never exceed the maximum loads for your vehicle, hitch and trailer. The trailer load balance percentage is calculated as: weight (1) divided by weight (2) times 100.
After loading the trailer, separately weigh the trailer and then the trailer tongue and calculate the trailer load balance percentage to see if the weights and distribution are appropriate for your vehicle. If the trailer weight is too high, it may be possible to transfer some of the cargo into your vehicle. If the trailer tongue weight is too high or too low, it may be possible to rearrange some of the cargo inside of the trailer.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle. Use the shortest hitch extension available to position the hitch ball closer to your vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of the trailer tongue weight on the trailer hitch and the rear axle.
If a cargo carrier is used in the trailer hitch receiver, choose a carrier that positions the load as close to the vehicle as possible. Make sure the total weight, including the carrier, is no more than half of the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR-RR)
The GAWR-RR is the total weight that can be supported by the rear axle of the vehicle. Do not exceed the GAWR-RR for the vehicle,
with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight-distributing hitch, do not exceed the GAWR-RR before applying the weight distribution spring bars.
The GAWR-RR for the vehicle is on the Trailering Information Label. For additional assistance with trailering or additional information, see your dealer.
Driving and Operating 299
Towing Equipment
Hitches
{ Warning
In order to avoid serious injury or property damage, always follow the hitch manufacturer's instructions when securing your draw bar/coupling device to the vehicle's hitch receiver.
Ensure that the draw bar/coupling device is secured with a locking retainer pin or other means such that rotation of the pin or locking mechanism will not cause the pin to back out or loosen during use. Failure to correctly secure the draw bar/ coupling device to the receiver can result in separation of the hitch/receiver while towing.
Conventional Hitch
A conventional hitch is bolted to the frame or cross member of the tow vehicle, and is generally rated Class 2, 3, 4, or 5.
Always use the correct hitch equipment for your vehicle. Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads can affect the trailer and the hitch.
300 Driving and Operating
Proper hitch equipment for your vehicle helps maintain control of the vehicle-trailer combination. Many trailers can be towed using a weight-carrying hitch with a coupler latched to the hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a pintle hook. Other trailers may require a weight-distributing hitch that uses spring bars to distribute the trailer tongue weight between your vehicle and trailer axles. See "Maximum Trailer Tongue Weight Rating" under Trailer Towing 0 295 for weight limits with various hitch types.
Never attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches. Only use frame-mounted hitches that do not attach to the bumper.
Consider using mechanical sway controls with any trailer. Ask a trailering professional about sway controls or refer to the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Weight-Distributing Hitch and Adjustment
A weight-distributing hitch may be useful with some trailers. Use the following guidelines to determine if a weight-distributing hitch should be used.
Vehicle Series EV Truck EV Truck
Trailer Weight Up to 3 175 kg (7,000 lb) Over 3 175 kg (7,000 lb)
Driving and Operating 301
Weight-Distributing Hitch Usage Optional Required
Hitch Distribution 50% 50%
1. Front of Vehicle 2. H1/H2 Body to Ground Distance
Adjusting the Equalizer Bars
1. Position the truck so that the trailer is ready to connect (Keep trailer detached).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening at the fender to the ground (H1).
3. Attach the vehicle to the trailer. Do not attach weight distribution bars at this time.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to the ground (H2).
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturer's recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately H2- [(H2-H1)/2] (halfway between the two measured ride heights).
6. Visually inspect the trailer and weight distributing hitch to ensure that the manufacturer's recommendations have been met.
302 Driving and Operating
Measurement H1 H2
H2-H1 (H2-H1)/2 H2- [(H2-H1)/2]
Height Example 1500 (mm) 1000 1050 50 25 1025
Adjusting the Equalizer Bars with Air Suspension
1. Adjust the vehicle air suspension to Normal height. See Air Suspension 0 209.
2. Position the truck so that the trailer is ready to connect. Keep the trailer detached.
3. Enable Service Mode on the vehicle air suspension in the center infotainment screen under Settings > Vehicle > Suspension.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening at the fender to the ground (H1).
5. Attach the vehicle to the trailer. Do not attach weight distribution bars at this time.
6. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to the ground (H2).
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturer's recommendations so that the height of the front fender is approximately H1+[(H2-H1)/2] (1/2 between the two measured ride heights, above the primary ride height {H1}).
8. Disable Service Mode on the vehicle air suspension.
9. Air suspension will automatically adjust ride height following Step 8.
10. Visually inspect the trailer and weight-distributing hitch to ensure that the manufacturer's recommendations have been met.
Measurement H1 H2
H2-H1 (H2-H1)/2 H2-[(H2-H1)/2]
Leveling the Trailer
Height Example with Air Suspension (mm)
1000
1050
50
25
1025
{ Warning
Always level the trailer front-to-back using the correct trailer hitch drawbar. Towing with a trailer that is not level can result in incorrect loading of trailer axles, springs, and tires, which can lead to trailer sway, trailer damage, and/or trailer tire blowouts resulting in an accident causing potential injury and/or death. Do not attempt to tow a trailer that is not level.
Select the correct hitch drawbar rise (1) or drop (2) to level the trailer.
Tires . Do not tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire on the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 303
. Tires must be properly inflated to support loads while towing a trailer. See Tires 0 345 for instructions on proper tire inflation.
Safety Chains
Always attach safety chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
If the trailer being towed weighs up to 2 271 kg (5,000 lb) with a factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be attached to the attaching points on the bumper; otherwise, safety chains should be attached to holes on the trailer hitch.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Always leave just enough slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Loaded trailers over 900 kg (2,000 lb) must be equipped with brake systems and with brakes for each axle. Trailer braking equipment conforming to Canadian
304 Driving and Operating
Standards Association (CSA) requirement CAN3-D313, or its equivalent, is recommended.
State or local regulations may require trailers to have their own braking system if the loaded weight of the trailer exceeds certain minimums that can vary from state to state. Read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly.
{ Warning
Never attempt to tamper with the hydraulic brake system for your trailer brakes. Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle's hydraulic brake system. If you do, both the vehicle antilock brakes and the trailer brakes may not function, which could result in a crash.
Trailer Lamps
Always check that all trailer lamps are working at the beginning of each trip, and periodically on longer trips.
If equipped, the Trailering App will monitor the right-hand turn/brake lamp circuit, left-hand turn/brake lamp circuit, running
lamp circuit, and reverse lamp circuits on the trailer. DIC messages and Trailering App alerts may be displayed if lighting circuit issues are detected on the trailer.
If a trailer cannot be detected, the trailer-related DIC messages and/or Trailering App alerts will not display.
Pressing START LIGHT TEST in the Trailering App automatically activates trailer lamps. The Trailering App is not a substitute for manually inspecting your trailer lamps. See Trailering App 0 309.
Trailer Connection and Lamp Messages
When a trailer is properly connected and working, no trailer connection or lamp messages appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC). However, if the vehicle detects an issue with a trailer connection or lamp, you may see the following DIC message(s):
. TRAILER DISCONNECTED CHECK CONNECTION appears when a connected trailer is disconnected. It appears immediately when the vehicle is on, or upon the next start-up if the trailer was disconnected while the vehicle was off. Check the trailer connection as appropriate.
. CHECK TRAILER XXX LAMP appears when there is a detected lamp or wiring fault on the trailer. Check the trailer wiring and lamps.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When properly connected, the trailer turn signals will illuminate to indicate the vehicle is turning, changing lanes, or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument cluster will illuminate even if the trailer is not properly connected or the bulbs are burned out.
Tow/Haul Mode
For instructions on how to enter Tow/Haul mode, see Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Tow/Haul mode assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Tow/Haul mode is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See "Maximum Trailer Weight" under Trailer Towing 0 295.
Tow/Haul mode is most useful when towing a heavy trailer or carrying a large or heavy load:
. Through rolling terrain
. In stop-and-go traffic . In busy parking lots
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for use with electric trailer brakes or most electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems. These instructions apply to both types of electric trailer brakes.
This symbol is on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an ITBC system. The power output to the trailer brakes is proportional to the amount of vehicle braking. This available power output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of trailering situations. The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle brakes, Antilock Brake System (ABS), and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systems. In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle's anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak/ESC systems to activate, power
sent to the trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply that the trailer has StabiliTrak/ESC.
If the vehicle brakes, ABS, or StabiliTrak/ESC systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system may not function fully or at all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to allow the ITBC system to function properly.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's electrical system. Turning the vehicle off will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional only when the vehicle is in ON/RUN.
{ Warning
Connecting a trailer that has an air brake system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking, including increased stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in serious injury, death, or property damage. Only use the ITBC system with electric or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems.
Driving and Operating 305
Trailer Brake Control Panel
1. Manual trailer brake apply lever 2. Trailer symbol 3. Trailer gain adjustment buttons The trailer symbol on the control panel will light amber when a trailer with electric brakes is connected. The ITBC panel is on the instrument panel. See Instrument Panel Overview 0 4. The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as Trailer Gain, available to the trailer brakes and allows manual application of the trailer brakes. Use the ITBC panel and the trailer brake DIC display page to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes.
306 Driving and Operating
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC display page shows:
. Trailer gain setting . Output to the trailer brakes . Trailer connection . System operational status
To view the Trailer Brake DIC page, do one of the following:
. Scroll through the DIC menu pages . Press a trailer gain (+) or (-) button . Activate the manual trailer brake apply
lever
TRAILER GAIN : Press a trailer gain button to recall the current Trailer Gain setting. Each press and release of the gain buttons will change the trailer gain setting. Press the trailer gain (+) or (-) to adjust. Press and hold to continuously adjust the trailer gain. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the trailer gain setting to 0.0. This setting can be adjusted from 0.010.0 with a trailer connected or disconnected.
TRAILER OUTPUT : This displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to the trailer brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking present and
relative to the trailer gain setting. Output is displayed from 0100% for each gain setting.
The trailer output will indicate "- - - - - -" on the trailer brake display page whenever the following occur:
. No trailer is connected
. A trailer without electric brakes is connected, no DIC message will display
. A trailer with electric brakes has become disconnected, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC
. There is a fault present in the wiring to the trailer brakes, a CHECK TRAILER WIRING message displays on the DIC
. The ITBC system is not working due to a fault, a SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message displays in the DIC
Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
Slide this lever right to apply the trailer's electric brakes independent of the vehicle's brakes. Use this lever to adjust trailer gain to achieve the proper power output to the trailer brakes. This lever may also be used to request additional trailer braking at any time. The trailer and vehicle brake lamps
will come on when either vehicle brakes or manual trailer brakes are applied and properly connected.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
Trailer gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and it must be readjusted anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change.
{ Warning
Trailer brakes that are over-gained or under-gained may not stop the vehicle and the trailer as intended and can result in a crash. Always follow the instructions to set the Trailer Gain for the proper trailer stopping performance.
To adjust trailer gain for each towing condition:
1. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface representative of the towing condition and free of traffic at about 3240 km/h (2025 mph) and fully apply the manual trailer brake apply lever. Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 3240 km/h (2025 mph) may result in an incorrect gain setting.
2. Adjust the trailer gain, using the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons, to just below the point of trailer wheel lockup, indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks. Trailer wheel lockup may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition.
3. Readjust trailer gain any time vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lockup is noticed at any time while towing.
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages
TRAILER BRAKES CONNECTED: This message will briefly display when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about 10 seconds. This message can be acknowledged before it automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This message will display if:
. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
- If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stationary, this message will automatically turn off in about 30 seconds. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
- If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message will continue until the vehicle is turned off. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged or if the trailer harness is reconnected.
. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the trailer brakes. This message will continue as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer wiring. This message will also turn off if it is acknowledged.
To determine whether the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle.
2. Turn the vehicle off.
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the vehicle back to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message reappears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
Driving and Operating 307
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only reappears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKES or REDUCED TRAILER BRAKING: This message will display if the electric trailer brake performance is either reduced or non-functional.
HOLD LAST KNOWN GAIN: This message will display if it is no longer possible to adjust the trailer brake gain. Trailer brakes may or may not still be functional, and it is not possible to adjust brake gain based on road conditions. The trailer brakes may remain functional until the next time the vehicle is turned off.
TRAILER BRAKES DISABLED SERVICE REQUIRED: This message will display when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message continues over multiple restarts, have the vehicle serviced.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING, TRAILER BRAKES DISABLED SERVICE REQUIRED, SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM, or REDUCED TRAILER BRAKING message displays while driving, the ITBC system may not be fully functional or may not function at all. When traffic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
308 Driving and Operating
the vehicle off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the vehicle back on. If either of these messages continue, either the vehicle or trailer needs service.
{ Warning
Driving while the trailer braking system is malfunctioning may increase loading on the vehicle's braking system or lead to trailer instability. Use caution. Drive slowly and allow for increased stopping distances.
A GM dealer may be able to diagnose and repair problems with the trailer. However, any diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle warranty. Contact your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Vehicles with StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature. Trailer sway is unintended side-to-side motion of a trailer while towing. If the vehicle is towing a trailer and the TSC detects that sway is increasing, the vehicle brakes are selectively applied at each wheel, to help reduce excessive trailer sway.
If equipped with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, and the trailer has an electric brake system, StabiliTrak may also apply the trailer brakes.
If TSC is enabled, the Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light will flash on the instrument cluster. Reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. If trailer sway continues, StabiliTrak can help slow the vehicle down. TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is turned off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 206.
{ Warning
Trailer sway can result in a crash and in serious injury or death, even if the vehicle is equipped with TSC.
If the trailer begins to sway, reduce vehicle speed by gradually removing your foot from the accelerator. Then pull over to check the trailer and vehicle to help correct possible causes, including an improperly or overloaded trailer, unrestrained cargo, improper trailer hitch configuration, or improperly inflated or incorrect vehicle or trailer tires. See Towing Equipment 0 299 for trailer ratings and hitch setup recommendations.
Aftermarket Electronic Trailer Sway Control Devices
Some trailers may come equipped with an electronic device designed to reduce or control trailer sway. Aftermarket equipment manufacturers also offer similar devices that connect to the wiring between the trailer and the vehicle. These devices may interfere with the vehicle's trailer brake systems or other systems, including integrated anti-sway systems, if equipped. Messages
related to trailer connections or trailer brakes could appear on the DIC. The effects of these aftermarket devices on vehicle handling or trailer brake performance is not known.
{ Warning
Use of aftermarket electronic trailer sway control devices could result in reduced trailer brake performance, loss of trailer brakes, or other malfunctions, and result in a crash. You or others could be seriously injured or killed. Before using one of these devices:
. Ask the device or trailer manufacturer if the device has been thoroughly tested for compatibility with the make, model, and year of your vehicle and any optional equipment installed on your vehicle.
. Before driving, check the trailer brakes are working properly, if equipped. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level road surface that is free of traffic at about 32-40 km/h (20-25 mph) and fully apply the (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
manual trailer brake apply lever. Also, check the trailer brake lamps and other lamps are functioning correctly.
. If the trailer brakes are not operating properly at any time, or if a DIC message indicates problems with the trailer connections or trailer brakes, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road when traffic conditions allow.
Trailer Tires
Special Trailer (ST) tires differ from vehicle tires. Trailer tires are designed with stiff sidewalls to help prevent sway and to support heavy loads. These features can make it difficult to determine if the trailer tire pressures are low only based on a visual inspection.
Always check all trailer tire pressures before each trip when the tires are cool. Low trailer tire pressure is a leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.
Driving and Operating 309
If the vehicle is equipped with a trailer tire pressure monitoring system, see the trailer tire pressure monitoring system description and the trailering app.
Trailer tires deteriorate over time. The trailer tire sidewall will show the week and year the tire was manufactured. Many trailer tire manufacturers recommend replacing tires more than six years old.
Overloading is another leading cause of trailer tire blow-outs. Never load your trailer with more weight than the tires are designed to support. The load rating is located on the trailer tire sidewall.
Always know the maximum speed rating for the trailer tires before driving. This may be significantly lower than the vehicle tire speed rating. The speed rating may be on the trailer tire sidewall. If the speed rating is not shown, the default trailer tire speed rating is 105 km/h (65 mph).
Trailering App
Trailer Light App
If equipped, the Trailering App is on the infotainment home screen.
310 Driving and Operating
Status View
The Status view shows: . Lights . Checklists . Brakes (If equipped) Each section shows high-level status information for the feature. Selecting a section opens up a new screen with additional information and/or options. Light Test Select "Start" to cycle the trailer lamps on and off to determine if they are working. The test follows this sequence: 1. The running lights turn on first and
remain on throughout the sequence. 2. The brake lights turn on for about
two seconds.
3. The left turn signal light flashes three times.
4. The right turn signal light flashes three times.
5. The reverse lights turn on for about two seconds.
6. Steps 25 repeat for about one minute and 45 seconds, or until the test deactivates.
Select Stop to stop the test.
The sequence also deactivates when any of the following occur: . The vehicle is turned off. . The electric drive unit is shifted out of
P (Park). . The brake pedal is pressed. . The turn signal is activated . The hazard warning lights are activated.
Checklist
This view shows the recommended steps to take before towing a trailer.
Touch the box next to each item if that step has been completed.
Touch > to access a detailed view of each step.
Within each detailed view, touch Next and Previous to navigate between steps.
Touch Clear All to clear the completed statuses from all items in the current checklist.
Brakes
If equipped with Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (ITBC) system and if the connected trailer is equipped with electric brakes or electric over hydraulic brakes, this view displays the current state of the brakes including brake gain setting and output. If no electric brakes are detected or if no trailer is connected, this view displays the last known brake gain setting and the output shows dashed lines.
Touch Add to Driver Display to show trailer brake gain and output in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Touch How To Set Brake Gain to view detailed steps to set trailer brake gain.
The Trailering App System shows any brake issues reported by the trailer brake controller in the Brakes view. Trailer diagnosis and service may be required. Repair your trailer brakes if needed. A trailer braking issue is not covered by your GM warranty.
See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" section under Towing Equipment 0 299.
Trailering App
If equipped, the Trailering App is on the Home Page of the infotainment home screen.
If equipped, this feature allows profiles for connected trailers to be created to view status, to store and track trailer usage information, and to set up towing assist features.
The Trailering App welcome page appears when the Trailering App is opened for the first time from the infotainment home screen.
When a trailer is electrically connected and a trailer profile has not been created, there is an option to create a profile, use a guest profile, or select Accessory/No trailer.
When a trailer is electrically connected after a Trailer Profile has been created, the trailer detection pop-up appears with a list of all of the custom Trailer Profiles made on the vehicle. To load an existing Trailer Profile, select one of the Trailer Profiles listed, or load the Guest Trailer Profile by selecting
GUEST TRAILER. Touching Accessory/No trailer selects Accessory/No trailer as the active Trailer Profile and dismisses the pop-up.
Create a Trailer Profile
1. Touch Add Trailer on the trailer detection pop-up or touch + Add Trailer in the Trailering App.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up a profile.
3. After a profile is created, set up for additional trailer features may become available, such as Tow/Haul mode reminder, Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System, maintenance reminders, or camera views and guides.
Import a Trailer Profile
1. Touch Import on the trailer detection pop-up or touch Import in the Trailering App.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to import a profile.
3. After a profile is imported, it can be selected from the trailer list. The Tow/ Haul mode reminder, Brake Gain Setting and Trailer Tire Pressure sensor learning, if equipped, do not import.
Driving and Operating 311
Trailer Feature Setup
Tow/Haul Mode Reminder
To turn the Tow/Haul Mode Reminder setting on, touch Yes. To turn it off, touch No.
Trailer Tire Monitoring
If the TTPMS is detected, touch the Trailer Tire Monitoring icon to set up trailer tire monitoring.
1. Select trailer tire speed rating.
2. Enter trailer tire manufacturing date number.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the trailer tire sensor learn process.
The trailer tire pressure sensors can transmit up to 7 m (23 feet) from the hitch receiver of the vehicle.
A trailer must be electrically connected to the vehicle before starting the sensor-to-vehicle learn process.
After selecting Start from the Learn Sensors screen, use the Tool Method or the Manual Method (described below) to learn each TTPMS sensor, during which the current tire number will be highlighted. The vehicle has
312 Driving and Operating
a maximum of two minutes to detect and label each TTPMS sensor. After each sensor is learned, a check mark appears next to the tire, the vehicle horn sounds, the vehicle brake lamps flash, and all working trailer lamps flash.
The recommended tire pressure must be entered for the trailer tires. An alert appears when a trailer tire's pressure is high or low.
Tool Method: A TTPMS activation tool can be purchased separately to learn the trailer TTPMS sensor locations.
Manual Method: Without the TTPMS activation tool, the air pressure can be increased or decreased in each tire for 10 seconds. Do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure found on the tire sidewalls. Make sure to readjust tire pressure to the recommended level when the process is complete.
Sensor Learning Steps
To complete the sensor-to-vehicle learn process:
1. Touch Start on the Learn Sensors screen. The horn chirps twice and the Learning Active screen appears on the infotainment display.
2. Start with the driver side front trailer tire.
3. Activate the tool near the valve stem or adjust the air pressure of this tire until the horn chirps and all working vehicle and trailer lights flash.
The process stops without saving the sensor locations if this step takes more than two minutes.
4. Move to the next tire and repeat Step 3 for each sensor. The horn chirps twice when all sensors are completed.
5. Return to the vehicle to complete the setup.
Maintenance Reminders
To set up maintenance reminders, touch the Trailer Maintenance icon. Follow the on-screen prompts. The maximum number of reminders is 50.
Camera Views and Guides
To set up the trailer camera and guideline features, if equipped, touch the Camera Views and Guides icon.
1. Select the number of axles on the trailer.
2. Select the wheel location on the trailer (inboard or outboard).
3. Enter the trailer dimensions as prompted.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete setup for available features.
Certain trailer features require a compatible trailer profile be configured and selected. A compatible trailer is a box-type trailer (cargo, camper, etc.) with a conventional hitch.
Transparent Trailer Setup
If equipped, the rear trailer camera must be mounted on the trailer and electrically connected to the vehicle before transparent trailer feature can be used. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 245.
Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the trailer dimensions.
Trailer dimensions must be in range and transparent trailer must be calibrated before use.
. Trailer Length: Measure from center of coupler to furthest rear point on the trailer.
. Trailer Total Width: Measure from the left most edge of trailer, including the wheels, to the right most edge.
. Trailer Body Width: Measure from the left edge to the right edge of the trailer body. This is only applicable to trailers with outboard tires.
. Trailer Height: Measure from ground to tallest point of the trailer.
. Hitching Point Length: Measure from center of coupler to middle of tires.
. Trailer Tongue Length: Measure from the center of the coupler to the trailer front wall, if the trailer has a flat front. If it does not have a flat front, measure from the center of the coupler to the corner of the sidewall. The point where the taper meets the full width of the trailer.
. Vehicle Hitch Height: Measure from ground to top of coupler.
. Vehicle Hitch Length: Measure from hitch receiver to center of ball.
If trailer dimensions are out of range, this feature is unavailable. Ensure the rear trailer camera is connected.
Follow on-screen instructions to drive forward to complete calibration.
Rear Trailer Guidance Setup
If equipped, a rear trailer camera must be mounted on the trailer and electrically connected to the vehicle before the rear
trailer guidance feature can be used. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing 0 245.
Trailer dimensions must be in the following range to enable this feature: . Trailer Length: Measure from center of
coupler to furthest rear point on the trailer.
If trailer dimensions are out of range, this feature is unavailable. Ensure rear trailer camera is connected.
Follow the on-screen instructions to drive forward to complete calibration.
Jack-Knife Alert Setup
If equipped, follow the on-screen instructions to drive forward to complete calibration.
Trailer Length Indicator Setup
Follow on-screen instructions to drive forward to complete calibration.
Trailer Side Blind Zone Alert Setup
Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the trailer dimensions.
Trailer dimensions must be in range to enable this feature.
Driving and Operating 313
. Trailer Length: Measure from center of coupler to furthest rear point on the trailer.
. Trailer Width: Measure from the left edge to right edge of the trailer body.
If trailer dimensions are out of range, this feature is unavailable. Status View
If a trailer is connected, the Status view shows status information for the active trailer profile. If no trailer is connected, the Status view shows the last trailer profile with a status of Not Connected. The Status view shows: . Tires (if equipped) . Lights . Cameras (if equipped)
314 Driving and Operating
. Maintenance . Checklist . Weight . Brakes (if equipped) Each section shows high level status information for the feature. Selecting a section opens up a new screen with additional information and/or options. Selecting the checklist, camera, or maintenance icon opens up the corresponding screen. Lights
This view displays the names of the trailer connector pins, a graphic of the trailer connector, and a graphic of the back of the trailer.
Any connector pin that fails turns an amber color, and the location of the corresponding connection is highlighted on the graphic of the back of the trailer.
If a trailer connection is detected without any faults, the view displays "No Issues Found."
When a trailer is connected, the Trailering App System detects the trailer connection using the Stop/Turn Signal lighting circuits and alerts the driver by requesting a trailer profile setup through the Trailering App System on the infotainment screen. If a default trailer profile is selected, the Trailering App System does not display a Trailer Detection Alert to the user when a trailer is connected.
When a trailer is connected and the vehicle is off, the Trailering App System periodically pulses the lighting circuits of the trailer to verify it is still connected. The trailer lights may periodically flash as a result of this trailer connection detection. These flashes may be more visible in dark ambient light environments. The flashing or flickering lights are a normal condition and the Trailering App System has built-in protections to prevent the battery from
draining. When Theft Alert is enabled, the frequency and pattern of this flashing changes.
If a connected trailer disconnects, a message immediately appears on the DIC if the vehicle is on, or the next time the vehicle is turned on. Check your trailer connection if needed.
Connection Problem
If any of the trailer connections are lost, a message about the connection issue appears on the DIC. The infotainment display also shows the connection issue in the Lights Status view.
Connection Trailer Lighting Faults Detected
The Trailering App System monitors for electrical faults on the trailer lights. A message about the lighting issue appears on the DIC. The infotainment display also shows the lighting issue in the Lights Status view. Repair your trailer lights if needed. A trailer lighting issue is not covered by your GM warranty.
The Running Lights connection may not detect partial outages. Activate the Light Test to check all trailer lamps. See "Light Test" following.
Light Test
Touch Start Light Test to cycle the trailer lights on and off to determine if they are working. The test follows this sequence:
1. The running lights turn on first and remain on throughout the sequence.
2. The brake lights turn on for about two seconds.
3. The left turn signal light flashes three times.
4. The right turn signal light flashes three times.
5. The reverse lights turn on for about two seconds.
6. Steps 25 repeat for approximately one minute and 45 seconds, or until the test deactivates.
Touch Stop to manually stop the test. The test automatically ends after one minute and 45 seconds.
The Light Test also deactivates when any of the following occur: . The vehicle is turned off. . The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). . The brake pedal is pressed. . The turn signal is activated.
. The hazard warning flashers are activated. Tires
Tire Pressure and Temperature If the TTPMS sensor-to-vehicle learn process was completed, the status view displays the current tire pressure and temperature of the trailer tires related to the active Trailer Profile. See "Trailer Tire Monitoring" previously in this section. If a tire pressure is low or high, the color of the pressure value turns amber. If a sensor malfunctions, the values display as dashed lines. - Under the Tires view, touch to set up the
TTPMS for the Trailer Profile. See "Trailer Tire Monitoring" previously in this section for details on the setup. Touch Sensor Setup if the trailer tires were rotated or if the tire pressure sensors in the tires were replaced for this Trailer Profile. The
Driving and Operating 315
vehicle needs to relearn the tire sensors and their locations. See "Trailer Tire Monitoring" previously in this section.
- Touch Alerts to view all active alerts. If the infotainment screen displays "Service Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System," the vehicle needs to be taken to a dealer for service.
- Touch Settings to view trailer tire monitoring settings. Touch Tire Speed Alert to turn on or off the tire speed alert. Touch Tire Age Reminder to turn on or off tire age reminder. Touch Target Tire Pressure to change the recommended tire pressure for the trailer's tires. This changes the number at which the vehicle displays alerts related to trailer tire pressure.
Maintenance
On the Status view, touch the tools icon to access a list of maintenance reminders for the Trailer Profile.
316 Driving and Operating
. The Maintenance Status view displays reminders for the Trailer Profile. Touch a reminder to view, reset, delete or edit it. Resetting a reminder resets the time and mileage values for the reminder. The progress bar turns yellow when the maintenance item reaches 90% complete. The progress bar turns red when the maintenance item reaches 100% complete.
. Touch New Reminder to add a new maintenance reminder. Suggested reminders that have previously been set do not appear. Suggested reminders that have not been set have empty boxes next to them. The maximum number of reminders is 50.
Maintenance Notifications
. Touch Reset to reset time and mileage values for the reminder.
. Touch Remind Me Later to delay the reminder.
- If an Upcoming Alert (90%) is dismissed, it does not appear again.
- If a Maintenance Due Alert (100%) is dismissed, it appears when the vehicle is turned off and back on again.
Maintenance Notifications Settings
Touch Maintenance Notifications to turn on or off notifications for the selected profile. These notifications are based on the Trailer Profile. The maintenance notification settings for each Trailer Profile must be turned on or off.
All maintenance notifications display on the infotainment screen for that active Trailer Profile.
Turn this maintenance notification setting off to dismiss Maintenance Notifications when that Trailer Profile is active.
Always follow all of the maintenance instructions that came with your trailer.
Cameras Touch the camera view icon to open the selected view in the camera app. Close the camera app to return to the Trailering App. Checklists
This view shows the recommended steps to take before towing a trailer. . Touch the box next to each item if that
step has been completed.
. Touch 4 to open a detailed view of
each step. . Within each detailed view, touch Next
and Previous to navigate between steps. . Touch Clear All to clear all selected boxes
in the current checklist.
Custom Checklist Items
For each of the Trailer Profile checklists, there is an option to create custom items to view in the checklist. Custom checklist items are displayed at the end of the default checklist items.
Guest Trailer and No Trailer Connected
If a Guest Trailer Profile is active, or if no trailer is connected, this view shows the default checklist.
Weight
. Touch to turn on or off the GCW Alert. . When on, an alert displays in the DIC
when the combined weight of the vehicle and trailer exceed the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Raring (GCWR). For more information on the Gross Combined Weight (GCW) Alert, see Trailer Towing 0 295.
Brakes
If equipped with Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (ITBC) system and if the connected trailer is equipped with electric brakes or electric over hydraulic brakes, this view displays the current state of the brakes including brake gain setting and output. If no electric brakes are detected or if no
trailer is connected, this view displays the last known brake gain setting and the output shows dashed lines.
. Camera Feature Settings . Touch Add to Driver Display to show
trailer brake gain and output in the DIC.
. Touch How To Set Brake Gain to access detailed steps to set trailer brake gain.
The Trailering App System shows any brake issues reported by the trailer brake controller in the Brakes view. Trailer diagnosis and service may be required. Repair your trailer brakes, if needed. Trailer brake repairs are not covered by your GM warranty.
See "Integrated Trailer Brake Control System" section under Towing Equipment 0 299.
Guest Trailer Status View
If the Guest Trailer Profile is active, the Status view shows:
. Lights . Cameras . Checklist . Weight . Brakes (if equipped)
Driving and Operating 317
The Trailer Status view displays mileage information. The mileage value resets when the trailer is disconnected from the vehicle.
Accessory/No Trailer Status View
If the Accessory/No Trailer profile is active, trailer status information is not available.
Trailers View
Touch the trailer profile icon in the Status view to view, activate, create, edit, or delete trailer profiles.
If a trailer is connected, touch the Trailer Profile name to activate a Trailer Profile.
The Trailering App can save a maximum of five trailer profiles
The Custom Trailer Profiles and Guest Trailer are in order of the most frequently used. The Accessory/No Trailer profile is shown below the Custom Trailer Profiles and Guest Trailer Profile.
Guest Trailer
If the Guest Trailer Profile is the active Trailer Profile, trailer detection, lights/ connections status, theft, and the Tow/Haul reminder alerts can be sent. The system does not track total mileage, but the system tracks trip mileage if the Guest Trailer
318 Driving and Operating
Profile is active. The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System or maintenance reminders cannot be set up for a Guest Trailer Profile. The Guest Trailer Profile cannot be edited.
Accessory/No Trailer
If the Accessory/No Trailer Profile is active, alerts are not sent and the system does not track mileage. The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System or maintenance reminders cannot be set up for the Accessory/No Trailer Profile. The Accessory/ No Trailer profile cannot be edited.
No Trailer Connected
When there is no trailer connected, Trailer Profiles cannot be activated but most options can be edited.
Trailer Brake Gain Memory
The system can store the brake gain setting of a Trailer Profile or a Guest Trailer Profile. When a Trailer Profile or Guest Trailer Profile is selected, and a brake gain setting is set for that Trailer Profile, the system recalls the stored brake gain value.
If a Trailer Profile is already active and the brake gain setting had been set for that Trailer Profile, the system recalls the stored brake gain value whenever the vehicle is turned on. If there was an error in setting the brake gain for a Trailer Profile, there is a notification. This pop-up does not appear if the Guest Trailer Profile is active or if there is no trailer connected. Trailer brake gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted anytime vehicle loading, trailer loading, or road surface conditions change. Editing a Trailer Profile
Touch the trailer profile icon/name in the Status View to access the Trailer Profile view: . Trailer Name
. Total Mileage . Set as Default Trailer . GCW Alert . Camera Feature Settings . Tow/Haul Mode Reminder Alert . Theft Alert . Delete/Remove Trailer
Trailer Name
Touch to edit the Trailer Profile's name. Use at least one character and no spaces.
Total Mileage
Touch to edit the Trailer Profile's mileage. Touch Reset to reset trailer mileage to zero, or enter a new mileage value and touch Save.
Effect on Maintenance Reminders
If the mileage is reset or changed, and mileage has already accumulated, any maintenance reminders that have been set up adjust accordingly.
Delete/Remove Trailer
Touch to remove the Trailer Profile and all of its settings.
On the pop-up, touch Remove to delete the Trailer Profile. Touch Cancel to dismiss the pop-up and return to the previous view.
When selecting Remove, it will display if there is a connected OnStar plan active with the vehicle. Removing a trailer profile deletes the profile from the vehicle but the profile still associates with the user account. However, if there is not a connected OnStar plan and Remove is selected, DELETE displays and the profile deletes permanently.
Set as Default Trailer
Touch Set as Default Trailer to select the current profile as the default trailer profile.
The default trailer profile automatically is selected each time a new connection is detected. The Trailer Detection Alert will no longer appear on the infotainment screen.
If this setting is turned off, the current trailer profile is not the default trailer.
GCW Alerts
Touch GCW Alert to enable/disable the GCW Alert for the selected profile. These alerts are based on the Trailer Profile, so the settings for each Trailer Profile must be turned on or off.
Turn this setting off to stop receiving GCW Alerts when that Trailer Profile is active.
Camera Feature Settings . Select Camera Views and Guides to access
specific view settings. . Touch Jack-Knife Alert to turn on/off
Jack-Knife Alerts.
Turn this setting off to stop receiving alerts. . Touch Trailer Length Indicator to turn on/ off the Trailer Length Indicator.
Turn this setting off to hide the overlay that represents the length of the trailer.
Theft Alert
If Theft Alerts are enabled, an alarm will sound anytime the trailer is disconnected from the vehicle while the vehicle is off.
Touch Theft Alert to enable/disable Theft Alerts for the selected profile. These alerts are based on the Trailer Profile, so the settings for each Trailer Profile must be turned on or off.
This setting defaults for each Trailer Profile, including the Guest Trailer Profile.
Driving and Operating 319
A smartphone receives a notification that the trailer related to the selected Trailer Profile is disconnected from the vehicle, if the setting is on for the active Trailer Profile, the vehicle has an OnStar or connected service plan and the smartphone number has been added to the account for this notification.
If the setting is turned off for a given Trailer Profile, the smartphone will not receive this security notification even if the Trailer Profile is active.
Tow/Haul Mode Reminder
When the vehicle detects a new trailer connection, and if the Tow/Haul Mode Reminder setting is enabled, a courtesy message displays reminding you to turn on Tow/Haul mode if appropriate. See Driver Mode Control 0 207.
Touch Tow/Haul Mode Reminder to turn on/ off for the selected profile. The status of Tow/Haul Mode Reminder Alerts are specific to each trailer profile. You must specify whether you want to enable theft alerts for each trailer profile.
320 Driving and Operating
If Tow/Haul mode is off and Tow/Haul Mode Reminder is on for a Trailer Profile, each time the vehicle is turned on, a reminder appears to turn on Tow/Haul Mode when the Trailer Profile is active.
If Tow/Haul mode is on and Tow/Haul Mode Reminder is on for a Trailer Profile, the reminder does not appear when the Trailer Profile is active.
Conversions and Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical Equipment
{ Warning
The Data Link Connector (DLC) is used for vehicle service and Emission Inspection/ Maintenance testing. See Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure) 0 117. A device connected to the DLC -- such as an aftermarket fleet or driver-behavior tracking device -- may interfere with vehicle systems. This could affect vehicle operation and cause a crash. Such devices may also access information stored in the vehicle's systems.
Caution
Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating.
When adding electrical equipment, it should only be connected using the accessory power outlets. The maximum power that can be supplied by one accessory power outlet or spread across all three is 200 watts or 15 amps. Exceeding 200 watts or 15 amps may cause erratic vehicle operation.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 68 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69.
Auxiliary Switches
On-screen auxiliary switches, if equipped, are quick-touch icons that appear within the infotainment system, giving you easy access
to some of the features of certain aftermarket accessories installed on the vehicle (off-road lighting, light bars, etc.).
To access the on-screen auxiliary switches, select Controls > See More Controls > Aux Switches. Six on-screen auxiliary switches are available.
Use of the on-screen switches requires installation of an auxiliary switch interface module, which is mounted under the hood. See your dealer for purchase and installation of the necessary components. When an aftermarket accessory is installed onto the vehicle, it should be hard-wired to the auxiliary switch interface module to the numbered connection that corresponds with the numbered on-screen auxiliary switch. See Accessories and Modifications 0 323.
If you touch an on-screen auxiliary switch but the auxiliary switch interface module is not installed or has no accessory wired at that connection, a message "No accessory connected to this switch" displays.
Customizing the On-Screen Auxiliary Switches
After a purchased accessory is installed, create a text label for the corresponding on-screen auxiliary switch and choose an icon to represent the installed accessory.
1. While the vehicle is in P (Park), touch the Controls icon on the infotainment home page.
2. Touch the Aux Switches icon.
3. For each switch you want to customize, touch the arrow at the top right of the icon, and then:
. To enter a new label for the switch, touch the name field and type in a new label. To save your update,
touch V (Done) on the keyboard.
. To change the icon, touch a new one on the list.
. Review the additional options listed below the name field. Touch the checkbox next to the option description to enable or disable the option.
Turn on only while switch is held down: When this option is enabled, the switch will only operate while your finger continues to touch and
hold the on-screen switch. This may be useful for accessories that only need to be turned on for short intervals.
Turn on parking lights while switch is on: When this option is enabled, the vehicle parking lights will automatically turn on while the switch is in use. This may be particularly useful to use for a light bar, as it will help ensure your vehicle remains visible while driving in low-light conditions with the headlights off.
4. To save your customizations for the on-screen auxiliary switch, touch the BACK icon.
Driving and Operating 321
322 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . 323
Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . 323 Underhood Compartment Overview . . . 324 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Noise Control System (RST Only) . . . . . . 333 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Headlamp Aiming Front Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Bulb Replacement LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Electrical System High Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . . . 335 Electrical System Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Underhood Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left) . . . . . 341 Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right) . . . 343
Wheels and Tires Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . 348 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . 351 Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . 352 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . 357 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . 359 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . 359 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . 360 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 363 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Jump Starting Jump Starting - North America . . . . . . . . 375
Towing the Vehicle Transporting a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . 377 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Appearance Care Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
General Information
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in electronic keys, may contain perchlorate materials. Perchlorate Material
special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Accessories and Modifications
Adding non-dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, Driver Assistance Systems, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to suspension components caused by modifying vehicle height outside of factory settings will not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts.
Vehicle Care 323
GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 69.
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own Service Work
{ Warning
Never try to do your own service on high voltage battery components. You can be injured and the vehicle can be damaged if you try to do your own service work. Service and repair of these high voltage battery components should only be performed by a trained dealer technician with the proper knowledge and tools.
Exposure to high voltage can cause shock, burns, and even death. The high voltage components in the vehicle can only be serviced by technicians with special training.
(Continued)
324 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
High voltage components are identified by labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these components. High voltage cable or wiring has orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring.
{ Warning
Unexpected wheel motion and/or direction when one or more wheels are off the ground for service work may result in injury. The vehicle may:
. Allow the wheels to rotate unexpectedly in either direction regardless of mode selection.
. Allow the wheels to rotate in reaction to attempts to rotate the tire(s) manually.
. Resist attempts to rotate the wheels manually. (Continued)
Warning (Continued)
Before lifting the vehicle to do your own service work, turn the vehicle off or place the vehicle in the Service Mode. To place the vehicle in Service Mode, see "Service Mode" under Power Modes 0 195.
{ Warning
It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner's manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Publication Ordering Information 0 404.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 68.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records 0 393.
Underhood Compartment Overview
There are several items located under the hood that you should check periodically.
For instructions on opening the hood, see Hood 0 19.
{ Warning
You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power hood. Make sure there is no one in the way of the hood as it is opening and closing.
Vehicle Care 325
1. Battery (Under Cover). See Battery North America 0 330.
2. Underhood Compartment Fuse Block (Under Cover). Underhood Compartment Fuse Block 0 337.
Base Model
3. 110V Power Outlet. See Power Outlets 0 101.
4. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap (Under Cover). See Cooling System 0 327.
5. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Under Cover). See Brake Fluid 0 329.
6. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 328.
326 Vehicle Care
1. Battery (Under Cover). See Battery North America 0 330.
2. Underhood Compartment Fuse Block (Under Cover). Underhood Compartment Fuse Block 0 337.
Uplevel Model with Power Hood
3. 110V Power Outlet. See Power Outlets 0 101.
4. Emergency Hood Release Button (If equipped). See Hood 0 19.
5. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap (Under Cover). See Cooling System 0 327.
6. Brake Fluid Reservoir (Under Cover). See Brake Fluid 0 329.
7. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid 0 328.
Cooling System
It is not necessary to regularly check coolant unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A coolant loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired by your dealer.
The following explains the cooling system and how to check coolant level.
During vehicle operation and also during charging, the high voltage battery cells in the vehicle are kept within a normal operating temperature range. If the temperature rises above this temperature, the battery cooling system turns on the air conditioning compressor and cools the coolant until the correct temperature is reached. If the temperature falls below this temperature, a high voltage heater, located outside the battery on a cradle, heats the coolant until the correct temperature is reached.
Checking Coolant
The coolant needs to be replaced at the appropriate interval. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389.
The coolant reservoir is in the underhood compartment. See Underhood Compartment Overview 0 324. To access the coolant reservoir under the hood, the right side access cover needs to be removed. 1. Park on a level surface and turn the
vehicle off. 2. Open the hood. See Hood 0 19.
3. Turn the three bolts three quarter turn and remove the right side access cover.
Vehicle Care 327
4. After the system has completely cooled, check that the coolant level in the reservoir.
328 Vehicle Care
5. If the coolant level is not visible or needs to be adjusted within the reservoir, contact your dealer.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
Caution . Do not use washer fluid that contains
any type of water repellent coating. This can cause the wiper blades to chatter or skip.
. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.
. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.
. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water. (Continued)
Caution (Continued) . Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Underhood Compartment Overview 0 324 for reservoir location.
Brakes
Disc brake linings have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake linings are worn and new linings are needed. The sound can come and go or can be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
{ Warning
The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Caution
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake linings could result in costly brake repairs.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied, clearing up following several applications. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake linings for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications. See Capacities and Specifications 0 395.
Brake pads should be replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service may be required.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Always replace brake system parts with new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes may not work properly. The braking performance can change in many ways if the wrong brake parts are installed or if parts are improperly installed.
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Underhood Compartment Overview 0 324 for the location of the reservoir. Checking Brake Fluid With the vehicle in P (Park) on a level surface, the brake fluid level should be between the minimum and maximum marks on the brake fluid reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir may go down: . Normal brake lining wear. When new
linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. . A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed. With a leak, the brakes will not work well.
Vehicle Care 329
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light 0 117.
Brake fluid absorbs water over time which degrades the effectiveness of the brake fluid. Replace brake fluid at the specified intervals to prevent increased stopping distance. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389.
What to Add
Use only GM approved DOT 4 brake fluid from a clean, sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 392.
330 Vehicle Care
{ Warning
The wrong or contaminated brake fluid could result in damage to the brake system. This could result in the loss of braking leading to a possible injury. Always use the proper GM approved brake fluid.
Caution If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Immediately wash off any painted surface.
Battery - North America
This vehicle has a high voltage battery and a standard 12-volt battery.
See your dealer if either the 12-volt or high voltage battery needs service.
12-Volt Battery
The original equipment battery is maintenance free. Do not remove the cap and do not add fluid.
Do not disconnect the 12-volt battery during storage.
Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new 12-volt battery is needed. The vehicle has an Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM)/Valve regulated lead acid battery (VRLA) 12-volt battery. Installation of a standard 12-volt battery will result in reduced 12-volt battery life.
Some 12-volt chargers have an AGM battery setting. This setting limits the charge voltage to 14.8 volts and helps extend the battery life. If available, use the AGM setting when charging the battery.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 1.
High Voltage Battery
Only a trained service technician should inspect, test, or replace the high voltage battery. The dealer has information on how to recycle the high voltage battery. There is also information available at https:// www.recyclemybattery.com.
{ Warning
Damage to the high voltage battery or high voltage system can create a risk of electric shock, overheating, or fire.
If the vehicle is damaged from a moderate to severe crash, flood, fire, or other event, the vehicle should be inspected as soon as possible. Until the vehicle has been inspected, store it outside at least 15 m (50 ft) from any structure or anything that can burn. Ventilate the vehicle by opening a window or a door.
Contact Customer Assistance as soon as possible to determine whether an inspection is needed. See Customer Assistance Offices 0 398.
If the vehicle is in a crash, the sensing system may shut down the high voltage system. When this occurs, the high voltage battery is disconnected and the vehicle will not start. The SERVICE VEHICLE SOON message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display. Before the vehicle can operate again, it must be serviced at your dealer. If a crash occurs or an airbag(s) inflates, see "If a Crash Occurs" under Collision Damage Repair 0 402 and What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 64 for additional information.
Keep the vehicle plugged in, even when fully charged, to keep the high voltage battery temperature ready for the next drive. This is important when outside temperatures are extremely hot or cold.
Propulsion power may be reduced in extremely cold temperatures, or if the high voltage battery is too cold. The message BATTERY TOO COLD, PLUG IN TO WARM will display. If the message displays, a level 2 charger is required to heat the battery to a minimum temperature to enable propulsion or charging.
A vehicle cover, which can reduce sun loading on the vehicle and improve high voltage battery life, is available from your dealer.
{ Warning
This vehicle is equipped with high voltage battery thermal detection, mitigation, and notification software. If the high voltage battery overheats, it may create a risk of a vehicle fire and may result in damage to property, serious injury, or death.
If the high voltage battery overheats, an audible alarm may sound, a message may display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and OnStar may be called. To alert others outside your vehicle, the horn may sound, and the lights may flash.
If driving, pull over as soon as possible to a safe location at least 50 feet (15 m) away from any structure or anything that may burn. Park your vehicle, set the parking brake, and turn the vehicle off. Open a window or door for ventilation.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 331
Warning (Continued)
Remove the remote key and move yourself and others to a safe, upwind location away from the vehicle. Do not return to the vehicle or attempt to restart or drive the vehicle.
Call emergency services and inform them that an electrical vehicle high voltage battery is overheating.
Never attempt to put out a vehicle fire.
Your vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer to have the high voltage battery inspected before the vehicle can be operated again.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment has been evaluated to be installed and operated at a minimum distance of 5.7 cm (2.2 in) between the device and your body. The vehicle design ensures this distance is maintained during normal use. Changes or modifications to any
332 Vehicle Care
of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Innovation, Science, and Economic Development (ISED) Radiation Exposure Statement
This equipment complies with RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 5.7 cm (2.2 in) between the radiator and any part of your body. The vehicle design ensures this distance is maintained during normal use. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Vehicle Storage
The best way to store the vehicle for any length of time is to plug in the charge cord and leave it plugged in. The vehicle monitors and maintains the 12-volt battery daily. It is okay to leave the vehicle plugged in for extended periods of time. Once charged to full, very little energy is required to maintain the 12-volt battery and high voltage battery.
If it is not possible to charge the vehicle with the charge cord left plugged in, be sure to fully charge the high voltage battery before storing. The vehicle will stop maintenance of the 12-volt battery if the high voltage battery state of charge gets too low.
When storing the vehicle on a long-term basis:
- Keep the high voltage battery state of charge at 30%.
- Attach an AGM/VRLA compatible battery tender or trickle charger to the 12-volt battery.
- Keep the remote key more than 3 m (10 ft) away from the vehicle.
12-volt Battery
{ Warning
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. Always wear eye protection. See Jump Starting - North America 0 375 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Do not disconnect the 12-volt battery during storage.
A trickle charger may be attached to the 12-volt battery terminals or trickle charge from the underhood remote positive (+) and negative () terminals. See Jump Starting North America 0 375 for location of these terminals.
Caution
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM/ VRLA 12-volt battery, which can be damaged by using the incorrect type of trickle charger. An AGM/VRLA-compatible charger must be used, with the appropriate setting selected. Follow the trickle charger manufacturer instructions.
With a trickle charger connected to the 12-volt battery, the vehicle will still monitor the 12-volt battery daily, but it will not use energy from the high voltage battery for maintenance.
High Voltage Battery
After extended storage, it is possible that the vehicle may not operate. If this happens, the high voltage battery may need to be plugged in and charged.
Noise Control System (RST Only)
NOISE EMISSIONS WARRANTY
General Motors LLC, warrants to the first person who purchases this vehicle for purposes other than resale and to each subsequent purchaser that this vehicle as manufactured by General Motors LLC, was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time it left General Motors LLC's control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations. This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and equipped by General Motors LLC, and is not limited to any particular part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by General Motors LLC. Defects in design, assembly or in any part, component or system of the vehicle as manufactured by General Motors LLC, which, at the time it left General Motors LLC's control, caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
TAMPERING WITH NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM PROHIBITED
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
Removal of the noise shields or any undercab insulation.
Fan and Drive:
Removal of fan clutch or rendering clutch inoperative.
Removal of fan shroud.
External Sound System:
Modification of the vehicle's external sound system.
Vehicle Care 333
Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be replaced periodically. See the Maintenance Schedule 0 389.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts 0 392.
Caution
Allowing the wiper arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the windshield wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away
from the windshield.
334 Vehicle Care
2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper arm connector, and pull the wiper blade away from the arm connector.
3. Remove the wiper blade. 4. Reverse Steps 13 for wiper blade
replacement.
Glass Replacement
If the windshield or front side glass must be replaced, see your dealer to determine the correct replacement glass.
Windshield Replacement
Driver Assistance Systems
If the windshield needs to be replaced and the vehicle is equipped with a front camera sensor for the Driver Assistance Systems, a GM replacement windshield is recommended. The replacement windshield must be installed according to GM specifications for proper alignment. If it is not, these systems may not work properly, they may display messages, or they may not work at all. See your dealer for proper windshield replacement.
Gas Strut(s)
Your vehicle may be equipped with gas strut(s) to provide assistance in lifting and holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.
{ Warning
If the gas struts that hold open the hood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, you or others could be seriously injured. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service immediately. Visually inspect the gas struts for signs of wear, cracks, or other
(Continued)
Warning (Continued) damage periodically. Check to make sure the hood/trunk/liftgate is held open with enough force. If struts are failing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have the vehicle serviced.
Caution Do not apply tape or hang any objects from gas struts. Also do not push down or pull on gas struts. This may cause damage to the vehicle.
Hood
Trunk Liftgate
Headlamp Aiming
Front Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment.
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer.
Bulb Replacement
LED Lighting
This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 335
Electrical System
High Voltage Devices and Wiring
{ Warning
Exposure to high voltage can cause shock, burns, and even death. The high voltage components in the vehicle can only be serviced by technicians with special training.
High voltage components are identified by labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these components. High voltage cable or wiring has orange covering or labels. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring.
Electrical System Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed.
336 Vehicle Care
This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect the wires that provide the power to the devices in your vehicle.
If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible.
To check a fuse, look at the band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a fuse of the identical size and rating.
Replacing a Blown Fuse
1. Turn off the vehicle.
2. Locate the fuse puller in the underhood compartment fuse block.
3. Use the fuse puller to remove the fuse from the top or side, as shown above.
4. If the fuse must be replaced immediately, borrow a replacement fuse with the same amperage from the fuse block. Choose a vehicle feature that is not needed to safely operate the vehicle. Repeat Steps 23.
5. Insert the replacement fuse into the empty slot of the blown fuse.
At the next opportunity, see your dealer to replace the blown fuse.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
{ Danger
Fuses and circuit breakers are marked with their ampere rating. Do not exceed the specified amperage rating when replacing fuses and circuit breakers. Use of an oversized fuse or circuit breaker can result in a vehicle fire. You and others could be seriously injured or killed.
Vehicle Care 337
{ Warning
Installation or use of fuses that do not meet GM's original fuse specifications is dangerous. The fuses could fail, and result in a fire. You or others could be injured or killed, and the vehicle could be damaged.
See Accessories and Modifications 0 323 and General Information 0 323.
To check or replace a blown fuse, see Electrical System Overload 0 335.
Underhood Compartment Fuse Block
The underhood compartment fuse block is in the underhood compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.
338 Vehicle Care
Press the clips on the sides and lift the cover to access the fuse block.
Caution Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.
A fuse puller is available in the left instrument panel end cap.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
Fuses
Usage
F01
F02
Fuses
Usage
F03
F04
Fuses
Usage
F05
F06
ACEC Air Conditioning
Electric Compressor
F07
ESSCP Energy Storage
System Coolant Pump
F08
F09
PECP Power Electric
Cooling Pump
F10
F11
F12
F13
TRLR_HD Trailer
Headlamps
F14
F15
VLM Vehicle Leveling
Module
Spare
F16
F17
ELM 1 Exterior lighting
Module 1
Fuses
Usage
F18
SADS Semi Active
Damping System
TAIL LMP LT Left Tail Lamp
F19
IECL 2 Left Internal
Electrical Center 2
F20
F21
F22
IRM_ACM Integrated
Refrigerant Module and
Air Conditioning Module
F23
TAIL LMP RT Right
Tail Lamp
VICMS Vehicle Integrated Control Module
F24
F25
F26
F27
PKLPS_TRLR Trailer
Parklamps
F28
F29
Spare
Vehicle Care 339
Fuses
Usage
F30
PUMP_ONE
F31
F32
F33
Spare
TRLR REV LMPS Reverse Trailer Lamps
F34
TIM1 Trailer Interface
Module 1
F35
Spare
F36
TPIM1_BAT2
F37
F38
TRLR_STP_TRN_LT
Trailer Stop
F39
TRLR_STP_TRN_RT
F40
VLM_M
F41
F42
F43
F44
Spare
F45
Spare
F46
Spare
340 Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
F47
Spare
F48
Spare
F49
TBPM Trailer Brake
Power Module
F50
Spare
F51
MIDGATE MOTOR RIGHT
F52
F53
Spare
F54
PFCM
F55
REAR DEFOG
F56
F57
MINOR ENDGATE HIGH
F58
FRNT WIPER
F59
TIM2
F60
PKLPS_ID
F61
Spare
F62
ELM 3
F63
GLASS BREAK
F64
F65
ELM 4
Fuses
Usage
F66
F67
EMB/GRILL LIGHT
F68
HDLP_LT
F69
MIDGATE LEFT MOTOR
F70
EBCM 1
F71
DC/AC INV
F72
Spare
F73
F74
F75
Spare
F76
HDLP_RT
F77
F78
MIDGATE CROSS BAR
MOTOR 2
MIDGATE CROSS BAR MOTOR 1
F79
PCV_PEEV_ALD
FR RADAR/VIRTUAL KEY
F80
IECR 2
F81
IECL 1
Fuses
Usage
F82
F83
F84
V2LIM
F85
Spare
HVS (HIGH VOLTAGE SERVICE DISCONNECT)
F86
HORN
F87
FRT WSHR PMP
F88
F89
F90
F91
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Left)
Vehicle Care 341
The instrument panel fuse block is on the driver side of the instrument panel, between the steering wheel and the door. To access the fuses, remove the panel, starting at the bottom. Once clips are disengaged, the tabs along the top of the door can be disengaged from the instrument panel to remove the door.
To reinstall the door, place the top tabs into the slots, and rotate the door into position, engaging the clips.
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.
342 Vehicle Care
Fuses
Usage
F01 DRIVER_PWR_ST
F02 VKS_TTPM
F03 VECM
F04 BCM 1 Body Control Module 1
F05 ELM 5 Exterior Lighting Module 5
F06 PASSENGER DSP
Fuses
Usage
F07 SPARE
F08 TCP Telematics Control Platform
F09 4W_Co_Driver PWR LUMBAR
SPARE
Fuses
Usage
F10
WCM_VKM Wireless
Charger Module
TVR_APA_PFA
F11
2ND HTD SEAT 2nd Row
Heated Seat
2ND HTD SEAT 2nd Row Heated Seat 1
F12
SPARE
F13
TPIM
TPIM 2
F14
SPARE
F15
SPARE
F16
Tonneau Accessory
F17
SDM_AOS
SRR
F18
SPARE
F19
SPARE
F20
OBCM 2
MSM
F21
HSM ROW
HSM ROW 1
Fuses
Usage
F22
SPARE
F23
MJR END HIGH
F24 TPIM 1 & VBAT 1 Traction Power Inverter Module 1
F25
SPARE
F26 TPIM 2 & VBAT 1 Traction Power Inverter Module 1
F27
DSP
F28 ELM 7 Exterior Lighting Module 7
F29 SPARE
F30 MJR END LOW
F31
ELM 2 Exterior Lighting
Module 2
F32
RFR/PLCM
F33
MIDGATE CONTROL LOW
F34
ACP_VPM
F35
AMP Amplifier
F36
CO-DRVR_PWR_ST
F37
SPARE
Fuses
Usage
F38 ELM 6 Exterior Lighting Module 6
F39 RT WNDW Right Hand Power Window
F40 LT WNDW Left Hand Power Window
Circuit Breakers
CB01
CB02
Usage
Instrument Panel Fuse Block (Right)
The instrument panel fuse block is located behind the glove box. It is accessible by removing the hush panel located underneath the glove box. To remove the hush panel, remove the four push-pins that secure the hush panel.
Vehicle Care 343
See your dealer if additional assistance is needed.
344 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown.
Fuses
Usage
F01
FRT BLWR MTR Front
Blower Motor
F02 CPM
F03 SPARE
F04 SPARE
F05 BCM 2 Body Control Module 2
Fuses
Usage
F06 BCM 4 Body Control Module 4
F07
COIL CLOCK SPRING
F08 TBCS/EPB Trailer Brake Control Switch/Electric Park Brake
F09 ESM
SPARE
Fuses
Usage
F10
Displays
SPARE
F11
CGM Central Gateway
Module
SPARE
F12
SPARE
F13
SPARE
DLC Data Link Connection
F14
BODY MISC
BODY MISC 1
F15
MISC_IP 1
F16
SPARE
F17
SPARE
F18
BDY 1
HDLNR
F19
VICM TPIM IGN Vehicle
Integration Control
Module/Traction Power
Inverter Module/Ignition
F20
OHC
HUD
Fuses
Usage
F21
VCU
VCU 2
F22
SPARE
F23
SPARE
F24
FCM_RLH_UGDO
F25
USB_ROW 2
F26 SPARE
F27
USB
F28 SPARE
F29 FRT_HVAC_DIS
F30 SPARE
F31
BCM 3 Body Control
Module 3
F32
HSWM Heating Steering
Wheel Module
F33
SPARE
F34
SPARE
F35
SPARE
F36
SPARE
F37
SPARE
Fuses
Usage
F38 SPARE
F39 SPARE
F40 SPARE
Circuit Breakers
CB01
CB02
Usage
APO Auxiliary Power Outlet Center Console SPARE
Wheels and Tires
Tires
Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer.
Vehicle Care 345
{ Warning
. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
. Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
. Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold.
. Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact -- such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them. (Continued)
346 Vehicle Care
Warning (Continued)
. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc.
. Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only your dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.
. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode.
See Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation 0 351 for inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed driving.
All-Season Tires
This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment
tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires 0 346.
Winter Tires
This vehicle was not originally equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on ice or snow covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires 0 358.
With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
If using winter tires:
. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.
. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The example shows a typical light truck tire sidewall.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(1) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the "Tire Size" illustration later in this section for more detail.
(2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines.
(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 350 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
(4) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
DOT Tire Date of Manufacture : The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.
(5) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification
Vehicle Care 347
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(6) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(7) Single Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Tire Pressure 0 350 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The examples show a typical light truck tire size.
348 Vehicle Care
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size mean a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (2) Tire Width : The 3-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (3) Aspect Ratio : A 2-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item (3) of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide.
(4) Construction Code : A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction.
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(6) Load Range : Load Range.
(7) Service Description : The service description indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire. If two numbers are given as in the example, 120/116, then this represents the load index for single versus dual wheel usage (single/ dual). The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch).
Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width.
Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure : The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kPa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure 0 350.
DOT Markings : A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production.
GVWR : Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
GAWR FRT : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Occupant Distribution : Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure : Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure 0 350 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Vehicle Care 349
Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 357.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings
350 Vehicle Care
for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading 0 359.
Vehicle Capacity Weight : The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire : Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard : A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See "Tire and Loading Information Label" under Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively.
{ Warning
Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:
. Tire overloading and overheating, which could lead to a blowout
. Premature or irregular wear
. Poor handling
. Reduced fuel economy for internal combustion engine vehicles
. Reduced range for electric vehicles
Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:
. Unusual wear
. Poor handling
. Rough ride
. Needless damage from road hazards
The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits 0 191. How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the pressure of the tires once a month or more.
Do not forget the spare, if the vehicle has one. See Full-Size Spare Tire 0 374 for additional information.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure is high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Put the valve caps back on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture. Use only valve caps designed for the vehicle by GM. TPMS sensors could be damaged and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation
{ Warning
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, puts additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure. This could cause a crash, and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow the vehicle to be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, are in excellent condition, and are set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Vehicle Care 351
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
352 Vehicle Care
failure. Under-inflation also reduces energy efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352. See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the
instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on each time the vehicle is turned on until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed. For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they
are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure 0 350.
The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection 0 356, Tire Rotation 0 356, and Tires 0 345.
Caution
Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM-approved liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 363 for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire pressure warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the time the vehicle is on. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message will come on each time the vehicle is turned on until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:
. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
. The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.
Vehicle Care 353
. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.
. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires 0 358.
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire pressure condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message come on and stay on.
Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)
This feature provides visual and audible alerts outside the vehicle to help when inflating an underinflated tire to the recommended cold tire pressure.
354 Vehicle Care
When the low tire pressure warning light comes on:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe, level place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).
4. Add air to the tire that is underinflated. The turn signal lamp will flash.
When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once and the turn signal lamp will stop flashing and briefly turn solid.
Repeat these steps for all underinflated tires that have illuminated the low tire pressure warning light.
{ Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Do not exceed the maximum pressure listed on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 346 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
If the tire is overinflated by more than 35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will sound multiple times and the turn signal lamp will continue to flash for several seconds after filling stops. To release and correct the pressure,
while the turn signal lamp is still flashing, briefly press the center of the valve stem. When the recommended pressure is reached, the horn sounds once.
If the turn signal lamp does not flash within 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, the tire fill alert has not been activated or is not working.
If the hazard warning flashers are on, the tire fill alert visual feedback will not work properly.
The TPMS will not activate the tire fill alert properly under the following conditions:
. There is interference from an external device or transmitter.
. The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
. There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
. There is a malfunction in the horn or turn signal lamps.
. The identification code of the TPMS sensor is not registered to the system.
. The battery of the TPMS sensor is low.
If the tire fill alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back or forward and try again.
If the tire fill alert feature is not working, use a tire pressure gauge to confirm tire pressure.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process -- Auto Learn Function
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. When a tire is installed, the vehicle must be stationary for about 20 minutes before the system recalculates. The following relearn process takes up to 10 minutes, driving at a minimum speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). A dash (-) or pressure value will display in the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) (Work Truck) 0 131 or Driver Information Center (DIC) (Uplevel) 0 133. A warning message displays in the DIC if a problem occurs during the relearn process.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring Operation
If equipped, the Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS) is designed to monitor the pressure of the trailer tires and warn the driver when a low pressure condition exists. TTPMS sensors for four tires
are provided. The system can accommodate a trailer with up to six tires if additional sensors are purchased from the dealer. Also, the system can be paired with up to five individual trailers. Prior to use, the vehicle must learn the sensors by following the learning process. See Trailering App 0 309.
Contact your trailer service center or tire service center to have the pressure sensors installed inside the trailer tires. The technician should insert the sensor stem through the hole in the trailer wheel. When the sensor is correctly positioned, the nut on the sensor stem should be tightened to
8 Y (6 lb ft). When mounting the trailer tire onto the trailer wheel be careful not to damage the sensor.
The Trailering App can be used to view the tire pressures after the recommended trailer tire pressures have been entered. Refer to the trailer tire placard on the trailer or the trailer tire sidewall for the recommended tire pressure.
The system is compatible with trailer tires that have placard pressure values from 103 689 kpa (15100 psi) or 1031020 kpa (15 148 psi). The hole in the wheel for the tire stem must be 11.43 mm (0.453 in) in diameter. Use of the pressure sensors on a wheel with a different stem hole size could result in loss of air from the tire.
If a low trailer tire pressure condition is detected, the TTPMS displays a warning message on the DIC. If the warning message is displayed, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the tire placard on the trailer.
In addition, the TTPMS monitors the temperature of the trailer tires. If the system detects a high temperature on one or more of the trailer tires, a warning message will be displayed on the DIC. If this
Vehicle Care 355
warning message is displayed, stop as soon as possible, and inspect the overheated trailer tire. Common causes for high trailer tire temperature are underinflation, overloading, or tire damage.
TTPMS Malfunction Message
The TTPMS will not function properly if one or more of the trailer tire sensors are missing or inoperable. If the system detects a malfunction, a DIC message indicates that the system requires service. Some of the conditions that can cause the service message to occur are:
. One of the trailer tires has been replaced with the spare tire which does not have a learned TTPMS sensor. The DIC message should turn off after the pressure sensor is installed in the tire, and the learning process is performed successfully. See "TTPMS Sensor Learning Process" under Trailering App 0 309.
. The TTPMS sensor learning process was not done or not completed successfully. The DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor learning process. See "TTPMS Sensor Learning Process" under Trailering App 0 309.
356 Vehicle Care
. One or more TTPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC message should go off when the TTPMS sensors are installed and the sensor learning process is performed successfully. See "TTPMS Sensor Learning Process" under Trailering App 0 309.
. Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TTPMS could cause interference to the TTPMS which could cause loss of signal reception from the sensor.
. If the system does not receive the signal from an individual sensor, an error message may not occur until the vehicle has been driver for a period of time.
If the TTPMS is not functioning properly, it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the DIC message comes on and stays on when the trailer tire pressures have been checked and determined to be correct.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.
. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.
. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. . The tire has a puncture, cut, or other
damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated according to the interval listed in the maintenance schedule. See Maintenance Schedule 0 389.
Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check
for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 357 and Wheel Replacement 0 361.
Use this rotation pattern when rotating the tires. Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure 0 350 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 352.
Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See "Wheel Nut Torque" under Capacities and Specifications 0 395 and "Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire" under Tire Changing 0 369.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
Lightly coat the inner diameter of the wheel hub opening with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up.
{ Warning
Do not apply grease to the wheel mounting surface, wheel conical seats, or the wheel nuts or bolts. Grease applied to these areas could cause a wheel to become loose or come off, resulting in a crash.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires.
Vehicle Care 357
Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection 0 356 and Tire Rotation 0 356. The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. To identify the age of a tire, use the tire manufacture date, which is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification
358 Vehicle Care
Number (TIN) molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2020 would have a 4-digit DOT date of 0320. Week 01 is the first full week (Sunday through Saturday) of each year.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber.
Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed
to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 346 for additional information.
GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle. See Tire Rotation 0 356.
{ Warning
Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires.
{ Warning
Mixing tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on the vehicle), brands, tread patterns, or types may cause loss of vehicle control, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tire on all wheels.
{ Warning
Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tires' maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating.
If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires.
The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected.
{ Warning
If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires 0 358 and Accessories and Modifications 0 323.
Vehicle Care 359
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
360 Vehicle Care
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing are not necessary on a regular basis. Consider an alignment check if there is unusual tire wear or the vehicle is significantly pulling to one side or the other. Some slight pull to the left or right, depending on the crown of the road and/or other road surface variations
such as troughs or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.
{ Warning
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air and cause loss of control, resulting in a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
{ Warning
Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Caution
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Vehicle Care 361
Tire Chains
{ Warning
If the vehicle has LT275/50R22 or LT275/ 50R24 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it contacts the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the tires of the drive axle only.
362 Vehicle Care
Caution
If the vehicle is equipped with a tire size other than LT275/50R22 or LT275/50R24 use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the drive axle only. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. See Tires 0 345. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible.
{ Warning
Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible.
{ Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 144.
If your vehicle is loaded at or near maximum cargo capacity, it may be difficult to fit the jack under the vehicle due to the environment (shoulder slope, road debris, etc.). Removal of some weight may improve the ability to fit the jack under the vehicle at the correct jacking location.
{ Warning
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall causing injury or death. Find a level place to change the tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the vehicle in P (Park).
3. Turn the vehicle off and do not restart the vehicle while it is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks, if equipped, on both sides of the tire at the opposite corner of the tire being changed.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jacking equipment to change a spare tire safely, follow the instructions below. Then see Tire Changing 0 369. To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 363.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (2), use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks (1), if equipped.
1. Wheel Block (If Equipped) 2. Flat Tire The following information explains how to repair or change a tire.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ Warning
Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 363
Warning (Continued)
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed the recommended pressure.
{ Warning
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location.
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit, there may not be a spare tire or tire changing equipment, and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely
364 Vehicle Care
damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions.
The kit includes:
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve 2. Sealant/Air Hose 3. Tire Sealant Canister
4. On/Off Button 5. Pressure Deflation Button 6. Pressure Gauge 7. Power Plug
8. Air Only Hose
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the tire sealant canister (3).
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the tire sealant canister. The tire sealant canister (3) should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement tire sealant canisters are available at your local dealer.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the tire sealant canister must be replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for five minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 144.
See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 362 for other important safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant canister (3) and
compressor from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 368. 2. Remove the air only hose (8) and the power plug (7) from the compressor. 3. Place the compressor on the ground near the flat tire.
4. Remove the cap from the sealant canister inlet valve (1) by turning it counterclockwise. Attach the air only hose (8) to the sealant canister inlet valve (1) by turning it clockwise until tight.
5. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) to the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until tight.
7. Plug the power plug (7) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets 0 101. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window.
Vehicle Care 365
8. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.
9. Press the on/off button (4) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (6) will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (6). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 350.
The pressure gauge (6) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
366 Vehicle Care
Caution
If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
11. Press the on/off button (4) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire. Therefore, Steps 1220 must be done immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
12. Unplug the power plug (7) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (2) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
15. Turn the air only hose (8) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire sealant canister inlet valve (1).
16. Replace the tire sealant canister inlet valve (1) cap.
17. Return the air only hose (8) and power plug (7) back to their original storage location.
18. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure, remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister and place it in a highly visible location. Do not exceed the speed on this label until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced.
19. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle.
20. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the sealant in the tire.
21. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to Steps 110 under "Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured)."
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 68 kPa (10 psi) below the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 68 kPa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure.
22. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, or vehicle.
23. Dispose of the used tire sealant canister (3) at a local dealer or in accordance with local state codes and practices.
24. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer.
25. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer within 161 km (100 mi) of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured)
The kit includes:
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve 2. Sealant/Air Hose 3. Tire Sealant Canister
4. On/Off Button 5. Pressure Deflation Button 6. Pressure Gauge 7. Power Plug
8. Air Only Hose
Vehicle Care 367
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers 0 144.
See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 362 for other important safety warnings.
1. Remove the compressor from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit 0 368.
2. Remove the air only hose (8) and the power plug (7) from the compressor.
3. Place the compressor on the ground near the flat tire.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the air only hose (8) to the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until tight.
6. Plug the power plug (7) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets 0 101.
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter.
368 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.
8. Press the on/off button (4) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (6). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure 0 350.
The pressure gauge (6) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached.
Caution
If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther.
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
10. Press the on/off button (4) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the compressor as it could be warm after usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (7) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
12. Turn the air only hose (8) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem.
13. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Return the air only hose (8) and power plug (7) back to their original storage location.
15. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle.
Accessory adapters that can be used to inflate an air mattress or a ball, etc., are located on the bottom of the compressor kit
Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor kit is stored in the underhood compartment. To remove the kit: 1. Open the hood. See Hood 0 19.
2. Loosen and remove the retainer by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Open the lid and remove the contents, or remove the case and contents.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse Steps 13.
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Vehicle Care 369
3. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate 0 29. Remove both caps covering the hexagon bolts.
1. Wheel Wrench 2. Wheel Wrench Adapter 3. Wheel Wrench Extension 4. Tool Kit 5. Wheel Blocks 6. Jack 7. Strap 8. Jack Handle
To access the jack and tools:
1. Open the hood. See Hood 0 19.
2. Loosen and remove the two retainers by turning counterclockwise. Remove the jack and tools. Place the jack near the tire being changed.
4. Assembly the wheel wrench (1) and wheel wrench adapter (2), and fit over the hexagon bolt as shown.
Caution
Use of an air wrench or other power tools with the carrier mechanism is not recommended and could damage the system. Use only the tools supplied with the carrier mechanism.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise until a resistance is noticeable.
370 Vehicle Care
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the other hexagon bolt.
7. Lift the spare tire cage (2) slightly and manually disengage both hook ends (3). For easier disengagement of the hook ends, insert the chisel end of the wheel wrench into one of the tubes (1) and apply upward pressure while disengaging the hook. Do this to both sides.
8. Lift the spare tire and remove it from the cage.
The cage will not lower completely to the ground but will allow ample room to remove the spare tire.
9. The spent road wheel will be stored in the rear of the vehicle. See "Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools."
10. Lift the empty spare tire cage (2) and manually engage both hook ends, with hook openings facing the rear of the vehicle (3).
Ensure that both hook ends stay engaged with the spare tire cage during the raising process that follows.
11. Assemble the wheel wrench and wheel wrench adapter as in Step 4.
12. Raise the empty spare tire carrier, turning the hexagon bolts clockwise until each side begins to ratchet.
Ratcheting of both bolts indicates the spare tire carrier has been raised to its maximum, stowed position.
The spare tire carrier is properly stowed when ratcheting has occurred on both bolts, and the hook ends are engaged and pulled taut from supporting the weight of the cage.
13. Replace the hexagon bolt caps.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
1. If the wheel has a center cap that covers the lug nuts, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in each of the slots in the cap, and gently pry it out.
2. Do a safety check before proceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat 0 362.
{ Warning
Unexpected wheel motion and/or direction when one or more wheels are off the ground for service work may result in injury. The vehicle may:
. Allow the wheels to rotate unexpectedly in either direction regardless of mode selection.
. Allow the wheels to rotate in reaction to attempts to rotate the tire(s) manually.
. Resist attempts to rotate the wheels manually.
Before lifting the vehicle to do your own service work, turn the vehicle off or place the vehicle in the Service Mode. To place the vehicle in Service Mode, see "Service Mode" under Power Modes 0 195.
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen all the wheel nuts, but do not remove them yet.
{ Warning
Getting under a vehicle when it is lifted on a jack is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Vehicle Care 371
{ Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
{ Warning
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
372 Vehicle Care
4. Position the jack lift head at the jack position nearest the flat tire.
5. Attach the jack handle to the jack by sliding the hook through the end of the jack.
6. Attach the wheel wrench to the end of the jack handle.
7. Raise the jack lift head until it is firmly contacting the lifting point. When properly positioned, the pin on the jack lift head fits inside the hole of the lifting point.
Caution
Make sure that the jack lift head is in the correct position or you may damage your vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the road tire to clear the ground.
9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
10. Remove the tire.
{ Warning
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can cause wheel nuts to become loose over time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt.
11. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel.
12. Place the spare tire on the wheel-mounting surface.
{ Warning
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash.
13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
{ Warning
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications 0 395 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Caution
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications 0 395 for the wheel nut torque specification.
Vehicle Care 373
15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence, as shown.
16. Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack from under the vehicle.
17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
{ Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
374 Vehicle Care
To store the flat tire: 1. Return the jack and tools to their original
storage location and fasten with two retainers. 2. Place the flat tire in the rear of the vehicle next to the cab.
3. Place the loop end of the flat tire secure strap through the lower cargo tie-down on the driver side of the vehicle. Place the hook end of the strap through the loop and pull it until the strap is fastened securely to the tie-down.
4. Route the hook end of the strap through the wheel, as shown.
5. Attach the hook end to the lower cargo tie-down on the passenger side of the vehicle.
6. Tighten the strap.
7. Close the tailgate and make sure it is fully latched.
Full-Size Spare Tire
If this vehicle came with a full-size spare tire, it was fully inflated when new, however, it can lose air over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. See Tire Pressure 0 350 and Vehicle Load Limits 0 191 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading the vehicle. For instructions on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire, see Tire Changing 0 369.
After installing the spare tire on the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and check that the spare is correctly inflated. The spare tire is made to perform well at speeds up to 112 km/h (70 MPH) at the recommended inflation pressure, so you can finish your trip.
Have the damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced and installed back onto the vehicle as soon as possible so the spare tire will be available in case it is needed again. Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because they will not fit. Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.
Caution
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, do not drive in four-wheel drive until the flat tire is repaired and/or replaced. The vehicle could be damaged and the repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Never use four-wheel drive when a different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle may have a different size spare tire than the road tires originally installed on the vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on this vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and a different size spare tire is installed, drive only in two-wheel drive.
If the vehicle has a spare tire that does not match the original road tires and wheels in size and type, do not include the spare in the tire rotation.
If equipped with a temporary use full-size spare tire, it is indicated on the tire sidewall. See Tire Sidewall Labeling 0 346. This spare tire should not be driven on over 112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph) when pulling a trailer, at the proper inflation pressure. Repair and replace the road tire as soon as it is convenient, and stow the spare tire for future use.
Jump Starting
Jump Starting - North America
For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery - North America 0 330.
If the battery has run down, use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start the vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{ Warning
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories can expose you to chemicals including lead and lead compounds, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.
See California Proposition 65 Warning 0 1.
{ Warning
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
. They contain acid that can burn you.
. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
. They contain enough electricity to burn you. (Continued)
Vehicle Care 375
Warning (Continued)
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
Caution The vehicle is equipped with an AGM/ VRLA 12-volt battery, which can be damaged by using the incorrect type of trickle charger. An AGM/VRLA-compatible charger must be used, with the appropriate setting selected. Follow the trickle charger manufacturer instructions.
Caution Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
The battery is under a cover in the underhood compartment. To access the battery under the hood, the left cover needs to be removed.
376 Vehicle Care
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to the positive (+) terminal. Negative (-) will go to the negative (-) terminal on the battery providing the jump start to the negative grounding point for the discharged battery.
Connection Points and Sequence 1. Discharged Battery Positive (+) Terminal 2. Good Battery Positive (+) Terminal 3. Good Battery Negative (-) Terminal 4. Discharged Battery Negative (-) Grounding Point
The good battery positive (+) terminal and the good battery negative () terminal are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start.
The discharged battery positive (+) terminal and the discharged battery negative () grounding point are on the passenger side of the vehicle.
The discharged battery positive (+) terminal is under a cover. Remove the cover to expose the terminal.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Caution
If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you do not want. You would
not be able to start the vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put the vehicles into P (Park). If the other vehicle has a manual transmission, put the vehicle in N (Neutral) before setting the parking brakes.
Caution
If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting.
3. Turn off both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood. See Hood 0 19.
5. Turn the three bolts three quarter turn counter-clockwise and remove the left side access cover.
6. Locate the battery positive (+) terminal and negative (-) grounding point.
7. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
8. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the discharged battery positive (+) terminal.
Do not let the other end touch metal.
9. Connect the other end of the red positive (+) cable to the good battery positive (+) terminal.
10. Connect one end of the black negative (-) cable to the good battery negative (-) terminal.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step.
11. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable to the discharged battery negative (-) grounding point.
12. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and keep the vehicle running for a while.
13. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
Caution
If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables.
Vehicle Care 377
After starting the disabled vehicle and removing the jumper cables, allow it to idle for several minutes.
After removing the jumper cables, install the left side access cover by turning the three bolts three quarters clockwise.
Towing the Vehicle
Transporting a Disabled Vehicle
Caution Incorrectly transporting a disabled vehicle may cause damage to the vehicle. Use proper tire straps to secure the vehicle to the flatbed tow truck. Do not strap or hook to any frame, underbody, or suspension component not specified below. Do not move vehicles with drive axle tires on the ground. Damage is not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution The vehicle may be equipped with an Electric Parking Brake (EPB) and/or an electronic shifter. In the event of a loss of
(Continued)
378 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
12-volt battery power, the EPB cannot be released, and the vehicle cannot be shifted to N (Neutral). Tire skates or dollies must be used under the non-rolling tires to prevent damage while loading/unloading the vehicle. Dragging the vehicle will cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution
The vehicle may be equipped with a tow eye. Improper use of the tow eye may cause damage to the vehicle and is not covered by the vehicle warranty. If equipped, use the tow eye to load the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck from a flat road surface, or to move the vehicle a very short distance at a walking pace. The tow eye is not designed for off-road recovery. The vehicle must be in N (Neutral) with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) released when using the tow eye.
Contact a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be transported. GM recommends a flatbed tow truck to transport a disabled vehicle. Use ramps to help reduce approach angles, if necessary.
If equipped, a tow eye may be located near the spare tire or emergency jack. Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle from the snow, mud, sand, or ditch. Tow eye threads may have right or left-hand threads. Use caution when installing or removing the tow eye.
The vehicle must be in N (Neutral) and the electric parking brake must be released when loading the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck.
. If the vehicle is equipped with car wash mode and has 12-volt battery power, refer to "Car Wash Mode" under Electric Drive Unit 0 198 to place the vehicle in N (Neutral).
. If the 12-volt battery is dead and/or the vehicle will not start. Try to jump start the vehicle. Refer to Jump Starting - North America 0 375 and if the jump start is successful, retry the "Car Wash Mode" procedure.
Front Tow Eye
The vehicle is equipped with a tow eye. Only use the tow eye to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed car carrier from a flat road surface. Do not use the tow eye to pull the vehicle from snow, mud, sand, or ditch. Carefully open the cover in the fascia by using the small notch that conceals the tow eye socket. Install the tow eye into the socket and turn it until it is fully tightened. When the tow eye is removed, reinstall the cover with the notch in the original position.
Front Attachment Points
The vehicle is equipped with specific attachment points to be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed car carrier from a flat road surface. Do not use these attachment points to pull the vehicle from snow, mud, sand, or ditch.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Caution Dolly towing or dinghy towing may damage the vehicle. Always put the vehicle on a flatbed truck or trailer.
This vehicle was neither designed nor intended to be towed with any of its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle is disabled and needs to be towed, see Transporting a Disabled Vehicle 0 377.
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
Locks
Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 392.
Washing the Vehicle
To preserve the exterior finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight.
{ Warning
Do not power wash any part of the vehicle's interior, including the vinyl floor covering. This could damage safety and other systems in the vehicle, which would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Vehicle Care 379
Caution Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product.
Caution Avoid using high-pressure washers closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Cleaning Underhood Components
Caution Do not power wash any component under the hood that has this e symbol.
(Continued)
380 Vehicle Care
Caution (Continued)
This could cause damage that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Solvents or aggressive cleaners may harm underhood components. The usages of these chemicals should be avoided.
Recommend water only.
A pressure washer may be used, but care must be utilized. The following criteria must be followed: . Water pressure must be kept below
14 000 KPa (2,000 PSI). . Water temperature must be below 80 °C
(180 °F). . Spray nozzle with a 40 degree wide angle
spray pattern or wider must be used. . Nozzle must be kept at least 30 cm (1 ft)
away from all surfaces.
Automatic Car Wash
Caution
Some automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle, wheels, and ground effects. Automatic car washes are
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
not recommended, due to lack of clearance for the undercarriage and/or wide rear tires and wheels.
Caution
Automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle, wheels, ground effects, and convertible top (if equipped). Do not use automatic car washes due to lack of clearance for the undercarriage, wide rear tires, and wheels.
If using an automatic car wash, follow the instructions carefully. The windshield wiper and rear window wiper, if equipped, must be turned off. Remove any accessories that can be damaged or interfere with the car wash equipment.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Finish Care
Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/ wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Perform occasional hand waxing or mild polishing to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.
Caution
Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or matte paint as damage can occur.
Caution
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle.
To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings
Caution
Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions: . Be sure the molding is cool to the touch
before applying any cleaning solution.
. Use only approved cleaning solutions for aluminum, chrome, or stainless steel. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.
. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer's instructions.
. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.
. Use a nonabrasive wax after washing to protect and extend the molding finish.
Spray-In Bedliner Care
A spray-in bedliner is a permanent coating that bonds to the truck bed and cannot be removed. Promptly rinse the bedliner surface following a chemical spill to avoid permanent damage.
Spray-in bedliners can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty hauling, and hard water stains. Clean it periodically by washing off the loose dirt and using a mild detergent. To restore the original appearance, apply the bedliner conditioner available through your dealer.
Vehicle Care 381
Caution
Using silicone-based products may damage the bedliner, reduce the slip-resistant texture, and attract dirt.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals, and Stripes
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems, decals, and stripes. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" previously in this section.
Lamp covers are made of plastic, and some have a UV protective coating. Do not clean or wipe them while they are dry.
Do not use any of the following on lamp covers: . Abrasive or caustic agents. . Washer fluids and other cleaning agents
in higher concentrations than suggested by the manufacturer. . Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or other harsh cleaners. . Ice scrapers or other hard items. . Aftermarket appearance caps or covers while the lamps are illuminated, due to excessive heat generated.
382 Vehicle Care
Caution Failure to clean lamps properly can cause damage to the lamp cover that would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Caution Using wax on low gloss black finish stripes can increase the gloss level and create a non-uniform finish. Clean low gloss stripes with soap and water only.
Air Intakes Clear debris from the air intakes, between the hood and windshield, when washing the vehicle.
Shutter System
The vehicle may have a shutter system that automatically closes the frontal cooling openings. This system promotes airflow around the vehicle, reducing drag and providing energy savings. Ensure the shutter system is clear of any visible debris, snow, or ice. If the Service Vehicle Soon light activates and remains after clearing the shutter system, see Service Vehicle Soon Light (Propulsion System Failure) 0 117. Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking.
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.
Weatherstrips
Apply weatherstrip lubricant on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips once a year. Hot, dry climates may require more frequent application. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth.
Tires
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires.
Caution
Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle.
Wheels and Wheel Trim
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
Caution
Chrome wheels and chrome wheel trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium chloride or calcium chloride. These are used on roads for conditions such as dust control. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure.
Caution
To avoid surface damage on wheels and wheel trim, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, or brushes. Use only GM approved cleaners. Do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash that uses silicon carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Brake System
Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear, and rotors for surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect all other brake parts.
Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components
Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear at least once a year.
Vehicle Care 383
Inspect power steering for proper attachment, connections, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
Visually check constant velocity joint boots and axle seals for leaks.
Caution
Lubrication of applicable suspension points should not be done unless the temperature is -12 °C (10 °F) or higher, or damage could result.
Body Component Lubrication
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the steel charge port door hinge unless the components are plastic.
Underbody Maintenance
At least twice a year, spring and fall, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to thoroughly clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. If equipped with power assist steps, extend them and then use a high pressure wash to clean all joints and gaps.
384 Vehicle Care
Do not directly power wash the transfer case and/or front/rear axle output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and/or axles and should be replaced.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Use original manufacturer replacement parts to maintain the vehicle warranty.
Finish Damage
Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Refer to "Finish Care" previously in this section.
Interior Care
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Before using cleaners, read and follow all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, open the doors and windows for proper ventilation. Newspapers or dark garments can transfer color to the vehicle's interior.
Caution
Immediately remove cleaners, hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result.
Caution
Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage to the vehicle. Apply all cleaners directly to a cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners on any switches or controls.
When using liquid soap cleaners, follow the directions on the specific cleaner or soap solution for dilution instructions.
Caution
To prevent damage:
. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove soil from any interior surface.
. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.
. Never rub any surface aggressively or with too much pressure.
. Do not get any exposed electrical components wet.
. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.
. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.
. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents.
. Do not use disinfecting wipes that are scented or contain bleach. Do not use wipes or cleaners that show a color transfer to the wipe or change the appearance of the interior surface when used. (Continued)
Caution (Continued) . Do not use scented or gel-type hand
sanitizers. If hand sanitizer comes in contact with interior surfaces of the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.
Interior Glass
To clean, use a microfiber cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. If necessary, use a commercial glass cleaner after cleaning with plain water.
Caution
To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger.
Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog.
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with water and mild soap.
Coated Moldings
Clean coated moldings. . When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge
or soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water. . When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water.
Vinyl/Rubber
If equipped with vinyl floor and rubber floor mats, use a soft cloth and/or brush dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For more thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution.
{ Warning
Do not use cleaners that contain silicone, wax-based products, or cleaners that increase gloss on vinyl/rubber floor and mats. These cleaners can permanently change the appearance and feel of the vinyl/rubber and can make the floor slippery. Your foot could slip while operating the vehicle, and you could lose control, resulting in a crash. You or others could be injured.
Vehicle Care 385
Fabric/Carpet/Suede
Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating vacuum brush attachment is used, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible:
. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.
. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.
To clean:
1. Saturate a clean, lint-free colorfast cloth with water. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet.
2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil into the fabric.
4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth.
386 Vehicle Care
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by plain water.
If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet.
After cleaning, use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays
Use a microfiber cloth on high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays. First, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that can scratch the surface. Then gently clean by rubbing with a microfiber cloth. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use.
Caution
Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Low Gloss Paint Surfaces, and Natural Open Pore Wood Surfaces
Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap and water solution.
Caution
Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, or spot removers. Do not use liquids that contain alcohol or solvents on
(Continued)
Caution (Continued)
leather seats. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim and are not recommended.
Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions.
Caution
Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Care of Seat Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ Warning
Do not bleach or dye seat belt webbing. It may severely weaken the webbing. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean and rinse seat belt webbing only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Allow the webbing to dry.
Floor Mats
{ Warning
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals.
Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat use: . The original equipment floor mats are
designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need to be replaced, it is recommended that GM-certified floor
mats are purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.
. Do not use a floor mat if the vehicle is not equipped with a floor mat retainer on the driver side floor.
. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.
. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on top of another.
Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat to unlock each retainer and remove.
Vehicle Care 387
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snap into position. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place. Verify the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals. Cleaning Rubber Floor Mats (All-Weather Mats and Floor Liners) See "Vinyl/Rubber" under Interior Care 0 384 for important cleaning information.
388 Service and Maintenance
Service and Maintenance
General Information General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Owner Checks and Services Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . 392
Maintenance Records Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
General Information
Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed.
Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up-to-date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.
Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.
Caution
Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
Do not have chemical flushes that are not approved by GM performed on the vehicle. The use of flushes, solvents, cleaners, or lubricants that are not approved by GM could damage the vehicle, requiring expensive repairs that are not covered by the vehicle warranty.
The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition.
The Additional Required Services are for vehicles that:
. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 191.
. Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
{ Warning
Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work 0 323.
Maintenance Schedule
Rotate Tires and Perform Required Services Every 12 000 km (7,500 mi)
Tires are rotated to achieve a more uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important.
Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires 0 357 and Wheel Replacement 0 361.
. Perform Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection. See Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) 0 390.
. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care 0 379.
Additional Required Services -- Normal Service
Every 36 000 km (22,500 mi)
. Replace passenger compartment air filter. Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent passenger compartment air filter replacement may be needed if driving in areas with heavy traffic, poor air quality, high dust levels, or environmental allergens. Passenger compartment air filter replacement may also be needed if there is reduced airflow, window fogging, or odors. Your GM dealer can help determine when to replace the filter.
Every 161 000 km (100,000 mi)
. Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. See Gas Strut(s) 0 334.
Service and Maintenance 389
Every 240 000 km (150,000 mi) . Drain and fill vehicle coolant circuits. Or
every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System 0 327.
Severe Conditions Requiring More Frequent Maintenance . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot
weather. . Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous
terrain. . Frequently towing a trailer. . Used for high speed or competitive
driving. . Used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
Additional Required Services -- Severe Service
Every 72 000 km (45,000 mi) . Change electric drive unit fluid. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 392.
Owner Checks and Services
Every Five Years . Replace brake fluid every five years. See
Brake Fluid 0 329.
390 Service and Maintenance
Every Seven Years
. Replace Air Conditioning Desiccant every seven years. The air conditioning system requires maintenance every seven years. This service requires replacement of the desiccant to help the longevity and efficient operation of the air conditioning system. This service can be complex. See your dealer.
Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI)
A Multi Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) completed by a trained technician is a maintenance assessment of your vehicle. The benefit of the MPVI is to identify service items that require immediate attention and those that may require attention in the future.
The technician will perform the following checks on your vehicle. You can obtain a copy of the appropriate MPVI checklist on your country's GM Certified Service website. For a complete list of checks, inspections, and services, see your dealer.
Some items may not apply to your vehicle and/or region.
Diagnostics . OnStar active, if equipped . Service history/recall check
Exterior Lights . Visual inspection
Windshield and Wipers . Visual inspection
12 Volt Battery . Battery visual inspection . Battery test results . Battery cables and connections
Systems, Fluids, and Visible Leak Inspection . Electric Drive Unit . Drive axle . Transfer case . Power electronics cooling system . Windshield washer fluid
Tire Inspection . Tire pressure, tread depth, and wear . Rotation, if applicable . Alignment check, optional . Reset tire pressure monitor
. Check tire sealant expiration date, if equipped
. Check spare tire, if equipped
Brakes . Check brake system
Visible and Functional Inspections . Seat belt components . Accelerator pedal . Passenger compartment air filter,
if equipped . Hoses . Shocks and struts . Steering components . Axle boots or driveshaft and u-joints . Compartment lift struts, if equipped . Floor mats secured, no interference with
pedals . Horn . Starter switch
Lubricate . Chassis components
Owner Checks and Services
. At least twice a year, have underbody flushing service performed. See "Underbody Maintenance" in Exterior Care 0 379.
Service and Maintenance 391
392 Service and Maintenance
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name or specification, including fluids or lubricants not listed here, can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Electric Drive Unit
DEXRON ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Hydraulic Brake System
GM approved DOT 4 Hydraulic Brake Fluid.
Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and Tailgate Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube. See your dealer.
Vehicle Coolant Circuits
Use only ACDelco Premix (50/50 mixture of de-ionized water and DEX-COOL Coolant). See your dealer.
Windshield Washer
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
13508023
Wiper Blades
IDriver Side 60 cm (23.6 in)
84992570
IPassenger Side 55 cm (21.7 in)
84992571
ACDelco Part Number CF185
-- --
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Service and Maintenance 393
394 Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 394 Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . 395
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) also appears on the Vehicle Certification label and certificates of title and registration.
Service Parts Identification
There may be a large barcode on the certification label on the center pillar that you can scan for the following information: . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . Model designation . Paint information . Production options
If there is not a large barcode on this label, then you will find this same information on a label inside of the glove box.
Technical Data 395
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants 0 392 for more information.
Application
Capacities
Metric
English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge type and amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your
dealer for more information.
Total Cooling System*
See your dealer.
Wheel Nut Torque
190 Y
140 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
*Cooling systems capacity values are based on the individual cooling system and its components. See your dealer.
396 Customer Information
Customer Information
Customer Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . 396 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Online Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . 399 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . 401 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . 401 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Publication Ordering Information . . . . . 404 Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . 405 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Customer Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by your dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of your dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO : If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by your dealership without further help, in the U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of Canada Customer Care Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following information available to give the Customer Assistance representative:
. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.
. Dealership name and location.
. Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That is why we suggest following Step One first.
STEP THREE -- U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) AUTO LINE Program to enforce your rights.
The BBB AUTO LINE Program is an out-of-court program administered by BBB National Programs, Inc. to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB AUTO LINE Program using the toll-free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB National Programs, Inc. 1676 International Drive Suite 550 McLean, VA 22102
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 www.bbbautoline.org
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Information 397
STEP THREE -- Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, General Motors of Canada Company wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Company has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We believe our impartial program offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors Customer Care Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
398 Customer Information
The Mediation/Arbitration Program c/o Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet is committed to assisting customers. Visit us online at www.chevrolet.com/support (U.S.) or www.my.chevrolet.ca (Canada) to chat with us or find answers to commonly asked questions, tips, vehicle how-to instructions, and available support.
Need more help? Use the phone numbers or mailing addresses below for additional assistance.
United States and Puerto Rico
Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020 TTY: Dial 711 relay service and contact 1-800-833-2438 Roadside Assistance: 1-888-811-1926
Canada
Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5
1-800-263-3777 (English) 1-800-263-7854 (French) 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and/or who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet is able to assist. Please dial the national 711 relay service and contact 1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Online Account
Create a Chevrolet Account (U.S.) at chevrolet.com
Learn more about your vehicle features, shop for and manage your connected services and OnStar plans, and access diagnostic information specific to your vehicle.
Membership Benefits
E : Download owner's manuals and view
vehicle-specific how-to videos.
G : View maintenance schedules, alerts, and
Vehicle Diagnostic Information. Schedule service appointments.
I : View service records from your
dealership and add your own.
D : Select a preferred dealer and view
locations, maps, phone numbers, and hours.
r : Track your vehicle's warranty
information.
J : View active recalls by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 0 394.
H : Manage your profile and payment
information. View your GM Rewards Card earnings and My Chevrolet Rewards points.
F : Chat with online help representatives.
Visit chevrolet.com and create an account today. Chevrolet Owner Centre (Canada) mychevrolet.ca Visit the Chevrolet Owner Centre at mychevrolet.ca (English) or my.chevrolet.ca (French) to access similar benefits to the U.S. site.
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program
This program is available to qualified applicants for cost reimbursement, up to certain limits, of eligible aftermarket
adaptive equipment required for the vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/ scooter lift for the vehicle.
To learn about the GM Mobility program, see www.gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text Telephone (TTY) users, please dial the national 711 relay service and contact 1-800-323-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility program. See www.gm.ca, or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483) for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
From the U.S., call 1-888-811-1926; Text Telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438.
From Canada, call 1-844-637-1756.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready: . Your name, home address, and home
telephone number. . Telephone number of your location.
Customer Information 399
. Location of the vehicle. . Model, year, color, and license plate
number of the vehicle.
. Odometer reading and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
. Description of the problem.
Coverage
Tow services are covered under the EV Component Coverage warranty. All other Roadside benefits are covered under EV Roadside Assistance Non-Tow Services. For details on additional Roadside coverage, contact Chevrolet Roadside Assistance.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification.
400 Customer Information
General Motors North America and Chevrolet reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Services Provided
. Lock-Out Service: Service to unlock the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may be available if you have OnStar. For security reasons, the driver must present identification before this service is given.
. Tow from a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the nearest certified Chevrolet EV dealer for warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot be driven. Assistance is not given when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
If the vehicle is out of charge, Roadside will tow the vehicle to the nearest charging station or to the customer's home, whichever is closest.
. Flat Tire Change: Service to change a flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped, must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to jump start a dead battery.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your trip is interrupted due to a warranty event, incidental expenses may be reimbursed. Items considered are reasonable and customary hotel, meals, rental car, or a vehicle being delivered back to the customer, up to 500 miles. Contact Chevrolet Roadside Assistance for Trip Interruption eligibility at the time of vehicle disablement.
Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance
. Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
. Legal fines.
. Mounting, dismounting, or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Service is not provided if a vehicle is in an area that is not accessible to the service vehicle or is not a regularly traveled or
maintained public road, which includes ice and winter roads. Off-road use is not covered.
Services Specific to Canadian Vehicles
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over 150 km (93 mi) from where the trip was started to qualify. Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a copy of the repair orders are required. Once authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor will help to make arrangements and explain how to receive payment.
. Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside Assistance advisor may give permission to get local emergency road service. You will receive payment, up to $100, after sending the original receipt to Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however any cost for parts and labor for repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner's responsibility.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When the vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising the service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related. If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same-day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles with the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada), Federal Emission, Extended Powertrain or Electric specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several Courtesy Transportation options are available to assist in reducing inconvenience when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate manual entitled "Limited Warranty and Owner Assistance Information" produced for new vehicles provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to do so, your dealer may offer the following transportation options:
Shuttle Service
This includes one-way or round-trip shuttle service within reasonable time and distance parameters of your dealer's area.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If overnight warranty repairs are needed, and public transportation is used, the expense must be supported by original receipts and within the maximum amount allowed by GM. If U.S. customers arrange
Customer Information 401
their own transportation, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
For an overnight warranty repair, the dealer may provide an available courtesy rental vehicle or provide for reimbursement of a rental vehicle. Reimbursement is limited and must be supported by original receipts as well as a signed and completed rental agreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Additional fees such as fuel, rental vehicle insurance, taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair are also your responsibility.
It may not be possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer. Contact your dealer for specific availability.
402 Customer Information
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If the vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified technician using the proper equipment and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs diminish the vehicle resale value, and safety performance can be compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which the vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are the best choice to ensure that the vehicle's designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part may be an acceptable choice to maintain the vehicle's originally designed appearance and safety performance; however, the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are made by companies other than GM and may not have been tested for the vehicle. As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/ corrosion problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by the GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts is not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair facility that meets your needs before you ever need collision repairs.
Your dealer may have a collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and state-of-the-art equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to the GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you ensure that the vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier, consider switching to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing company may require you to have insurance that ensures repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read the lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move the vehicle only if its position puts you in danger, or you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
Give only the necessary information to police and other parties involved in the crash.
For emergency towing see Roadside Assistance Program 0 399.
Gather the following information: . Driver name, address, and telephone
number . Driver license number . Owner name, address, and telephone
number . Vehicle license plate number . Vehicle make, model, and model year . Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . Insurance company and policy number
. General description of the damage to the other vehicle
Choose a reputable repair facility that uses quality replacement parts. See "Collision Parts" earlier in this section.
In a crash, the sensing system may shut down the high voltage system. See Battery North America 0 330 for important safety information. If an airbag has inflated, see What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? 0 64.
If the vehicle is damaged from a crash, flood, fire, or other event it may be necessary to have the vehicle inspected. See Battery - North America 0 330 for important safety information.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take the vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Customer Information 403
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with the repair professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember, if the vehicle is leased, you may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuation based on that insurance company's collision policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with that company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as the cost stays within reasonable limits.
404 Customer Information
Publication Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on the engine/propulsion, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical system, steering system, body, etc.
Customer Literature
Owner's manuals are written specifically for owners and are intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner's manual includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Customer literature publications available for purchase include owner's manuals, warranty manuals, and portfolios. Portfolios include an owner's manual, warranty manual, if applicable, and zip lock bag or pouch.
Current and Past Models
Service manuals and customer literature are available for many GM vehicles.
To check availability and to order, call 1-800-551-4123 MondayFriday, 8:00 a.m. 6:00 p.m. Eastern Time
For credit card orders only (VISA, MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
To order by mail, write to:
Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service 47911 Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI 48170
Make checks payable in U.S. funds.
Radio Frequency Statement
This vehicle uses license-exempt transmitters / receivers / systems that operate on a radio frequency that complies with Part 15/ Part 18 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development (ISED) Canada's license-exempt RSS(s) / RSP-100 / ICES-GEN.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to https://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from https://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that the vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, and notify General Motors of Canada Company. Call Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0510; go to:
www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)
www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)
or write to:
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Directorate Defect Investigations and Recalls Division 80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, notify General Motors.
In the U.S., call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
Customer Care Centre General Motors of Canada Company 500 Wentworth Street W Oshawa, ON L1J 0C5
In Mexico, call 800-466-0811 or 800-508-0000.
Customer Information 405
In other Central America and Caribbean Countries, call 52-555-901-2369.
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy
The vehicle has a number of computers that record information about the vehicle's performance and how it is driven or used. For example, the vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control electric drive unit performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag deployment and to deploy them in a crash, and, if equipped, to provide antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules may store data to help the dealer technician service the vehicle or to help GM improve safety or features. Some modules may also store data about how the vehicle is operated, such as rate of energy consumption or average speed. These modules may retain personal preferences, such as radio presets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
406 Customer Information
Cybersecurity
GM collects information about the use of your vehicle including operational and safety related information. We collect this information to provide, evaluate, improve, and troubleshoot our products and services and to develop new products and services. The protection of vehicle electronics systems and customer data from unauthorized outside electronic access or control is important to GM. GM maintains appropriate security standards, practices, guidelines and controls aimed at defending the vehicle and the vehicle service ecosystem against unauthorized electronic access, detecting possible malicious activity in related networks, and responding to suspected cybersecurity incidents in a timely, coordinated and effective manner. Security incidents could impact your safety or compromise your private data. To minimize security risks, please do not connect your vehicle electronic systems to unauthorized devices or connect your vehicle to any unknown or untrusted networks (such as Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or similar technology). In the event you suspect any security incident impacting your data or the safe operation of your vehicle, please stop operating your vehicle and contact your dealer.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access these data or share it with others except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in response to an official request by police or similar government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation through the discovery process; or, as permitted by law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for GM research needs or may be made available to others for research purposes, where a need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
OnStar
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar and has an active service plan, additional data may be collected and transmitted through the OnStar system. This includes information about the vehicle's operation; collisions involving the vehicle; the use of the vehicle and its features, including infotainment; and the location and approximate GPS speed of the vehicle. Refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions and Privacy Statement on the OnStar website.
See OnStar Additional Information 0 410.
Infotainment System
If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system as part of the infotainment system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. See the infotainment section for information on stored data and for deletion instructions.
Customer Information 407
408 OnStar
OnStar
OnStar Overview OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
OnStar Services Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
OnStar Additional Information OnStar Additional Information . . . . . . . . . 410
OnStar Overview
= Voice Command Button Q Blue OnStar Button > Red Emergency Button
This vehicle may be equipped with a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to an OnStar Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connections, and Diagnostics Services. OnStar services may require a paid service plan and data plan. OnStar requires the vehicle battery and electrical system, cellular service, and GPS satellite signals to be available and operating. OnStar acts as a link to existing emergency service providers. OnStar may collect information about you and your vehicle, including location information. See OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms for more details including system limitations at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
The OnStar system status light is next to the OnStar buttons. If the status light is:
. Solid Green: System is ready.
. Flashing Green: On a call.
. Red: Indicates a problem.
. Off: System is off. Press Q twice to
speak with an OnStar Advisor.
Press Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an Advisor.
Functionality of the Voice Command button may vary by vehicle and region.
Press = to:
. Open the OnStar app on the infotainment display. If equipped, the infotainment system has OnStar controls in the embedded OnStar app on the infotainment home screen. Most OnStar functions that can be performed with the buttons can be done using the app. To open the app, touch the OnStar icon on the home screen. App updates require a corresponding service plan. Features vary by region and model. Features are subject to change. For more information,
press Q.
Or . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation voice
commands. . Obtain and customize the Wi-Fi hotspot
name or SSID and password, if equipped.
Press = to answer or hang up an
Advisor-initiated call.
Press Q to connect to an Advisor to:
. Verify account information or update contact information.
. Get driving directions. . Receive a Diagnostic check of the vehicle's
key operating systems. . Receive Roadside Assistance. . Manage Wi-Fi Settings, if equipped.
Press > to get a priority connection to an
OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to: . Get help for an emergency. . Be a Good Samaritan or respond to an
AMBER Alert. . Get assistance in severe weather or other
crisis situations and find evacuation routes.
OnStar Services
Emergency
Emergency Services require an active safety and security plan. With Automatic Crash Response, built-in sensors can automatically alert a specially trained OnStar Advisor who is immediately connected in to the vehicle to help.
Press > for a priority connection to an
OnStar Advisor who can contact emergency service providers, direct them to your exact location, and relay important information.
With OnStar Crisis Assist, specially trained Advisors are available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, to provide a central point of contact, assistance, and information during a crisis.
With Roadside Assistance, Advisors can locate a nearby service provider to help with a flat tire or a battery jump.
OnStar 409
Security
If equipped, OnStar provides these services:
. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance, OnStar Advisors can use GPS to pinpoint the vehicle and help authorities quickly recover it.
. With Remote Ignition Block, if equipped, OnStar can block the vehicle from being restarted.
. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown, if equipped, OnStar can work with law enforcement to gradually slow the vehicle down.
Theft Alarm Notification
If equipped, if the doors are locked and the vehicle alarm sounds, a notification by text, e-mail, or phone call will be sent. If the vehicle is stolen, an OnStar Advisor can work with authorities to recover the vehicle.
410 OnStar
OnStar Additional Information
In-Vehicle Audio Messages
Audio messages may play important information at the following times:
. Prior to vehicle purchase. Press Q to set
up an account. . After change in ownership and at
90 days.
Transferring Service
Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor can cancel or change account information.
Selling/Transferring the Vehicle
Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) immediately to terminate your OnStar or connected services if the vehicle is disposed of, sold, transferred, or if the lease ends.
Reactivation for Subsequent Owners
Press Q and follow the prompts to speak to
an Advisor as soon as possible. The Advisor will update vehicle records and explain OnStar or connected service options.
How OnStar Service Works
Automatic Crash Response, Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Remote Services, and Roadside Assistance are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar services are available everywhere or on all vehicles. For more information, a full description of OnStar services, system limitations, and OnStar User Terms, Privacy Statement, and Software Terms:
. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
. Press Q to speak with an Advisor.
OnStar or connected services cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless service provider for service in that area. The wireless service provider must also have coverage, network capacity, reception, and technology compatible with OnStar or connected services. Service involving location information about the vehicle cannot work unless GPS signals are available, unobstructed, and compatible with the OnStar hardware. OnStar or connected
services may not work if the OnStar equipment is not properly installed or it has not been properly maintained. If equipment or software is added, connected, or modified, OnStar or connected services may not work. Other problems beyond the control of OnStar -- such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather, electrical system design and architecture of the vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone network congestion or jamming -- may prevent service.
See Radio Frequency Statement 0 404.
Services for People with Disabilities
Advisors provide services to help with physical disabilities and medical conditions.
Press Q to help:
. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., that meets accessibility needs.
. Provide directions to the closest hospital or pharmacy in urgent situations.
TTY Users
OnStar has the ability to communicate to deaf, hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired customers while in the vehicle. If equipped,
the TTY system provides in-vehicle access to all OnStar services, except OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
Turn your vehicle on and keep it in P (Park). From the infotainment home screen, access TTY by touching Settings > Apps > Phone > TTY > Enable OnStar TTY mode. When TTY mode is active, you can make and receive phone calls using the infotainment display.
OnStar Personal Identification Number (PIN)
A PIN is needed to access some OnStar services. The PIN will need to be changed the first time when speaking with an Advisor. To change the OnStar PIN, contact
an OnStar Advisor by pressing Q or calling
1-888-4ONSTAR.
Warranty
OnStar equipment may be warranted as part of the vehicle warranty.
Languages
The vehicle can be programmed to respond
in multiple languages. Press Q and ask for
an Advisor. Advisors are available in English, Spanish, and French. Available languages may vary by country.
Potential Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the vehicle has been off continuously for an extended period of time without being started. To find out the duration of time that applies for the vehicle, contact an OnStar Advisor by
pressing Q or calling 1-888-4ONSTAR. If the
vehicle has not been started for an extended period of time, OnStar can contact Roadside Assistance or a locksmith to help gain access to the vehicle.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
. Obstruction of the GPS can occur in a large city with tall buildings; in parking garages; around airports; in tunnels and underpasses; or in an area with very dense trees. If GPS signals are not available, the OnStar system should still operate to call OnStar. However, OnStar could have difficulty identifying the exact location.
. In emergency situations, OnStar can use the last stored GPS location to send to emergency responders.
OnStar 411
A temporary loss of GPS can cause loss of the ability to send a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route. The Advisor may give a verbal route or may ask for a call back after the vehicle is driven into an open area.
Cellular and GPS Antennas
Cellular reception is required for OnStar to send remote signals to the vehicle. Do not place items over or near the antenna to prevent blocking cellular and GPS signal reception.
Unable to Connect to OnStar Message
If there is limited cellular coverage or the cellular network has reached maximum capacity, this message may come on. Press
Q to try the call again or try again after
driving a few miles into another cellular area.
Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar services require a vehicle electrical system, wireless service, and GPS satellite technologies to be available and operating for features to function properly. These systems may not operate if the battery is discharged or disconnected.
412 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment
The OnStar system is integrated into the electrical architecture of the vehicle. Do not add any electrical equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 320. Added electrical equipment may interfere with the operation of the OnStar system and cause it to not operate.
Vehicle Software Updates
OnStar or GM may remotely deliver software updates or changes to the vehicle without further notice or consent. These updates or changes may enhance or maintain safety, security, or the operation of the vehicle or the vehicle systems. Software updates or changes may affect or erase data or settings that are stored in the vehicle, such as saved navigation destinations or pre-set radio stations. Neither OnStar nor GM is responsible for any affected or erased data or settings. These updates or changes may also collect personal information. Such collection is described in the OnStar Privacy Statement or separately disclosed at the time of installation. These updates or changes may also cause a system to automatically communicate with GM servers to collect information about vehicle system status,
identify whether updates or changes are available, or deliver updates or changes. An active OnStar agreement constitutes consent to these software updates or changes and agreement that either OnStar or GM may remotely deliver them to the vehicle.
Connected Services Privacy Statement
The complete OnStar Privacy Statement may be found at www.onstar.com (U.S.), or www.onstar.ca (Canada). We recommend that you review it. If you have any questions, call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or press Q to speak with
an Advisor. Users of wireless communications are cautioned that the privacy of any information sent via wireless cellular communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept or access transmissions and private communications without consent.
OnStar Software Acknowledgements
To obtain the source code under GPL, LGPL, MPL, and other open source licenses, that is contained in this product, please visit www.opensourceautomotive.com/an/GM. In addition to the source code, all referred license terms, warranty disclaimers, and copyright notices are available for download.
This offer is valid for a period of three years after our last shipment of this product. This offer is valid to anyone in receipt of this information.
*Provided through Continental Automotive Systems, Inc., who is solely responsible for provisions of related OSS compliance.
Connected Services
Connected Services Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Connected Services
Navigation
Navigation requires a specific OnStar or connected service plan.
Press Q to receive Turn-by-Turn directions
or have them sent to the vehicle navigation screen, if equipped. A destination transfer from OnStar will show the detail view of the destination when it is transferred from OnStar to the Navigation application. See www.onstar.com for a coverage map. Services vary by model. Map coverage is available in the United States and Canada.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
1. Press Q to connect to an Advisor.
2. Request directions to be downloaded to the vehicle.
Send Directions to Vehicle
If equipped, directions can be sent to the navigation screen.
Press Q, then ask the Advisor to download
directions to the navigation system, if equipped. After the call ends, the navigation screen will provide prompts to
Connected Services 413
begin driving directions. Routes that are sent to the navigation screen can only be canceled through the navigation system.
See www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Connections
The following services help with staying connected.
For coverage maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Ensuring Security
. Change the default passwords for the Wi-Fi hotspot and myChevrolet mobile application. Make these passwords different from each other and use a combination of letters and numbers to increase the security.
. Change the default name of the SSID (Service Set Identifier). This is your network's name that is visible to other wireless devices. Choose a unique name and avoid family names or vehicle descriptions.
414 Connected Services
Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fi hotspot that provides access to the Internet and web content at 4G LTE speed. Up to seven mobile devices can be connected. A data plan is required. Use the in-vehicle controls only when it is safe to do so.
1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspot information,
press = to open the OnStar app on the
infotainment display, then select Wi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles, touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings on the screen.
2. The Wi-Fi settings will display the Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID), password, and on some vehicles, the connection type (no Internet connection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), and signal quality (poor, good, excellent). The LTE icon shows connection to Wi-Fi. It is possible that the icon may not illuminate even though the vehicle has an active connection.
3. To change the SSID or password, press
Q or call 1-888-4ONSTAR to connect
with an Advisor. On some vehicles, the SSID and password can be changed in the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
After initial set-up, your vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot will connect automatically to your mobile devices. Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fi on or off on your mobile device, using the myChevrolet mobile app, or by contacting an OnStar Advisor. On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also be managed from the Wi-Fi Hotspot menu.
MyChevrolet Mobile App (If Available)
Download the myChevrolet mobile app to compatible Apple and Android smartphones. Chevrolet users can access the following services from a smartphone:
. Remotely start/stop the vehicle, if factory-equipped.
. Lock/unlock doors, if equipped with automatic locks.
. Activate the horn and lamps.
. Check the vehicle's charge level, range, or tire pressure, if factory-equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitor System.
. Send destinations to the vehicle.
. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S. market only).
. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot on/off, manage settings, and monitor data consumption, if equipped.
. Locate a dealer and schedule service.
. Request Roadside Assistance. . Set a parking reminder with pin drop,
take a photo, make a note, and set a timer. . Connect with Chevrolet on social media.
Features are subject to change. For myChevrolet mobile app information and compatibility, see www.chevrolet.com.
An active OnStar or connected service plan may be required. A compatible device, factory-installed remote start, and power locks are required. Data rates apply. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations.
Remote Services
Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlock the doors or sound the horn and flash the lamps.
Marketplace
OnStar Advisors can provide offers from restaurants and retailers on your route, help locate hotels, or book a room. These services vary by market.
Diagnostics
By monitoring and reporting on the vehicle's key systems, OnStar Advanced Diagnostics, if equipped, provides a way to keep up on maintenance. Capabilities vary by model. See www.onstar.com for details and system limitations. Features are subject to change. For updates on feature capabilities, see www.chevrolet.com. Message and data rates may apply.
Connected Services 415
416 Index
Index
A Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Adaptive
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Additional
OnStar Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Adjustments
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Advanced
Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Agreements
Trademarks and License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Filter, Passenger Compartment . . . . . . . . 180 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Suspension Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . 64 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . 63 What Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . 63 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Airbags Adding Equipment to the Vehicle . . . . . . . 69 Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Replacing System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Servicing Airbag-Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . 68
Alarm Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Alert Blind Zone Steering Assist (BZSA) . . . . . . 269 Lane Change (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Rear Cross Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Rear Pedestrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154 Antenna
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Apple CarPlay and Android Auto . . . . . . . . . 167 Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Assistance Systems Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Assistance Systems (cont'd) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Automatic Parking Assist (APA) . . . . . . . . 254 Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Blind Zone Steering (BZSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Driver Attention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB) . . . . . . . . . 265 Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Parking and Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 259 Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . 257 Surround Vision Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Surround Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Traffic Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Audio Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Automatic Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Automatic (cont'd) Emergency Braking (AEB) Disabled Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Parking Assist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Avoiding Untrusted Media Devices . . . . . . . .157
B Battery
Charging Electrical Requirements . . . . . . 291 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . 148 Fault Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . .330, 375 Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Index 417
Brakes (cont'd) Electric Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Automatic Emergency (AEB) . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Front Pedestrian (FPB) System . . . . . . . . . 265 Reverse Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Bulb Replacement
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
C California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . 323 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . 1 Camera
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Car Wash Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Carbon Monoxide
Midgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
418 Index
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Charge
Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Charge Cord Connected Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Delay Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Status Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Utility Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Child Restraints Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 89 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Cleaning Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 111 Collision Alert
Forward (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Compartment
Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Compartments
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Compressor Kit, Tire Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Connected Services
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Connections Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Control Traction and Electronic Stability . . . . . . . 206 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Controls On-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . 401 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Cruise Control (cont'd) Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Super . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Customer Information Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 404 Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . 396 Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
D Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Data Collection
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Delayed Charging Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Diagnostics Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Digital Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Disabled Vehicle Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Drive Unit Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Driver Assistance Systems, Advanced . . . . . . . . . 243 Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Attention Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 133 Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Mode Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Teen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Driving Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Characteristics and Towing Tips . . . . . . . . 292 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Driving (cont'd) If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Impaired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 One-Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Driving for Better Energy Efficiency . . . . . . .183 Dual
Automatic Climate Control System . . . . 176
E Electric
Brake Boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Requirements for Battery Charging . . . . 291 System Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Electrical System Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Index 419
Electrical System (cont'd) Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . 341, 343
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Emergency OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Energy Efficiency Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Exterior
Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
F Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Floor Console
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
420 Index
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Fluid
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Four-Wheel Steering Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Four-Wheel Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Frequency Statement Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Front Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Front Seats Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Fuses Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . 341, 343 Underhood Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
G Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Gauges Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Power Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Warning Lights and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 108
General Information Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Generator Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Global Positioning System (GPS) . . . . . . . . . 160 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Guidance
Problems with the Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
H Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Headlamps (cont'd) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . 143 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Ventilated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 High Voltage Battery Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 High Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . . . . . 335 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . 54 HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
I Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Indicator
Pedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Indicator (cont'd) Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Indicators Warning Lights and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . .71 Information
Publication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Infotainment
Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Inspection
Multi-Point Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 111 Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 149
J Jump
Starting - North America . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
L Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Lamps Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . . . . . 143 Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . . . . . 148 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 86 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Lights Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Index 421
Lights (cont'd) Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Battery Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Charge Cord Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Driver Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Four-Wheel Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Gauges and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Low State of Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Service Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
422 Index
Lights (cont'd) Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic Stability Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Vehicle Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Low State of Charge Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
M Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Media Avoiding Untrusted Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Messages
Propulsion Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Midgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Mirrors Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . 36 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Mode Car Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Modes Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Multi-Point Vehicle Inspection (MPVI) . . . . 390
N Navigation
Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
O Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Off-Road
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 On-Screen Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Onboard Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 One-Pedal Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Online Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Outlets Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Overview (cont'd) Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
P Park
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245, 253 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Parking Assist Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Parking or Backing Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Compartment Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Pedestrian Safety Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Phone Apple CarPlay and Android Auto . . . . . . . 167 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 164 Plug-In Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Port USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Positioning Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Indicator Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Problems with Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . .161 Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Proposition 65 Warning
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Propulsion
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Publication Ordering Information . . . . . . . .404
R Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153, 154 Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Index 423
Radio (cont'd) Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Ready Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Rear
Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Recognition Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . 392 Recorder Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Records Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Regenerative Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Remote Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
424 Index
Replacement Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Replacement Parts Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 LATCH System Parts After a Crash . . . . . . 86 Seat Belt System Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reporting Safety Defects Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Requirements Electrical Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Restraints Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Ride Control Systems
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
S Safety
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Pedestrian Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Safety Defects Reporting Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Buckle To Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . . . . . 54 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Seats Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Heated and Ventilated, Front . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seats (cont'd) Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Underseat Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Securing Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 89 Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . 323 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Maintenance, General Information . . . . . 388 Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Limiter Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Status
Charging Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Four-Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Storage Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Underseat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Storage Areas Underhood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Struts Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Surround
Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Switches
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 System
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Global Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
T Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Teen Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Index 425
Tires (cont'd) Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 351 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Sealant and Compressor Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . 359 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . 360 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . 357 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Towing App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
426 Index
Traction Control System (TCS)/Electronic Stability Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Control/Electronic Stability Control . . . . 206 Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Trademarks and License Agreements . . . . . .173 Traffic
Sign Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Towing App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Transfer Case Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . 401 Transporting a Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . 195 TTY Users Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .145
U Underhood
Compartment Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Underhood (cont'd) Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Updates Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157 Using Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Utility Interruption of Charging . . . . . . . . . . 291
V Vehicle
Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Ready Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Vehicle (cont'd) Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Vehicle Care Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Voltage Devices and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
W Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 108 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 357 When to Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Wiring, High Voltage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Index 427
United States
Scan to Access
· Owner's Manuals · Warranty Information · Connected Services · My Chevrolet Rewards · myChevrolet Mobile App · How-To Videos · Vehicle Diagnostics · Scheduled Maintenance · Vehicle Features · Many Additional Resources
Canada
United States
Customer Assistance 1-800-222-1020
Roadside Assistance 1-800-243-8872
United States and Canada
Connected Services 1-888-4-ONSTAR
Canada
Customer Assistance 1-800-263-3777
Roadside Assistance 1-800-268-6800
24Silverado_EV_enUS_16702912B_2024FEB12
Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode Arbortext Advanced Print Publisher 9.1.550/W Unicode